r^^^^^ffm 
 
 WVvv 
 
 
 ^w>^*i 
 
 
 Uft*\>A* 
 
 
 E['i&>'«>-!5S.<«><^!; 
 
 i S' < 'S> < ^ < ^>'^><'S'<^<! 
 
 - _ _ — -=~ .=- ^ -^ >^ ^as?^se?^t^-^^,^ 
 
 || LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 ||| 1 "'? $ff8 w |» ■■ -:- # 
 
 UNITED STATES 0E SfeM 
 
 >^j,^<Si>-^,^fc,<a t ,<B„<^, <fe ,,: 
 
 ti&«tf*hMi 
 
 
 ;>- A i^^ A ' 
 
 
 „.->ii»»n«\ 
 
 T^aVWV 
 
 'V>»V 
 
 Aft 
 
 
*^2*M.>, fti 'Tnita.fc 
 
 'mte&sm*. 
 
 &*<m 
 
 
 #&*'«&■ 
 
 VM"^*- U'v^^j 
 
 ^%.; 
 
 .;v v 
 
 ! A* • ^ '- »aAa 
 
 
 
 
 
CONCISE SYSTEM 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS AND REGULATIONS 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 JlUlitta a\\b feohtntea* of tl)e Hnitefc 0tates, 
 
 COMPREHENDING 
 
 THE EXERCISES AND MOVEMENTS OF THE INFANTRY, LIGHT 
 INFANTRY, AND RIFLEMEN; CAVALRY AND ARTILLERY; 
 
 TOGETHER WITH THE 
 
 MANNER OF DOING DUTY IN GARRISON AND IN CAMP, 
 
 AND THE FORMS OF 
 
 PARADES, REVIEWS, INSPECTIONS, ARRESTS AND CONFINEMENTS, COURTS 
 MARTIAL, DUTIES OF QUARTERMASTERS AND OF COMMISSARIES OF 
 SUBSISTENCE, MORNING REPORT, MUSTER ROLL, PAY ROLL, 
 REQUISITION FOR ORDNANCE AND ORDNANCE 
 STORES, PROVISION RETURN, ESTI- 
 MATE OF CLOTHING, 
 AS ESTABLISHED BY AUTHORITY FOR THE.GOVERNMENT OF THB REOULAH ABMY. 
 
 PREPARED AND ARRANGED BY 
 
 BREVET CAPTAIN S. COOPER, 
 
 Jiidrde- Camp and Assistant Adjutant-General. 
 
 4 
 
 UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 
 
 : 
 
 MAJOR-GENERAL ALEXANDER MACOMB, 
 
 Commanding the Army of the United States. 
 
 NEW EDITION, 
 
 WITH ADDITIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA : 
 
 ROBERT P. DESILVER. 
 
 1844. 
 

 i i 
 
 Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1843, by Major 
 «S. Cooper, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Eastern 
 District »f Pennsylvania. 
 
 6TEREOTYr-E» 1Y JOHN FAG AN, 
 rillLAJ/KLPHIA. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Iw this country, the Militia, from, the nature of the 
 government, must be depended on principally for repel- 
 ling sudden invasions, and suppressing domestic insur- 
 rections . it ought, therefore, to be properly organized 
 and instructed in order to be effectual for those purposes. 
 The great difficulty in the way of its becoming properly 
 instructed, has thus far been the want of a simple ana 
 uniform system of instruction — one easily to be com- 
 prehended and readily applied. The books published 
 for the regular army are too voluminous and diffuse to 
 supply this want ; and the various works compiled as a 
 substitute, are all more or less objectionable. 
 
 The present volume is intended to remove the diffi- 
 culty as far as practicable. It embraces the substance 
 of all our systems of tactics, whether for the Infantry 
 of the Line, the Light Infantry, the Riflemen, the Artil- 
 lery, or the Cavalry, together with such parts of the 
 regulations relative to camp and garrison duties, parades, 
 reviews, and inspections, as may be necessary to the 
 Militia. 
 
 As the same general principles regulate the tactics 
 applicable to the different arms of service, those for 
 the Infantry which constitute the main body of an army, 
 are alone laid down at large. 
 
 Artillery and Cavalry should be instructed as Infan- 
 
 3 
 
try, in order to act, when separated from their guns 
 and horses. 
 
 The Artillery instruction in this work, embraces the 
 service of the piece, and the manoeuvres in the field 
 and in the batteries ; that for the Cavalry, from " the 
 mounting horse" to the manoeuvres in squadron. 
 
 The words of command given by the instructor who 
 1 represents the commanding officer, are printed in capi 
 tals ; those of the subordinate officers in italics. 
 
PART I. 
 
 INFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 A2 
 
The words of command given by the Instruc- 
 tor^ (who represents the commander,) are printed 
 in Capital letters. 
 
CONTENTS OF PART FIRST 
 
 OF THE SaUAD. 
 
 ta 
 
 Position of the soldier 9 
 
 Facings 9 
 
 The direct step . 10 
 
 The oblique step 10 
 
 Manual of arms ■ 10 
 
 Firings : . . » 21 
 
 The direct fire * 21 
 
 The oblique fire 21 
 
 The fire by file 22 
 
 Alignments ; ,, < 23 
 
 To inarch to the front 23 
 
 The quick step 24 
 
 To march the back step 24 
 
 To march by the flan k 24 
 
 To halt and face to the front 25 
 
 Marching by a flank, to change direction 25 
 
 Marching by the front, to march by a flank 25 
 
 Wheelings 25 
 
 Turning 27 
 
 To stack arms 27 
 
 To resume arms 28 
 
 OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Formation of the company 33 
 
 To pass from two ranks into one rank 34 
 
 Posts of officers and others in column > 35 
 
 To open ranks 30 
 
 Alignments in open ranks . . , . . .. , 36 
 
 To close ranks s..i 37 
 
 To fire Dy company ... 37 
 
 To fire by file 37 
 
 To fire by the rear-rank . . .~ .. 38 
 
 To advance in line t .* 38 
 
 To halt and align the company 39 
 
 The oblique march in line. . . ■ . i . -. 39 
 
 To retire in line 39 
 
 To halt and face to the front.... 40 
 
 To march by the flank 40 
 
 To change direction by file 40 
 
 To halt and face to the front 40 
 
 To form by file on right or left 41 
 
 To form by company or by platoon info line 41 
 
 Marching by the front, to march by the flank 42 
 
 Marching in column by platoons, to march by a flank in the same direction.. .42 
 
 To break from line into column by platoon 42 
 
 To march in column .43 
 
 To change direction 43 
 
 To halt the column and wheel it into line 44 
 
 To diminish and increase front of column in marching 44 
 
 To diminish and increase front of column by files 45 
 
 To march in column of route 4G 
 
 Countermarch 47 
 
 Marching in column by platoons, to form on right or left into line 48 
 
 Manual of arms for sergeants and corporals 49 
 
 Ma-.iual of the sword for officers 52 
 
 Colour-salute 53 
 
 Instructions for the drum-major 53 
 
 OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of a regiment or battalion in order of battle 59 
 
 To open ranks 60 
 
 To close ranks 61 
 
 1 
 
VHI CONTENTS OF PAKT FIRST. 
 
 Cm 
 
 Manual of arms 61 
 
 Loadings and firings 61 
 
 To stack and resume arms 63 
 
 Manner of determining a line 63 
 
 Movements 64 
 
 Movements from line ■ 65 
 
 No. J. To break to the right into column 65 
 
 2. To break to the right to march to the left 66 
 
 3. To break to the rear into column 66 
 
 4. To ploy into close column or mass 67 
 
 5. To ploy into column doubled on the centre 68 
 
 6. Changes of front 69 
 
 7. To march by a flank 70 
 
 8. To advance in line 72 
 
 9. To halt the battalion and to align it 73 
 
 10. To retire in line 73 
 
 11. To halt the battalion and face it to the front. .«.. 74 
 
 12. Passage of obstacles 74 
 
 13. To pass a defile in retreat 76 
 
 Movements from open column. ...'. 78 
 
 No. 1. To march in column 78 
 
 2. To change direction in marching 78 
 
 3. To halt the column 78 
 
 4. To form to the left in to line 79 
 
 5. To form line to the right, by inversion 79 
 
 6. To form on right into line 80 
 
 1. To form to the front into line 80 
 
 8. To form line faced to the rear 81 
 
 9, 10. To form line by two movements 83 
 
 11, 12. To form close column 83 
 
 13. Countermarch 84 
 
 Column in route 84 
 
 Movements from close column 85 
 
 No. 1. To form open column by the head 85 
 
 2. To form open column on the rear 86 
 
 3. To form open column on the head 86 
 
 4. To change direction in marching • 87 
 
 5. To change direction from a halt 88 
 
 6. Countermarch 89 
 
 7. To form division from company 89 
 
 8. To deploy on first division 90 
 
 9. To deploy on fourth division 91 
 
 10. To deploy on an intermediate division 92 
 
 Movements from column doubled on centre 93 
 
 No. 1. To form line to the front 93 
 
 I 2. To form line to the right 93 
 
 Dispositions against cavalry 93 
 
 [ Rules for manoeuvring by the rear -rank 07 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRY AND RIFLE. 
 
 OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Deployments 109 
 
 1. To deploy forward 109 
 
 2. To deploy by the flank Ill 
 
 3. To extend intervals 112 
 
 4. To close intervals 113 
 
 5. To relieve skirmishers 114 
 
 To march in advance 114 
 
 To march in retreat ■ 115 
 
 To march by a flank 115 
 
 The firings 116 
 
 Rallying and assembling 117 
 
 OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 To deploy a battalion as skirmishers 119 
 
 To rally the battalion deployed a.* skirmishers 121 
 
PART I. 
 
 OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 Position of the Soldier. 
 
 Heels on the same line and as close together as the eon 
 formation of the man will permit ; toes turned out equally, 
 so as to form nearly a right angle ; knees straight but not 
 stiff; body inclined a little forward ; shoulders square ; arms 
 hanging naturally ; elbows near the body ; palms of the 
 hands turned a little to the front ; the little finger behind the 
 seam of the pantaloons ; face direct to the front ; chin a little 
 drawn in without constraint ; eyes looking to the front so as 
 to meet the ground at a distance of fifteen paces. 
 
 EYES-RIGHT.— At the word eight, turn the head 
 gently to the right, so as to bring the corner of the left eye 
 nearest the nose, in a line with the junction of the heels, 
 the eyes directed in a line with the eyes of the men in the 
 same rank. 
 
 FRONT. — Resume the position to the front. 
 
 EYES-LEFT — Will be executed by inverse means. 
 
 REST. — Stand at ease, without moving the left foot from 
 its position. 
 
 ATTENTION-SQUAD.— At the word squad, resume 
 the prescribed position and steadiness. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 SQUAD, BY THE RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK. 
 RIGHT (or LEFT) FACE.— At the word face, turn on 
 the left heel, by raising a little the left toe, at the same time 
 bring the right heel to the side of the left, and on the same 
 line, so that the line of the heels shall be exactly at right 
 angles with the former line. 
 
 SQUAD-ABOUT. — At the word about, turn on the 
 left heel, bring the left toe to the front, carry the right foot 
 to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and three inches from the 
 left heel, the foet square to each other ; seize at the same 
 time the inner corner of the cartridge-box with the right hand. 
 
10 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 FACE. — Turn on both heels, by raising the toes a little, 
 extend the thighs and face to the rear ; bring the right heel 
 by the side of the left, and quit the hold of the cartridge-box. 
 
 If under arms, turn the left hand at the word about, as 
 in the first motion of present-arms, and replace the hand 
 and piece at the instant of bringing the right heel to the side 
 of the left. 
 
 The Direct Step. 
 
 The direct step, in common time, is twenty-eight inches, 
 reckoning from heel to heel, and at the rate of ninety in a 
 minute. 
 
 SQUAD-FORWARD.— Throw the weight of the body 
 on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 
 
 MARCH. — Step off with the left foot, the knees straight, 
 the toes pointed a little downwards and turned slightly out ; 
 the body inclined a little forward, and the foot planted flat at 
 the prescribed distance ; the right foot next passed to the front 
 in the same manner. 
 
 SQUAD-HALT. — At the word halt, stop short on the 
 foot advanced, and bring up the other without stamping. 
 
 The Oblique Step. 
 Marching in the direct step in common time. 
 
 RIGHT OBLIQUE-MARCH.— At the word march, 
 given at the instant the left foot comes to the ground, carry 
 the right foot obliquely to the right and front, twenty-six 
 inches from the left, and eighteen inches on that side, turn- 
 ing the toes a little inward ; next advance the left foot, by 
 the shortest line, eighteen inches in front of the right heel : 
 continue to march in this way, keeping the head and shoul- 
 ders square to the front. 
 
 To resume the Direct March. 
 FORWARD -MARCH.— At the word march, given at 
 the instant either foot comes to the ground, resume the direct 
 march. 
 
 Manual of Arms. 
 
 This is taught to two men, placed at first side by side in 
 one rank, elbow to elbow, and next in a single file, that is 
 one behind the other. 
 
 10 
 
TART I. OF THE SQUAD. 11 
 
 Each command is executed in one time (or pause) and is 
 divided into motions. 
 
 The celerity of each motion, with the exception of the 
 motions relative to the cartridge, to the rammer, and to the 
 fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, is fixed at the ninetieth 
 part of a minute. As the motions here excepted cannot be 
 executed at the rate prescribed, they are notwithstanding to 
 be executed with promptness and regularity. 
 
 The last syllable of the command decides the brisk exe- 
 cution of the first motion of each time. The commands two, 
 three, and four, decide the brisk execution of the other 
 motions. The men are taught to execute the time without 
 resting in its different motions, as soon as they comprehend 
 the positions of the several motions of a time. 
 
 Before proceeding to the manual of arms, the men, at 
 shouldered arms, repeat the movements of eyes-right, 
 i-eft, and front, and the facings. 
 
 Position of shoulder-arms. 
 
 (Fig. 1.) The musket in the left hand, the arm very little 
 bent, the elbow Tiack, near the body, the palm of the hand 
 pressing on the outer flat of the butt, the outer edge of the 
 latter on the upper joints of the fingers, the heel of the butt 
 between the fore and middle fingers, the thumb on the front 
 screw of the butt-plate, the remaining fingers under the butt, 
 the butt more or less kept back, according to the conforma- 
 tion of the soldier, so that the piece seen from the front may 
 appear to be perpendicular, and also that the movement of 
 the thigh, in marching, may not raise it, or cause it to waver, 
 the stock below the tail-band, resting against the hollow of 
 the shoulder, just within the joint, the right arm hanging 
 naturallv, as prescribed for the soldier without arms. 
 
 SUPPORT-ARMS.— (Fig. 2.) 1st mo. With the right 
 hand seize briskly the handle, or small, of the stock, four 
 inches below the lock, raising a little, but not turning the 
 piece. 
 
 2d mo. Take the left hand from the butt, extend the left 
 fore-arm upwards across the body, under the cock, the hand 
 flat on the right breast. 
 
 3d mo. Drop the right arm smartly into its position. 
 
 REST. — Bring up smartly the right hand to the small of 
 the stock and stand at ease. 
 
 M 
 
12 rART I. OP THE SQUAD. 
 
 ATTENTION-SQUAD.— Resume the. position of the 
 third motion of support-arms, at the word squad. 
 
 CARRY- ARMS.— 1st mo. Carry quickly the right 
 hand to the small. 
 
 2d mo. Place quickly the left hand upon the butt. 
 
 3d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position, 
 and drop with the left, at the same time, the piece into the 
 position of shoulder-arms. 
 
 ARMS-PORT.— (Fig. 3.) Throw the piece diagonally 
 across the body, the lock to the front, seize it smartly at the 
 same instant, with both hands, the right at the handle, the 
 left at the tail-band, the two thumbs pointing towards tho 
 muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing opposite to 
 the point of the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered. 
 The palm of the right hand above, that of the left, under the 
 piece, and the nails of both next to the body, to which the 
 elbows are closed. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1 st mo. Bring the piece smartly 
 to the left shoulder, placing the left hand under the butt. 
 
 2d mo. Drop the right hand smartly by the side. 
 
 PRESENT-ARMS.— (Fig. 4.) 1st mo. Turn the piece 
 with the left hand, the lock out, and seize the small at the 
 same time with the right hand, the piece perpendicular, and 
 detached from the shoulder, the left hand remaining under 
 the butt. 
 
 2d mo. Complete the turning inward of the piece, so as 
 to bring it erect before the centre of the body, the rammer 
 to the front, the right hand under and against the guard ; 
 seize it smartly at the same time with the left hand above 
 the lock, the little finger against the feather-spring, the 
 thumb extended along the barrel and 'on the stock, the fore- 
 arm resting on the body without constraint, and the hand at 
 the height of the elbow. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS — 1st mo. Turn the piece with 
 the right hand, the barrel out ; raise and support it against 
 the left shoulder with the right hand, drop the left under the 
 butt, the right hand resting on, without grasping, the handle 
 
 2d mo. Drop quickly the right hand into its position. 
 
 ORDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Drop the piece smartly, by 
 extending the left arm ; seize it at the same time with tho 
 right hand above and near the tail-band; quit the hold of the 
 left hand, and carry the piece opposite the right shoulder, 
 
 12 
 
TART I. OF THE SdUAD. 13 
 
 ihc rammer in front, the iittle finger behind the barrel, the 
 right hand supported against the hip, the butt three inehes 
 from the ground, the piece erect, the left hand hanging by 
 the side. 
 
 2d mo. Let the piece slip through the right hand to the 
 ground without shock, and take the position about to be de- 
 scribed. 
 
 Position of order-arms. 
 
 (Fig. 5.) The hand low, the barrel between the thumb 
 and fore-finger extended along the stock ; the other fingers 
 extended and joined; the muzzle about two inches from the 
 right shoulder; the rammer in front; the toe, or beak, of the 
 butt, against, and in a line with the toe of the right foot, the 
 barrel perpendicular. 
 
 REST.— Stand at ease. 
 
 ATTENTION-SQUAD.— At the word squad, resume 
 the position of order-arms. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise smartly the piece 
 with the right hand, carry it against the left shoulder, turn- 
 ing it, so as to bring the barrel to the front ; place at the same 
 time the left hand under the butt, and slip the right hand 
 down to the lock. 
 
 2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its posi- 
 tion. 
 
 CHARGE-BAYONET. — (Fig. 6.) 1st mo. Make a 
 half face to the right on the left heel, place at the same 
 time the right foot behind, and at right angles with the left, 
 the hollow of the right foot opposite to, and about three 
 inches from the left heel : turn the piece with the left hand, 
 the lock outwards, and seize the handle at the same time 
 with the right hand, the musket perpendicular and detached 
 from the shoulder ; leave the left hand under the butt. 
 
 2d mo. Bring down the piece with the right hand into 
 the left, the latter seizing it a little in advance of the tail- 
 band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body, the right 
 hand supported against the hip, the point of the bayonet at 
 the height of the eye. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Face to the front by 
 turning on the left heel, bring up the right by the side of the 
 left heel ; at the same time, spring up the piece with the right 
 B i 13 
 
14 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 hand to the left shoulder, and place the left hand under .he 
 butt. 
 
 2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position. 
 
 LOAD IN TWELVE TIMES.— LOAD.— (Fig. 7.) 1st 
 mo. As the first motion of charge-bayonet, except that 
 the hollow of the right foot is brought up against the left heel. 
 
 2d mo. Biing down the piece with the right hand into 
 the left, which, at the instant, seizes it at the tail-band, the 
 thumb extended on the stock, the butt under the right fore, 
 arm, the handle against the body and about two inches under 
 the right breast, the muzzle at the height of the eye, the 
 guard turned a little out, the left elbow supported against the 
 side. At the instant the piece falls into the left hand, the 
 right thumb is placed on the steel above the flint, the fore, 
 fingers closed, the right fore-arm along the butt. 
 
 8. OPEN-PAN.— Open the pan, by pushing forward the 
 steel with the right thumb, the left hand resisting and hold- 
 ing the piece firm ; draw back immediately the right elbow, 
 carry the hand to the cartridge-box, passing it between the 
 butt and the body, and open the box. 
 
 3. HANDLE-CARTRIDGE.— Seize a cartridge with a 
 thumb and the two next fingers, and place it between the 
 teeth, the right hand passing between the butt and the 
 body. 
 
 4. TEAR-CARTRIDGE.— Tear the paper down to the 
 powder, holdihg the Cartridge upright between the thumb 
 and next two fingers; in this position place it against the 
 pah, the palm of the right hand turned towards the body, tho 
 right elbow supported on the butt. 
 
 5. PRIME. — Drop the head a little, fix the eyes on the 
 pan, fill it with powder, press together the top of the car- 
 tridge with the thumb and fore-finger, raise the head, and 
 place the two last fingers of the right hand firmly behind 
 nnd against the steel. 
 
 6» SHUT-PAN.— Resisting the motion with the left 
 hand, shut the pan smartly with the fingers behind the steel, 
 holding carefully the cartridge with the two next fingers and 
 the thumb; seize immediately the handle with the two 
 remaining fingers and the palm of the right hand, the right 
 wrist touching the body, the elbow back, and a little detached 
 from the body. 
 
 T. CAST-ABOUT.— (Fig. 8.) 1st mo. Pass the piece 
 
PAKT I. OF THE SQUAD. 15 
 
 along the left thigh, after bringing it upright near the body ; 
 to effect this, press the butt strongly, extending smartly the 
 right arm, without lowering the shoulder; turn at the same 
 time the rammer towards the body, open the left hand to let 
 the piece slide through it towards and near the middle band, 
 the elbow remaining near the body, the cock bearing on the 
 right thumb ; at the same time face to the front, turning on 
 the left heel, and carry the right foot forward, the heel 
 against the hollow of the left foot. 
 
 2d mo. Quit the hold of the right hand ; through the 
 left, let the piece descend to the ground, without shock, 
 along and near the body ; raise at the same time the right 
 hand to the height of, and near the muzzle, holding the top 
 of the cartridge up, the left hand against the body, the pieco 
 touching the left thigh, the muzzle opposite to the centre of 
 the body. 
 
 8. CHARGE-CARTRIDGE— (Fig. 8.) Fix the eye 
 on the muzzle, turn quickly the back of the right hand 
 towards the body, in order to discharge the powder into tho 
 barrel ; raise the elbow to the height of the wrist, shake the 
 cartridge, force it into the muzzle, and leave the hand 
 reversed, the fingers closed but not clenched. 
 
 9. DRAW-RAMMER.— 1st mo. Drop smartly the right 
 elbow and seize the rammer between the thumb and fore- 
 finger bent, the other fingers shut ; draw it smartly extend- 
 »ig the arm ; seize the rammer again at the middle, between 
 Ae thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm to 
 /he front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of 
 the hand ; clear the rammer from the pipes by again extend- 
 ing the arm. 
 
 2d mo. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayone 1 
 and the face, closing the fingers, the rammer of the rear- 
 rank man grazing the right shoulder of the man in front 
 the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the 
 butt of the rammer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet in- 
 serted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. 
 
 3d mo. Insert the butt of the rammer and force it down 
 as low as the hand. 
 
 10. RAM-CARTRIDGE.— (Fio. 9.) Extend the arm 
 to its full length to seize the rammer between the right 
 thumb extended and the fore»finger bent, the other fingers 
 
 ; with force ram down twice seize the rammer at the 
 
 15 
 
16 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 little end, between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other 
 fingers closed, the right elbow touching the body. 
 
 11. RETURN-RAMMER — 1st mo. Draw briskly the> 
 rammer, seize it at the middle between the thumb and fore- 
 finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, 
 the eyes following the movement of the hand ; clear the 
 rammer from the barrel by extending the arm. 
 
 2d mo. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayonet 
 and the face, closing the fingers, the rammer of the rear- 
 rank man grazing the right shoulder of the man in front, 
 the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the 
 little end of the rammer opposite the first pipe, but not yet 
 inserted ; the eyes fixed on that pipe. 
 
 3d mo. Insert the little end, and with the thumb force it 
 as low as the middle baud ; raise quickly the hand a little 
 bent, place the little finger on the butt of the rammer, and 
 force it down ; lower the left hand on the barrel to the extent 
 of the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 
 
 12. SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise the piece 
 with the left hand along the left side, the hand at the height 
 of the chin, the fore-arm touching the piece, the barrel to 
 the front ; drop at the same time, the right hand to seize the 
 piece a little above the handle, the fore-fingers touching the 
 cock, and the thumb on the counter-plate. 
 
 2d mo. Raise the piece with the right hand, drop the left, 
 and place it under the butt, bring back the right heel to the 
 side of the left, and on the same line; support the piece with 
 the right hand against the shoulder, in the position prescribed 
 for shoulder-akms, the right hand resting on without grasp- 
 ing the piece. 
 
 3d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position, 
 by the side of the thigh. 
 
 READY.— (Fig. 10.) 1st mo. As the first motion of the 
 first time of load. 
 
 2d mo. Bring the piece with the right hand to the middle 
 of the body, place the left hand, the little finger touching 
 the feather-spring, the thumb extended on the stock at the 
 height of the chin, the counter-plate almost turned towards 
 .he body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front. 
 
 3d mo. Place the thumb on the head of the cock, the 
 fore-finger under and on the guard, the other three fingers 
 joined to the first, the elbow at the height of the hand. 
 
 16 
 
I'ART I. OF THE SQUAD. 17 
 
 4th mo. Close the right elbow smartly to the body in 
 cocking ; seize the piece at the handle, let it descend along 
 the body in the left hand to the tail-band, which remains at 
 the height of the shoulder. 
 
 AIM. — (Fig. 11, 12.) Drop smartly the muzzle, the left 
 hand remaining at the tail-band ; support the butt against 
 the right shoulder, the left elbow a little down ; shut the 
 left eye, direct the right along the barrel, drop the head upon 
 the butt to catch the object, and place the fore-finger on the 
 trigger. The rear-rank at the same time places the right 
 foot about eight inches towards the left heel of the man next 
 on the right. 
 
 FIRE. — Apply the lore-finger with force to the trigger, 
 without lowering or turning the head, and remain in that 
 position. 
 
 LOAD. — 1st mo. Bring back the piece quickly and take 
 the position of the second motion of the first time of load, 
 except that the right thumb, instead of being placed against 
 the steel, seizes the head of the cock, with the fore-finger bent, 
 and the other fingers closed. 
 
 2d mo. Half-cock, carry the right hand immediately to 
 the cartridge-box, passing it between the butt and the body, 
 and open the box. 
 
 If, after firing, it be intended to bring the squad to the 
 shoulder, instead of loading, the command is given : 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS — At the word shoulder, take the 
 position of the second motion of the first time of load, half- 
 cock, shut pan, and seize the handle of the piece. At the 
 word arms, come to the shoulder and face to the front. 
 
 The squad being in the position of aim, to habituate the 
 men to wait for the word fire, the command is sometimes 
 given : 
 
 RECOVER-ARMS.— Withdraw the finger from the trig- 
 ger, throw up smartly the muzzle, and retake the position 
 of the fourth motion of ready. 
 
 If from this position the squad is to be brought to a shoul- 
 der, the command is given : 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— At the word shoulder, face to 
 the front, bring the piece to the middle of the body, the 
 left thumb at the height of the chin, the little finger touching 
 the feather-spring ; next place the right thumb on the head 
 of the cock, support the fore-finger on the trigger, sustain at 
 B2 17 
 
18 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 the same time the cock in ks descent till the flint nearlt 
 touches the steel, raise the cock to the half-cock notch, and 
 seize the handle of the piece with the right hand. At the 
 word arms, carry the piece smartly to the shoulder, and 
 take the position of shoulder-arsis. 
 
 UNFIX-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Drop the piece by a 
 smart extension of the left arm, seize it with the right hand 
 above, and near the tail-band. 
 
 2d mo. Drop the piece with the right hand along the left 
 thigh, seize it with the left hand above the right, lengthen out 
 the left arm, rest the butt on the ground, without shock, and car- 
 ry, at the same time, the rigbt hand to the bayonet, seize it at 
 the socket and shank, so that the lower end of the socket may bo 
 about an inch below the heel of the palm, and that in wrest- 
 ing off the bayonet, the thumb may be extended on the blade. 
 
 3d mo. Wrest off the bayonet, return it to the scabbard, 
 place immediately the right little finger on the butt of tho 
 rammer, lower the left hand along the barrel, in extending 
 the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— As the twelfth time of load. 
 
 SECURE-ARMS.— (Fio. 13.) 1st mo. Seize quickly 
 the piece with the right hand, the thumb on the countcr- 
 plate, and the fore-finger against the cock; detach the piece 
 from the shoulder at the same time, the barrel to the front, 
 seize it at the tail-band with the left hand, the thumb ex- 
 tended on the rammer, the piece erect, opposito to tho 
 shoulder, the left elbow on the piece. 
 
 2d mo. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the left 
 hand remaining at the tail-band, the thumb on the rammer, to 
 prevent it from sliding out, the little linger resting against the 
 thigh, tin 1 point of tin; bayonet six or eight inches from tho 
 ground, the right hand falling at the same time into its position. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise the piece with 
 the left hand, but not too suddenly ; seize the handle with 
 the right hand to support it against the shoulder; quit tho 
 hold of the left hand, and place it quickly under the butt. 
 
 2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand to its position ; 
 drop at the same time the piece into the position of shoul- 
 BKR— ASMS. 
 
 rlX-P.AYONET.— 1st and 2d mos. As the first and 
 ■eeond motions of unfix— bayonet, except at the end of tho 
 
 second motion, the right hand goes to seize the bayonet by 
 
 18 
 
PART I. OF TI!K SQUAD. 10 
 
 the socket and shank, so that the lower (now upper) end of the 
 socket shall extend about an inch above the heel of the palm. 
 
 3d mo. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
 fix it on the muzzle ; place the right little finger on the butt 
 of the rammer. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— As the twelfth time of load. 
 
 TRAIL-ARMS.— (Fig. 14.) 1st mo. As the first motio 
 
 Of ORDER-ARMS. 
 
 2d mo. Incline a little the muzzle to the front, the butt 
 to the rear, and about three inches from the ground ; the 
 right hand supported at the hip, sustains the piece so that the 
 man in the rear-rank may not touch with the bayonet, the 
 man in his front. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— At the word shoulder, raise the 
 piece perpendicularly in the right hand : at the word asms, 
 execute what is prescribed for the shoulder, from order- arms. 
 
 . TO RIGHT SHOULDER, SHIFT-ARMS (Fig. 15.) 
 
 Turn the piece with the left hand, lock to the front, seize it 
 at the same time at the handle with the right hand, place it 
 on the right shoulder, the left hand not quitting the butt, the 
 cock above and resting on the shoulder, the muzzle up ; sus- 
 tain the piece in this position by placing the right hand on 
 the flat of the butt, so that the toe of the butt may be between 
 the first two fingers, the other two on the butt-plate ; let fall 
 the left hand by the side. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— Raise the piece by extending the 
 right arm, seize it with the left hand above the lock, carry 
 it against the left shoulder, turning the barrel to the front, 
 the right hand being at the handle ; place the left hand under 
 the butt, and let the right fall into its position. 
 
 ARMS-AT WILL. — Carry the piece at pleasure on 
 either shoulder with one or both hands, the muzzle always up. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— Retake smartly the position of 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS. 
 
 The squad being at order-arms with bayonets in the scab- 
 bards, to cause an inspection of arms, the command is given : 
 
 INSPECTION OF-ARMS.— 1 st mo. Face to the right 
 once and a half on the left heel, carrying the right foot per- 
 pendicularly to the rear of the alignment, about six inches 
 from and at right angles with the left foot ; seize promptly 
 the piece with the left hand a little above the middle band, 
 incline the muzzle to the rear without displacing the heel of 
 
 19 
 
20 TART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 the butt, the rammer turned towards the body ; carry at the 
 same time the right hand to the bayonet and seize it as pre- 
 scribed in the second motion of fix-rayonet. 
 
 2d mo Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
 fix it on the muzzle ; seize next the rammer, draw it as 
 explained in loading, in twelve times, and let it glide to the 
 bottom of the bore. 
 
 3d mo. Face promptly to the front, seize the piece with 
 the right hand, and retake the position of order- arms. 
 
 The inspector inspects, in succession, the piece of each 
 man, in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the 
 inspector reaches him, raises smartly his piece with his righ 
 hand, seizes it with the left between the tail-band, and the 
 feather-spring, the lock to the front, the left hand at the 
 height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye : the 
 inspector takes it with the right hand at the handle, and after 
 inspecting it, returns it to the man, who receives it back with 
 the right hand and replaces it in the position of order-arms. 
 
 When the inspector has passed him, each man retakes the 
 position prescribed in the command inspection of arms, 
 and returns the rammer; after which he laces to the front. 
 
 If, instead of inspection of arms, bayonets only are to be 
 fixed, the command is given: 
 
 FIX-BAYONET.— fake the position prescribed in the 
 first motion of inspection of arms; fix the bayonet and 
 face to the front. 
 
 If, after fixing bayonets, rammers arc to be sprung, the 
 following* command is given : 
 
 SPRING-RAMMERS.— Put the rammer in the barrel as. 
 explained above and face to the front. 
 
 To load in four times. 
 The squad being nt a shoulder. 
 
 LOAD IX FOUR TIMES.— LOAD.— Execute the first 
 time of load, open pan, handle cartridge, tear cartridge, and 
 prime. 
 
 TWO. — Shut pan, cast about, and charge cartridge. 
 THREE. — Draw rammer, and ram cartridge* 
 FOUR. — Return rammer, and shoulder arms. 
 
 To load at »;'//. 
 LOAD AT WILI/-LOAD.— Execute the loading as in 
 four times, but without resting on the limes. 
 
 20 
 
PART I. OF THE SQUAD. & 
 
 FIRINGS. 
 
 The firings are direct or oblique. 
 
 The Direct Fire. 
 This is executed as prescribed in the manual of arms, and 
 by the following commands. Fire by squad — Squad- 
 Ready — Aim — Fire— Load. 
 
 The Oblique Fire. 
 This is executed to the right and left, by the same com • 
 mand as the fire direct, the command aim, being always pre- 
 ceded by the caution right (or left) oblique, after the 
 word READY. 
 
 Position of the ranks in the oblique Ji re to the right. 
 
 At the word ready, both ranks execute what is prescribed 
 for the fire direct. 
 
 At the words right-oblique, both ranks throw back the 
 right shoulder and look at the object at which they are to fire, 
 the rear-rank holding itself ready to take aim through the 
 same interval as in the fire direct, though in an oblique 
 direction. 
 
 At the word aim, the front-rank takes aim to the right with- 
 out stirring the feet. The rear-rank advances the left foot 
 about six inches towards the right toe of the man of the front- 
 rank in the same file, Jncline the upper part of the body for- 
 ward, in bending a little the knee, and takes aim to the right. 
 
 At the word load, both ranks resume the position pre- 
 scribed for the fire direct ; the rear— rank brings back the left 
 heel against the hollow of the right foot, at the instant the 
 piece is brought to the priming position. 
 
 Position of the ranks in the oblique fire to the left. 
 
 At the word ready, both ranks execute what is prescribed 
 for the fire direct. 
 
 At the words left oblique, both ranks throw back the 
 left shoulder, and look at the object at which they are to fire, 
 the rear-rank holding itself ready to take aim to the left of 
 the men of the same file in front, and in an oblique direction. 
 
 At the word aim, the front-rank takes aim to the left with- 
 out moving the feet. The rear— rank men advance the left 
 
 21 
 
22 PART I. OF THE SQTJAD. 
 
 foot six inches towards the right heel of the front-rank men 
 of their files ; they also advance the upper part of the body, 
 in bending a little the left knee, and take aim through the 
 intervals to the left of their file-leaders. 
 
 At the word load, both ranks come to the priming po- 
 sition, the pieces still obliqued to the left, and prime; the 
 rear-rank brings back the left heel to the hollow of the right 
 foot. In casting about both ranks take the same position as 
 in the fire direct. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 FIRE BY FILE.— SQUAD-READY— COMMENCE 
 FIRING. — At the word keady, both ranks take the position 
 prescribed for the direct fire. At the words commence fir- 
 ing, the right file aims and fires, the two men together ; the 
 ne.xt file aims at the instant the first has fired, and so on suc- 
 cessively to the left : after the first fire every man loads and 
 fires without wailing for the others. Each man faces to the 
 front in casting about, and alter returning rammer, springs 
 up his piece with the left hand which places itself on the 
 feather-spring, and at the height of the chin ; at the same 
 time he makes a half face to the right, taking the position 
 of ready. 
 
 To arrest the fire. 
 
 ROLL. — At this word, the firing ceases ; each man half 
 cocks, if his piece be cocked ; loads or finishes loading, if 
 not already loaded ; and shoulders arms. 
 
 To Murk Time. 
 
 l\ lurching in llu direct slop In common limp. 
 
 MARK TIME-MARCH— At the word march, given 
 the instant either foot is coming to the ground, make a sem- 
 blance of marching, by advancing first one foot, and then the 
 other, always bringing hack the advanced foot, and placing 
 its heel by the side of the heel of the other. 
 
 To resume the direct step. 
 FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, given the 
 instant cither foot is coming to the ground, resume the direct 
 step. 
 
 22 
 
PAKT I. OF THE 8QCAD. 23 
 
 To change step. 
 
 CHANGE STEP-MARCH.— At the word march, given 
 the instant either foot is coming to the ground, bring up 
 quickly the foot in the rear to the side of that just placed on 
 the ground, and step off with the latter. 
 
 Alignments. 
 
 Four or eight men are now united in one rank, elbow to 
 elbow, and numbered from right to left. 
 
 The men are first taught to align themselves man by man ; 
 to effect which the two on the right are marched two paces 
 to the front and aligned, after which the remainder are cau- 
 tioned to move up one by one according to their numbers, 
 and are aligned successively on the line of the two first. 
 Each as designated, turns his head and eyes to the right, 
 marches in common time, two paces forward, shortening the 
 last, so as to be about six inches behind the new alignment ; 
 he then moves up steadily by steps of two or three inches, 
 lo the side of the man next to him on the alignment, so that 
 without deranging the head, the line of the eyes, or that of 
 he shoulders, he may find himself in the exact line of his 
 right-hand man, whose elbow he touches without opening 
 Lis own. 
 
 Alignments to the left are executed on the same princi- 
 (!es. 
 
 When the men have learned to align themselves in this 
 manner, the whole rank will be aligned at once as follows : 
 
 RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS.— At the word dress, tho 
 rank, except the two men placed as a basis, moves up in 
 common time, each man placing himself on the line in the 
 manner just prescribed. 
 
 The rank being aligned, the word front is given. 
 
 Alignments to the rear are executed on the same principles, 
 the men stepping back a little beyond the line and then dress- 
 ing up, by the command right (or left) backward-dress. 
 
 To march to the front. 
 A well instructed man is placed on the right or left of the 
 squad, according to the side on which the guide is to be. 
 
 SQUAD FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT)- 
 MARCH. — At the word march, the squad steps off with 
 
 23 
 
24 PART I. OF THE SQT7AD 
 
 Ine left foot, the guide marching straight to the front ano 
 keeping his shoulders square with that line. 
 
 The following rules are to he observed : — Touch lightly 
 the elbow towards the guide, without opening the left elbow, 
 or the right arm ; yield to pressure from the side to the guide, 
 and resist that from the opposite side; avoid lapping elbows, 
 and swinging the arms ; keep the head to the front, the eyes 
 cast on the ground about fifteen paces in front. 
 
 The squad is next exercised in the oblique march to the 
 right, and left, observing always to keep the touch of the 
 elbow towards the guide. It is also taught to pass from 
 common to quick time, and the reverse ; but the oblique 
 march in quick time should not be practised until the squad 
 •s well established in the cadence. 
 
 The Quick Step. 
 
 This step is at the rate of one hundred and ten in a 
 minute; its length conforms to the step in common time, 
 whether direct or oblique. 
 
 Marching in the direct step in common time. 
 QUICK TIME-MARCH.— At the word KAMI, given 
 as cither foot is coming to the ground, the squad steps oft in 
 quick time. 
 
 To resume the direct step in common time. 
 
 ( '< >MM< >X TIME-MARCH.— At ihe word march, given 
 her foot as above, the .squad retakes the step in common 
 tunc 
 
 To march the had: step, 
 
 SQUAD BACKWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT> 
 MARCH. — At tli<' word march, the squad steps off smartly 
 with tlic lefl foot to the rear, carrying it about fourteen in 
 or half the common step, and go on with the feet in BU 
 sion, until the word sqiau, halt, when the foot in front ss 
 brought hark to the side of the other. 
 
 To march by the fank. 
 Iloing at a hull nnri iiligr.cd. 
 
 SQUAD, BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK, RIGHT (or 
 LEFT) FACE. — At the word back, the squad faces to the 
 right (or h-ll). 
 
 94 
 
PART I. OF THE SQTJAD. 25 
 
 SQUAD, FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, 
 .he squad steps off with the left foot in common time. A 
 well instructed soldier is placed by the side of the leading 
 man 10 conduct him and regulate the step ; this man marches 
 elbow to elbow with the soldier. The men cover each other 
 accurately. Ateach step, the advancing heel of every following 
 man is planted about six inches in advance of the opposite 
 heel (yet on the ground) of the man immediately preceding. 
 The knees should not be bent, in order to avoid treading on 
 the heels of the men preceding. 
 
 To halt the squad and face it to the front. 
 
 SQUAD-HALT.r— At the word halt, the squad halts, 
 each man standing fast, though he may have lost distance. 
 
 FRONT-FACE. — At the word face, each man faces to 
 the left, if marching by the right flank, and to the right, if 
 marching by the left flank. 
 
 To change direction while marcldng by a flank. 
 
 BY FILE, LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH.— At the word 
 march, the leading man changes direction to the left (or 
 right), and then marches straight forward ; the others change 
 direction as they successively arrive on the ground where 
 the first changed. 
 
 Marching by the front, to march by a flank. 
 
 SQUAD BY LEFT (or RIGHT) FLANK-MARCH.— 
 At the word march, given a little before either foot comes 
 to the ground, each man turns his body, plants the foot that 
 is raised in the new direction, and steps off with the othtT 
 foot, without altering the cadence of the step. 
 
 Flank marching will be executed first in common time, 
 afterwards in quick time. 
 
 Wheelings. 
 
 Wheelings are of two kinds ; from a halt or on fixed pivots, 
 and in marching, or on moveable pivots. In the latter case 
 the wheel will be made to the side opposite the guide, or 
 reverse flank. 
 
 To wheel from a halt, or on a fixed pivot. 
 
 A well instructed man is placed on the wheeling flank. 
 C 25 
 
26 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 BY SQUAD, RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH.— At the word 
 march, the squad steps off with the left foot, turning at the 
 same time, the head a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the 
 line of the eyes of the men to the left, the pivot man marks 
 time in turning, in order to conform to the movement of the 
 marching flar.k ; the man who conducts this flank, takes 
 steps of twenty -eight Inches, and from the first step, advances 
 a little the left shoulder, casts his eyes, from time to time, 
 along the rank, and feels constantly the elbow of the next 
 man lightly, without pushing. The other men, each feels 
 lightly the elbow of the next man towards the pivot, re- 
 sists pressure from the opposite side, and conforms to the 
 marching flank, lengthening or shortening the step accord- 
 ing to his greater or less distance from the pivot. 
 
 The squad wheels round the circle, once or twice before 
 halting. 
 
 The wheel to the left is executed according to the samo 
 principles. 
 
 To halt the wheel. 
 
 SQUAD-IIALT. — At the word halt, each man stands 
 fast. The two outer men opposite to the pivot flank are 
 then placed in the direction to be given to the squad, leaving 
 between them and the pivot only space necessary to contain 
 the other men. 
 
 LEFT—DRESS. — At the word dress, the squad places 
 itself on the alignment of the two men established as a basis 
 in the manner already prescribed. 
 
 The squad being aligned, the word tkont is given. 
 
 Wheeling to ihe Kit is executed on the same principles. 
 
 To wheel in marching, or on a moveable pirot. 
 
 RIGHT (or LEFT) WHEEL— MARCH. At the word 
 
 march, given the instant the squad arrives at the wheeling 
 
 point, the wheel is executed in the same manner as from a 
 halt, except that the touch of the elbow remains toward the 
 marching flank, or side of the guide, instead of the side of 
 the pivot; the pivot man, instead of turning in his place, 
 conforms to the movement of the marching flank, feels 
 lightly the elbow of the next man, takes steps of nine inches, 
 and gnina ground forward, in describing the arc of a small 
 circle to clear the point of the wheel. The middle of the 
 
 26 
 
PART I. OP TIIK SQUAD. 27 
 
 rank bends slightly to the rear. As soon as the movement 
 commences, the man who conducts the marching flank casts 
 his eyes on the ground over which he will have to pass. 
 
 FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, given at 
 the instant of completing the wheel, the squad moves for- 
 ward, taking the step of twenty-eight inches — head direct to 
 the front. 
 
 Turning or change of direction to the side of the guide. 
 
 This takes place only when the change ol direction is to 
 be made to the side of the guide. 
 
 LEFT (or RIGHT) TURN— MARCH.— At the word 
 march, given the instant the turn is to be made, the guide 
 faces to the left (or right) in marching, and moves forward 
 in the new direction, without altering the step or pace. The 
 whole squad promptly conforms itself, without running, to 
 the new direction : each man advances the shoulder opposite 
 to the guide, takes the quick step to carry himself in the 
 new direction, turn his head and eyes to the side of the guide, 
 and retakes the touch of the elbow on that side, in placing 
 himself on the alignment of the guide, from whom he takes 
 the step, and then turns his head to the front. Each man 
 thus arrives successively on the alignment of the guide. 
 
 To stacJc Arms. 
 
 The squad being in two ranks at order-arms. 
 
 STACK-ARMS.— At this command the front-rank man 
 of every even numbered file passes his piece before him, 
 seizing it with the left hand above the middle band, and 
 places the butt behind and near the right foot of the man 
 next on the left, the barrel turned to the front. At the same 
 time the front-rank man of every odd numbered file passes 
 his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand below the 
 middle band, and hands it to the man next on the left ; the 
 latter receives it with the right hand two inches above the 
 middle band, throws the butt about thirty-two inches to the 
 front, opposite to his right shoulder, inclining the muzzle 
 towards him, and locks the shanks of the two bayonets: the 
 lock of this second piece towards the right, and its shank 
 above that of the first piece. The rear-rank man of every 
 even file projects his, bayonet forward, and introduces it 
 (using both hands) between and under the shanks of the two 
 
 27 
 
28 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
 
 other bayonets. He then abandons the piece to his file leader 
 who receives it with the right hand under the middle band, 
 brings the butt to the front, holding up his own piece and the 
 stack with the left hand, and places the butt of this third 
 piece between the feet of the man next on the right, the S 
 plate to the rear. The stack thus formed, the rear-rank 
 man of every odd file passes his piece into his left hand, the 
 barrel turned to the front, and, sloping the bayonet forward, 
 rests it on the stack. 
 
 To disperse, the command is given : BREAK RANKS — 
 MARCH. 
 
 To resume Arms. 
 
 The squad, on a signal, or order to fall in, re-forms in two 
 ranks. 
 
 TAKE-ARMS. — At this command the rear- rank man 
 of every odd file withdraws his piece from the stack ; the 
 front rank man of every even file seizes his own piece with 
 the left hand, and that of the man on his right with the right 
 hand ; the rear-rank man of every even file seizes his piece 
 with the right hand at the middle band, advancing for the 
 purpose, the hollow of his right foot as far as the right heel 
 of his file leader ; these two men raise up the stack to loosen 
 the shanks ; the front-rank man of every odd file receives 
 his piece from the hand of the man next on the left, and tho 
 four men retake the position of order-arms. 
 
 When companies stack arms, the sergeants, and also cor- 
 porals, if in the rank of file closers, rest their pieces ngninst 
 the stacks nearest to them respectively, after ranks arc bro 
 ken, and resume their pieces on the signal to re-form ranks 
 
 The coloui-guard form's a separate staek. 
 
 28 
 
Fia 9. 
 
 Fia. 10. 
 
 Fia. 11. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
TART I. OF THE SUIWD 
 Fia. 13. Fio. 14. 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
PART I. 
 
 OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Formation of the Company. (Fig. 1.) 
 Ti'E company being assembled on its ground, the ser- 
 geants, by the command fall in, cause the rank and file 
 (corporals and privates) to form in one rank, faced to the 
 right, and in the order of height from right to left, the tallest 
 man on the right, (now head of the rank), the next tallest 
 immediately covering the first, and so on to the left, or rear 
 of the rank. 
 
 The first sergeant then gives the words : 
 FRONT-FACE. — At the word face, the company faces 
 to the front, and the second sergeant places himself on the 
 left of the rank. 
 
 IN TWO RANKS, FORM COMPANY. \ At the 
 BY THE LEFT FLANK. LEFT-FACE. \ word face, 
 the company faces to the left, except the sergeant and man 
 on the left, who stand fast. 
 
 MARCH. — At the word march, the men who have faced 
 to the left, step off together ; the second man, counting from 
 the left, places himself behind the man next to the sergeant, 
 and faces to the front ; the two following men, in like man- 
 ner, on closing up, form the next file, and all the other men 
 come successively to form files two deep, to the right of those 
 already formed. The distance between the ranks is thirteen 
 inches, measured from the breasts of the rear-rank men to 
 the backs, or knapsacks, (if they be on), of the front-rank 
 men. 
 
 The captain now divides the company into two equal pla- 
 toons, and each platoon into two equal sections. The pla- 
 toon on the right is called the first platoon, and that on the 
 left the second platoon. The sections are numbered from 
 right to left, first, second, third, fourth. The corporals 
 (four in number) are then placed on the right and left of each 
 platoon, in the front rank according to height, and the files 
 are numbered from right to left. 
 
 The officers and sergeants now take their posts as follows • 
 
 The captain, in the front rank on the right of the company 
 
 The first lieutenant, two paces in rear of the rear-rank, 
 
 and equidistant between the centre of the second platoon and 
 
 the second file from the left of the company. 
 
34 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 . The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first pla- 
 toon, and two paces in rear of the rear-rank. 
 
 The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second pla- 
 toon, and two paces in rear of the rear- rank. 
 
 The first sergeant, on the nght of the rear-rank covering 
 the captain : he is denominated covering sergeant, or right 
 guide of the company. 
 
 The second sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
 from the left of the company ; he is denominated the left 
 guide of the company. In the left company of a battalion, 
 this sergeant is on the left of the front-rank, and is covered 
 by a corporal in the rear-rank ; he is designated as the clo* 
 sing sergeant, and the corporal, the covering corporal. 
 
 The third sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
 from the left of the first platoon. 
 
 The fourth sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
 from the right of the second platoon. 
 
 The fifth sergeant, two paces in rear of the rear-rank, and 
 equidistant between the second lieutenant and the third ser- 
 geant. 
 
 The officers and sergeants thus posted in rear of the com- 
 pany, constitute the rank of file-closers ; this rank is t*vo 
 paces in rear of the rear-rank. 
 
 The pioneer is posted in the line of file-closers on the 
 right ; and the music in a line with the front-rank, four paces 
 on its right, the drummer on the right of the fifer, or bugler. 
 
 Absent officers and sergeants may be replaced, officers by 
 sergeants, and sergeants by corporals, according to rank and 
 the necessity of the case. 
 
 To pass from two ranks, into one rank. 
 
 IN ONE RANK FORM COMPANY— The left guide 
 faces to the left. 
 
 MARCH. — The left guide steps offand marches in the pro- 
 longation of the front-rank ; the next file steps off at the same 
 time with the guide;, the front-rank man turns to the left at 
 the first step, follows the guide, and is himself followed by the 
 rear-rank man of his file, who turns on the spot where his file 
 leader turned. The second file, counting from the left, and 
 successively all the other files, march as prescribed for the 
 first; the front-rank man of each, immediately following the 
 rear-rank man of the file next on the left. The captain halts 
 the company as the last man on the right turns into the rank 
 The file closers extend themselves with the movement. 
 
 34 
 
PAKT I. Or THE COMPANY. 35 
 
 Posts of Officers and others in column. 
 In column by Division. 
 
 Two companies united, constitute a division, and are com- 
 manded by the senior captain of those companies, who places 
 himself two paces in front of the centre of the division ; the 
 junior captain in the front-rank, on the right of the left com- 
 pany of the division, covered by the covering sergeant of that 
 company ; the covering sergeant of the right company, is 
 the right guide of the division, and is on the right of the front- 
 rank ; the left guide of the left company is the left guide of 
 the division, and is on the left of the front-rank. 
 
 When the division faces by a flank, the senior captain 
 places himself by the side of the leading guide who is in the 
 front-rank ; the junior captain by the side of the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company, who steps in the front-rank. 
 In column by Company. 
 
 The captain is two paces in front of the centre of his com- 
 pany ; the first sergeant on the right of the front-rank, and 
 is the right guide of the company; the second sergeant on the 
 left of the same rank, and is the left guide of the company. 
 In column by Platoon. 
 
 The captain commands the first platoon, the first lieuten- 
 ant the second platoon ; each takes post two paces in front 
 of the centre of his platoon ; the first sergeant is the guide 
 of the first platoon ; the second sergeant is the guide of the 
 second platoon ; they are on the left of the front-rank ot 
 their respective platoons, if the column be right in front, and 
 on the right if the left be in front. 
 
 If the column be marching in the route step, the chiefs of 
 platoon take the place of the guides on the directing flank, 
 and are covered by the latter in the rear-rank. 
 
 In column by Section. 
 This column takes place only in column of route, and then 
 only when platoons have a front of ten or more files. The cap- 
 tain commands the first section ; the first lieutenant the third ; 
 the second lieutenant the second ; and the third lieutenant the 
 fourth section ; each taking post on the directing flank in the 
 front-rank of his section ; the two guides who are thus dis- 
 placed, each falls back to the rear-rank of his section and cov- 
 ers its chief; the remaining file-closers place themselves in the 
 •jear- rank of their respective sections.all on the side of direction. 
 
 35 
 
36 TART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 In column, except in column by sections, the file-closers, 
 not otherwise provided for, are in their proper places behind 
 the rear-rank of their respective subdivisions. In close 
 column or in column at half distance, they close up to within 
 one pace of the rear-rank. 
 
 In column right in front, the left flank is the directing 
 flank (except under peculiar circumstances or manoeuvres) ; 
 the reverse is the case in column left in front. 
 
 In column, each chief of subdivision always briskly repeats 
 the commands march, and halt, the instant he hears them 
 given. 
 
 To open ranks. 
 
 The company being at shoulder-arms, the left guide is 
 placed on the left of the rear-rank. 
 
 TO THE REAR, OPEN ORDER.— The covering ser- 
 geant and the left guide, step off to the rear, in the back 
 step, four paces, and align themselves parallel to the rear- 
 rank. 
 
 MARCH. — The front rank stands fast ; the rear-rank 
 steps off in the back step, in common time, without counting 
 steps, places itself on the alignment, marked out for it, and 
 is aligned by the right on the left guide, by the covering 
 sergeant. The file-closers step off at the same time with 
 the rear rank, and place themselves two paces in the rear of 
 that rank. 
 
 The ranks being aligned the word front, is given. 
 
 Alignments in open ranks. 
 
 The ranks are first aligned man by man, as in the squad 
 drill, three men being placed three paces in advance of the 
 right or left of each rank, to serve as a basis, and the words 
 given, BY FILE RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS.— The men 
 of each rank move up successively on the alignment, each 
 man being preceded two paces,'by his neighbour. 
 
 The ranks are next aligned at once, forward and back- 
 ward, in both parallel and oblique directions, by the com- 
 mands RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS, or RIGHT (or LEFT) 
 BACKWARD-DRESS; three men in each case being 
 placed as a basis. 
 
 Before closing the ranks, the company is exercised in the 
 manual of arms and the loadings in twelve times. 
 
 36 
 
PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 37 
 
 To close ranks. 
 
 CLOSE ORDER-MARCH.— At the word march, the 
 rear-rank closes to the front, each man covering his file- 
 leader. 
 
 The company is next instructed in the alignments, and 
 the manual of arms in closed ranks, and then proceeds to 
 the loadings and firings. 
 
 Loading in four times and at will, are commanded and 
 executed as prescribed in the squad drill. The captain and 
 covering sergeant make a half-face to the right with the 
 men, and face to the front when the marrnext to them re- 
 spectively casts about. 
 
 To fire by company. 
 
 FIRE BY COMPANY.— At this command the captain 
 places himself opposite to the centre of his company, four 
 paces in rear of the rank of file-closers ; and the covering 
 sergeant places himself in that rank opposite to his interval. 
 This rule is general for the captain and covering sergeant in 
 all the different firings. 
 
 COMMENCE FIRING. — At this command, the captain 
 gives the words, company — ready — aim — -fire — load. At 
 the word load, each man brings back his piece, loads and 
 comes to the shoulder, when the captain recommences the 
 fire by the same commands, and thus continues it till the 
 roll of the drum. The captain may sometimes cause aim 
 to be taken to the right and left, by giving the words, right 
 (or left) oblique, between the words ready and aim. 
 
 To fire by file. 
 
 FIRE BY FILE. COMPANY. READY-COMMENCE 
 
 FIRING. The fire is executed as prescribed in the squad 
 drill. 
 
 The firing ceases by a roll of the drum, when each man 
 loads and comes to the shoulder. In actual firing, at the 
 roll of the drum, the captain and file-closers give the words 
 cease firing. The roll is always followed by a tap on the 
 drum, when the captain and covering sergeant resume their 
 places in line, and rectify, if necessary, the alignment of the 
 ranks. 
 
 D 37 
 
38 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 To fire hy the rear-ranJc. 
 
 FACE BY THE REAR-RANK.— At this command, 
 Ihe captain steps out and places himself near to, and facing 
 the right file of the company ; the covering sergeant and 
 file-closers pass quickly through the captain's interval, and 
 place themselves, faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a 
 pace behind the captain, and the file-closers two paces from 
 the front-rank opposite to their places in line. 
 
 COMPANY ABOUT-FACE— At the word face, given 
 the instant the last file-closer has passed through the inter- 
 val, the company faces about; the captain places himself in 
 his interval in the rear-rank, now front, and the covering 
 sergeant covers him in the front-rank, now rear. 
 
 The different firings are now executed in the manner 
 already prescribed. The fire by file commences on the left, 
 now the right flank. 
 
 To resume the proper front. 
 
 FACE BY THE FRONT RANK.— This is executed 
 as prescribed in the command face by the rear-rank. 
 
 COMPANY ABOUT-FACE — The company having 
 faced about, the captain and covering sergeant resume their 
 places in line. 
 
 To advance in line. 
 
 COMPANY, FORWARD.— At this command, a ser- 
 geant, previously selected, moves six paces in advance of the 
 captain, and is correctly aligned on the prolongation of the 
 captain and covering sergeant. This advanced sergeant is 
 charged with the direction, and will take two points on the 
 ground in the direct line to the front. 
 
 MARCH. — The company steps off with life. The direct- 
 ing sergeant observes, with the greatest precision, the length 
 and cadence of the step, marching on the two points he has 
 chosen ; he takes in succession, and a little before arriving 
 at the point nearest to him, new points in advance, exactly 
 in the same line with the two first, and at a distance of fif 
 teen or twenty paces from each other. The captain marches 
 in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping always six 
 paces from him. The men march with the head and shoul 
 ders square to the front, touch lightly the elbow towards the 
 
 38 
 
PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 89 
 
 captain, and resist pressure from the opposite side. Tho 
 file-closers march in their places, two paces behind the rear- 
 rank. 
 
 To halt the company advancing in line, and to align it. 
 
 COMPANY-HALT The company halts at the word 
 
 halt, the directing sergeant returns to his place as a file- 
 closer, and the captain rectifies the alignment. 
 
 Advancing in line, to oblique to the right or left. 
 
 RIGHT (or LEFT) OBLIQUE-MARCH.— The word 
 march, is given, and the movement executed as prescribed 
 in the squad drill ; the men maintaining the touch of the 
 elbow towards the captain, who conforms his march to that 
 of the directing sergeant. 
 
 To resume the Direct March. 
 
 FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, the direct 
 march is resumed. 
 
 The company is next instructed to mark time by the com- 
 mand mark time-march ; to resume the march by the 
 command forward-march ; to march in quick time by the 
 command quick time-march ; and to resume the common 
 time "by the command common time-march; the word 
 march, being given as either foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 To retire in line. 
 
 COMPANY, ABOUT-FACE — At the word face, the 
 company faces about. 
 
 COMPANY, FORWARD.— At the word forward, the 
 covering sergeant moves up, opposite to his interval, into the 
 rank of file-closers, now leading ; the captain replaces the 
 covering sergeant in the rear- rank, now front, and the 
 directing sergeant places himself in front of the captain, six 
 paces in advance of the rank of file-closers, and in the man- 
 ner prescribed for the advance in line. 
 
 MARCH. — The company steps off in the manner pre- 
 scribed for the advance in line. 
 
 The company retiring in line, executes all that is pre- 
 scribed for advancing in line 
 
 39 
 
40 PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 To halt the company retiring in line, and to face it to the 
 front. 
 COMPANY, HALT. ABOUT-FACE.— As soon as the 
 company faces about, the captain, the covering sergeant, and 
 the directing sergeant, resume their proper places in line. 
 
 To march by the flank. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 COMPANY BY THE RIGHT FLANK, RIGHT-FACE. 
 — At the word face, the company faces to the right, and the 
 covering sergeant places himself at the head of the front- 
 rank, the captain on his left. 
 
 COMPANY FOR WARD -MARCH. — At the word 
 march, the company steps off in common time, the captain 
 and covering sergeant directing their march straight forward ; 
 the men of the rear>rank march abreast of their respective 
 front-rank men, and the file-closers opposite to their places 
 in line. 
 
 The march by the left flank is executed by the same com- 
 mands, substituting left for eight. As soon as the com- 
 pany faces to the left, the left guide places himself at the 
 head of the front-rank, the captain on his right. The cover- 
 ing sergeant replaces the captain in the front-rank. 
 
 To change direction by file. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 The company being faced to a flank, and either in march or at a halt 
 BY FILE LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH.— At the word 
 march, the first file wheels ; if to the side of the front-rank 
 man, this man describes the short arc of a circle, shortening 
 a little the first three or four steps, to give the rear-rank man 
 time to conform to the movement. If the wheel be to the 
 side of the rear-rank man, this man conforms himself to the 
 movement of the front-rank man, by describing a short arc 
 of a circle. Each file wheels on the same spot where the 
 first wheeled. 
 
 To halt the company., marching by a fianh, and to face it 
 to the front. 
 COMPANY, HALT. FRONT-FACE.— At the word 
 face, the company faces to the left, if marching by the right 
 flank, and to the right if marching by the left flank: and the 
 captain, covering sergeant, and the left guide, return to their 
 places in line. 
 
 40 
 
PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 41 
 
 Marching by a flank, to form on right (or left) by fie into 
 line. (Fig. 3.) 
 
 The march being supposed to be by the right flank. 
 
 ON RIGHT, BY FILE INTO LINE-MARCH. — At 
 the word march, the rear-rank marks time ; the captain and 
 covering sergeant turn to the right, march six paces forward, 
 and halt ; the captain places himself on the line to direct the 
 alignment as the men of the front-rank successively arrive 
 on it ; the covering sergeant places himself behind the cap- 
 tain, at the distance of the rear-rank ; the first man of the 
 front-rank continues to march, passes behind the covering 
 sergeant, turns to the right, and places himself by the left 
 side of the captain ; the second man of the same rank passes 
 behind the first, turns to the right, and places himself on the 
 left of the first, and thus in succession to the last man of this 
 rank : the rear-rank marks time until two men of the front- 
 rank are formed, when it executes the movement in like 
 manner, each man covering his file-leader. 
 
 In marching by the left flank, the movement is executed 
 by inverse means, substituting in the command the word 
 left, for right. The captain and the left guide return to 
 their places in line as soon as the company is formed and 
 aligned. 
 
 Marching by the flank to form by company or by platoon 
 into line. (Fig. 4.) 
 
 The march being supposed by the right flank. 
 
 BY COMPANY INTO LINE-MARCH.— At the word 
 march, the covering sergeant continues to march straight 
 forward ; the men advance the right shoulder and march in 
 quick time, diagonally, into line with the covering sergeant, 
 taking the step from him as they successively arrive in line, 
 one after the other. The rear- rank men conform to '.he move- 
 ment of their file-leaders. The captain superintends the 
 execution of the movement, and, when the company is form- 
 ed, gives the words guide left, and places himself two 
 paces in front of the centre, taking the step of the company. 
 
 Marching by theflanJc to form platoon. 
 BY PLATOON INTO LINE-MARCH— The movement 
 is executed by each platoon according to the above principles ; 
 D2 41 
 
42 FART 1. OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 the captain and first lieutenant, as their respective platoons 
 are formed, giving the words guide left. 
 
 In marching by the left flank, these movements are exe- 
 cuted by the same commands and according to the same 
 principles, the words guide right being substituted for guide 
 left, the moment the formation is ended. 
 
 Marching by the front, to march by a flank.. 
 
 COMPANY, BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK-MARCH. 
 — The movement is executed in the manner prescribed in 
 the squad drill. 
 
 The company marching by a flank, may be marched by 
 the front by the same commands and means. 
 
 Marching in column by platoon, to march %y the flunk in 
 the same direction. 
 
 COLUMN. BY RIGHT FLANK— Each chief of pla- 
 toon goes to its right to conduct it. 
 
 BY FILE LEFT-MARCH.— At the word march, each 
 platoon faces to the right in marching, wheels by file to tho 
 left and marches forward: the leading file of the second 
 platoon unites with the rear-file of the first, the chief and 
 guide of the second passing through the interval to their 
 places as file-closers. 
 
 With the left in front, the movement is executed by in- 
 verse means, substituting in the commands left for right, 
 and right for eeft. The captain conducts the left flank 
 and the covering sergeant returns to his place in rear of the 
 last file. 
 
 To break from line into column by ■platoon (Fig. 5.) 
 
 The company being at a. halt. 
 
 BY PLATOON, RIGHT WHEEL. The chiefs of pla- 
 toon place themselves in front of their platoons ; the cover- 
 ing sergeant replacing the captain in the front-rank. 
 
 MARCH. — The right front-rank man of each platoon 
 faces to the right, the covering sergeant standing fast ; the 
 chief of each platoon moves a little beyond the point at which 
 the marching flank will rest when the wheel is completed, 
 faces to the late rear, and places himself so that the line 
 which he forms with the man on the right, who has faced, 
 shall be perpendicular to that occupied by the company in 
 
 42 
 
TAKT I. OF THE COMPANY. 43 
 
 line. Each platoon wheels according to the principles pre- 
 scribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot, and when the man 
 who conducts the marching flank, arrives within three paces 
 of the perpendicular, the chief gives the words platoon halt. 
 The covering sergeant, and the second sergeant then move 
 to the point where the left of their respective platoons is to 
 rest, and are aligned by their chiefs on the man of their re- 
 spective platoons who had faced to the right. Each chief 
 aligns his platoon by the left, giving the words left-dress, 
 followed by front, and takes his place in column. 
 
 To break ky platoon to the left, is executed according to 
 the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 To march in column. 
 
 The guide of the leading platoon takes two points on the 
 ground in a straight line to the front. 
 
 COLUMN FORWARD. GUIDE LEFT-MARCH.— 
 At the word march, the whole steps off together; the guide 
 of the second platoon marching exactly in the trace of the 
 guide of the first, and preserving between the latter and him- 
 self a distance precisely equal to. the front of his platoon. 
 
 A column, left in front, is put in march according to the 
 same principles, substituting in the commands guide right 
 
 for GUIDE LEFT. 
 
 To change direction, marching in column. Fig. 6, 7. 
 
 A marker is placed on the direction of the guide, at the 
 point at which the change is to take place, presenting his 
 breast to that flank of the column. 
 
 The leading guide directs his march, so that incoming up 
 his left arm may graze the breast of the marker. When 
 the leading platoon arrives within four paces of the marker, 
 its chief gives the words left turn, and adds march, the mo- 
 ment the left guide is opposite the marker. The guide and 
 the platoon turn to the left, conforming to what is prescribed 
 in the squad drill ; the guide, the moment he has turned, 
 takes points on the ground in the new direction. The second 
 platoon continues to march forward until up with the mark- 
 er, when it turns by the same commands and according to 
 the same orinciples which governed the first. 
 
 To change direction to the side opposite the guide ; when 
 
 43 
 
44 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 the guide of the first platoon is within four paces of the 
 marker, its chief gives the words right-wheel, followed by 
 march, the instant the guide is opposite the marker. The 
 wheel being nearly ended the chief gives the word forward, 
 and when-completed march, when the platoon moves for- 
 ward. The second platoon wheels on the same ground 
 where the first had wheeled, and by the same commands 
 from its chief. 
 
 With the left in front, changes of direction are made ac- 
 cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 To halt the column, and wheel it into line. (Fig. 8.) 
 
 COLUMN-HALT. — At the word halt, the column halts, 
 and the guides stand fast : their position is next rectified, if 
 necessary. 
 
 LEFT-DRESS.— Each chief of platoon, placing himself 
 two paces outside of his guide, directs the alignment of his 
 platoon perpendicularly to the direction, gives the word 
 front, and returns to his place in column. 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL-MARCH.— At the word 
 march, the front-rank man on the left of each platoon, faces 
 to the left, placing his breast against the arm of the guide 
 by his side, who stands fast, and the platoons wheel to the 
 left, on the principles of wheels from a halt. Each chief, 
 when the marching flank of his platoon is three paces from 
 the line, gives the words platoon, halt, and the chief of the 
 second returns to his place as a file-closer. The captain 
 then goes to the point where the right of the company will 
 rest in line, and aligns the company by the right, giving the 
 words right— dress, followed by front. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS. — The covering sergeant covers the 
 captain, and the left guide retires to his place as a file-closer. 
 
 If the left be in front, the wheel to the right into line, is 
 executed on the same principles, and by inverse means ; the 
 captain after halting the first platoon, goes to the left of the 
 company to align it by the left, and shifts to his proper flank 
 at the command guides-tosts. 
 
 To diminish and increase front of colvmn in marching. 
 
 Diminishing. (Fig. 9.) 
 
 Marching in column, supposed by company. 
 
 BREAK INTO PLATOON— The first lieutenant passes 
 
 44 
 
PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 45 
 
 around the left to the centre of his platoon, and cautions it to 
 mark-time. 
 
 MARCH. — The first platoon continues to march forward ; 
 the second platoon marks time until clear of the first, when 
 its chief gives the words, right oblique-march, and adds 
 forward-march the instant the guide of his platoon covers 
 the guide of the first platoon ; the guide of the first having 
 placed himself on the left of his platoon the instant that flank 
 was disengaged. 
 
 Increasing. (Fig. 10.) 
 
 FORM COMPANY.— The captain cautions the first pla- 
 toon to oblique to the right. 
 
 MARCH. — The first platoon obliques to the right, (the 
 covering sergeant shifting to the right flank,) and when it 
 has nearly unmasked the second, thfe captain gives the words, 
 mark-time, followed by march, the instant it completes the 
 unmasking. The second platoon continues to move for- 
 ward, and when nearly up with the first, the captain gives 
 the word forward, followed by march, the instant the two 
 platoons unite, when they move forward together. 
 
 In column, left in front, these movements are executed 
 according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 Diminishing and increasing front of column by files. 
 
 Files are broken off from the directing flank only ; that is, 
 from the left flank, if the right be in front, and from the right 
 flank, if the left be in front. 
 
 The company marching and supposed to constitute part 
 of a column right in front, the captain, on a caution to that 
 effect, gives the words, one file from left to rear, march, 
 when the left file marks time, and as soon as the rear-rank 
 of the company has passed the men of that file respectively, 
 they take post as follows : the rear-rank man of the file, be- 
 hind the second file from the left, and the front-rank man, 
 behind the first file, and thus continue the march. 
 
 If another file is to break off, the same command is given, 
 when the file already broken off, moves the space of one fib; 
 to the right, leaving room for the next file to break off, and 
 forms in its rear. 
 
 If several files are to break off at the same time, the files 
 named mark time, each rank advances a little the left shoul- 
 
 45 
 
46 TART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 der, as it is cleared by the reai'-rank of the company, obliques 
 in rank, and places itself behind one of the two nearest files, 
 as already prescribed. 
 
 To cause files in rear to form into line, the captain, on a 
 caution to that effect, gives the words, one file into line., march, 
 when the front-file returns quickly into line, and the remain- 
 ing files incline the space of one file to the left. 
 
 If several files are to move up into line at the same time, 
 the files designated advance the right shoulder, and move up 
 and form on the flank of the company by the shortest lines. 
 
 The guide of the directing flank shifts, his position, so as 
 to be always next, on that flank, to the front-rank man re- 
 maining in line. The file-closers who had been posted be- 
 hind the files broken off, march abreast of their respective 
 files, as in other flank marches. 
 
 To march in column of route, and to execute the movements 
 incident thereto. 
 
 The length of the route step is twenty-eight inches, and 
 ninety in a minute. 
 
 The company supposed to constitute part of a column at 
 a halt. 
 
 COLUMN FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT) 
 ROUTE STEP-MARCH.— At the word march, the ranks 
 step off together ; the rear-rank takes, in marching, a dis- 
 tance of one pace from the front-rank; the men carry their 
 arms at will, and are not required to keep silence )r to 
 march in the cadcnced step ; but the ranks are not to inter- 
 mix, or to open at too great a distance. 
 
 Change of direction is executed without formal commands, 
 on a caution from the captain. The rear-rank changes direc- 
 tion on the same ground on which the front-rank had changed ; 
 the pivot man, on the reverse flank, taking steps of fourteen, 
 instead of nine inches, to clear the wheeling point. 
 
 To pass to closed ranks and the cadenced step. 
 SHOULDER- ARMS. CLOSE ORDER -MARCH.— 
 At the word march, the rear-rank regains the habitual dis- 
 tance, and resumes the cadcnced pace. 
 
 To resume the route step. 
 ROUTE-STEP- MARCH.— At the word march, the 
 company resumes the route march as above. 
 
 40 
 
PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 47 
 
 To march by a funic in the same direction. 
 Arms are first shouldered and ranks closed as above, when 
 COMPANY BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK. BY FILE 
 LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH— At the word march, the 
 company faces in marching and wheels by file, in the direc- 
 tion indicated. If any files are broken off to the rear, they 
 regain their places by wheeling, and follow the movement 
 of the company. 
 
 Marching in the route step, to diminish and increase front 
 by platoon. 
 
 The same commands and means are observed, as if the 
 march were in the cadenced step, except that in the platoon 
 which obliques, each man half faces to the right or left, and 
 thus marches diagonally till the platoon covers or unmasks 
 the other platoon. 
 
 To diminish front by section. 
 The captain causes arms to be shouldered, ranks closed, 
 and then gives the words, break into sections — march. The 
 movement is executed according to the principles indicated 
 for the same movement by platoon in the cadenced step. As 
 soon as the sections are formed, the route step is resumed by 
 the proper commands. 
 
 To increase front by section. 
 
 The captain causes arms to be shouldered, ranks closed, 
 and then gives the words, form platoons, march. As soon 
 as the platoons are formed, the route step is resumed by the 
 proper commands. 
 
 Files are broken off, and formed into line, according to 
 the principles already prescribed, the ranks being first closed 
 and arms shouldered. 
 
 When a column, marching in the route step, halts, the 
 rear-rank closes to its habitual distance at the word halt, 
 and the whole shoulder-arms. 
 
 Countermarch. (Fig. 11.) 
 
 The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute part of a column. 
 
 COUNTERMARCH COMPANY BY RIGHT FLANK. 
 RIGHT-FACE. — The company faces to the right, the two 
 guides to the right-about : the captain goes to the right of his 
 
 47 
 
48 PArtT I. OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 company, causes two files to break to the rear, and places 
 himself beside the leading front-rank man. 
 
 BY FILE LEFT-MARCH— At the word march, both 
 guides stand fast ; the company steps off; the first file, con- 
 ducted by the captain, wheels round the right guide, and 
 directs its march along the front-rank, so as to arrive behind, 
 and two paces from, the left guide ; each file wheels, in suc- 
 cession, around the right guide ; when the leading file is op- 
 posite the left guide, the captain gives the words, company, 
 halt, front-face, right-dress, aligns the company on the two 
 guides, and adds front : he then places himself before the 
 centre of his company, and the two guides shift to their 
 proper places, passing by the front-rank. 
 
 A column by platoon is countermarched by the same com- 
 mands and according to the same principles. 
 
 With the left in front, the countermarch is executed by 
 inverse commands and means, but according to the same 
 principles ; the column facing to the left, and wheeling by 
 file to the right, passing always by the front-rank. 
 
 Marching in column by ■platoon, to form on right (or left) 
 into line. (Fig. 12.) 
 
 A marker is posted at a point where the right of the com- 
 pany is to rest in line, presenting his left shoulder to that 
 line. This point should be nine paces in advance of the first 
 platoon after it has turned. 
 
 ON RIGHT INTO LINE. GUIDE-RIGHT.— The 
 guide of each platoon shifts to the right flank, and the men 
 touch elbows to the right. When the head of the column is 
 nearly opposite the marker, the chief of the first platoon 
 gives the words, right-turn, and when exactly opposite, 
 adds — march. The first platoon turns to the right, its 
 guide so directing his march, as to" bring the man next on 
 his left opposite the marker. When this platoon is neat 
 the line, its chief gives the word platoon, followed by halt, 
 when within three paces of the line. The platoon halts, and 
 the files not yet in line come up. The guide throws himself 
 on the line opposite the left file of his platoon, faces to and 
 is aligned on the marker. The chief of the platoon then 
 places himself where the right of the company is to rest, and 
 aligns his platoon on the guide and marker, giving the 
 words right-dress. The second platoon continues to march 
 
 48 
 
PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 49 
 
 forward, until its guide is opposite the left file of the first, 
 when it turns to the right at the command of its chief, and is 
 halted in the manner prescribed for the first : at the instant 
 it halts, the guide throws himself on the line opposite its left 
 file, and the chief giving the words right-dress, takes 
 his place as file-closer, passing around the left. The cap- 
 tain aligns the company and gives the word front. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS The two guides return to their places 
 
 in line. 
 
 With the left in front, the line is formed on the left accord- 
 ing to the same principles but by inverse means ; the cap- 
 tain after halting the first platoon proceeding to the left of 
 the company to align it, and shifting to his proper flank at 
 the words guides-posts. 
 
 As often as a company or battalion, marching otherwise 
 than at carried arms, halts, it carries arms at the word halt; 
 this rule is general. 
 
 MANUAL OF ARMS. 
 For Sergeants. 
 
 The sergeants, like the rank and file, will always, under 
 arms, appear with bayonets fixed. 
 
 All sergeants, including the sergeant-major and the quar- 
 termaster sergeant, also corporals of the colour-guard, and all 
 corporals not in the ranks and files, will carry and handle 
 their arms as will herein be prescribed, for sergeants. 
 
 Sergeants, in the manual of arms, will observe in all the 
 times, the cadence prescribed for the rank and file. In the 
 loadings and firings they will remain at the shoulder, or sup- 
 port arms, according to the order which they may receive. 
 
 Position of Shouldered Arms. 
 
 The piece within the right arm, the barrel to the rear, erect, 
 and resting against the hollow of the shoulder; the right 
 arm nearly straight, the right hand embracing the cock and 
 guard, and the left arm hanging by the side. 
 
 PRESENT-ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand bring 
 the piece erect, opposite to the centre of the body, the ram- 
 mer to the front ; at the same time seize the piece with the 
 E 49 
 
50 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 left hand above the lock, the little finger against the feather- 
 spring, the thumb extended along the barrel and on the stock, 
 the fore-arm resting on the body without constraint, and the 
 hand at the height of the elbow. 
 
 2d mo. -Correct the position of the right hand, so as to 
 bring it under and against the guard, as in the case of the 
 men. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Glide the left hand, on 
 the piece, to the height of the shoulder, and with this hand 
 bring the piece erect against the right shoulder ; embrace, 
 with the right hand, the cock and guard, the right arm near- 
 ly straight. 
 
 2d mo. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 
 
 ORDER-ARMS. — 1st mo. Bring the left hand prompt- 
 ly to the middle band ; detach the piece a little from the 
 shoulder with the right hand ; quit the hold of the right hand ; 
 lower the piece with the left, seizing it again with the right 
 above the lower band, the thumb on the barrel, the four fin- 
 gers extended on the stock, the piece erect, the butt about 
 three inches from the ground, the toe (or beak) of the butt 
 over its place, and drop the left hand by the side. 
 
 2d mo. Let the piece glide through the right hand, open- 
 ing a little the thumb and fingers, so that the butt may come 
 to the ground, without shock, its toe in a line with and against 
 the toe of the right foot. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand 
 raise the piece perpendicularly, the hand to the height of the 
 right breast opposite to the shoulder, but further out, and 
 about two inches from the body, on which the right elbow 
 will rest; seize the piece with the left hand under the right; 
 drop the right hand, and with it embrace the cock and guard, 
 supporting the piece against the right shoulder, the right arm 
 nearly straight. 
 
 2d mo. Let the left hand fall smartly by the side. 
 
 SUPPORT-ARMS— 1 st mo. With the right hand bring 
 the piece erect between the eyes, the rammer to the front ; 
 seize the piece with the left hand at the lower band, raise 
 this hand to the height of the chin, and grasp the piece at 
 the same time about four inches below the lock with the 
 right hand. 
 
 2d mo. With the right hand turn the piece, the barrel tc 
 the front, support it against the left shoulder, and bring the 
 
 50 
 
FART I. OF THE COMPANY. 51 
 
 left fore-arm between the cock and right hand, horizontally 
 across the body, the cock resting on the left fore-arm, and 
 the left hand on the right breast. 
 
 3d mo. Drop smartly the right hand by the side. 
 
 SHOULDER- ARMS.— 1st mo. Seize the piece with 
 the right hand, under and against the left fcre-arm. 
 
 2d mo. Bring the piece erect with the right hand against 
 the right shoulder, the rammer to the front ; seize it with 
 the .left hand at the height of the shoulder ; correct the posi- 
 tion of the right hand at the same time so as to embrace the 
 cock and guard, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 3d mo. Drop smartly the left hand by the side. 
 
 UNFIX-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Bring the left hand 
 promptly to the middle band, detach a little the piece from 
 the shoulder with the right hand. 
 
 2d mo. Lower the piece with the left hand, seize it with 
 the right above the lower band ; rest the butt on the ground, 
 letting the piece glide through the left hand ; bring the right 
 hand immediately to the bayonet. 
 
 3d mo. Wrest off the bayonet and return it to the scab- 
 bard ; next seize the piece with the right hand a little above 
 the lower band ; drop the left hand at the same time by the 
 side, and take the position of the soldier at ordered arms. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— As from order-arms. 
 
 FIX-BAYONET.— 1st and 2d mo. As those of unfix- 
 bayonet, except that at the end of the second motion the 
 right hand will be brought to seize the bayonet by the socket 
 and shank, so that the socket may extend about an inch 
 above the heel of the hand. 
 
 3d mo. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard with the 
 right hand, carry and fix it on the muzzle ; next seize the 
 piece with the right hand above the lower band, and drop 
 smartly the left hand by the side. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— As from order-arms. 
 
 For Corporals. 
 To pass from the shoulder, as private, to the shoulder as 
 sergeant. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand 
 seize the piece at the handle, turn it, the lock to the front, 
 as in the first motion of present-arms. 
 
 2d mo. Carry the piece, with the right hand, erect against 
 
 51 
 
52 PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, the right arm 
 nearly straight, the right hand embracing the cock and guard ; 
 seize the piece with the left hand at the height of the shoulder. 
 3d mo. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 
 
 For Corporals of the Colour-guard, (or Sergeants.) 
 
 CHARGE-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Raise the piece with 
 the right hand, in half-facing to the right on the left heel, 
 and bring the hollow of the right foot opposite to, and three 
 inches from, the left heel. 
 
 2d mo. Drop the piece forward into the left hand, which 
 will seize it a little above the lower band, the barrel up, the 
 left elbow supported against the body ; with the right hand 
 seize the handle below the guard, this hand supported against 
 the hip, the point of the bayonet at the height of the eye. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. In facing to the front, 
 raise the piece with the left hand, bring it erect against the 
 right shoulder, the rammer to the front ; with the right hand 
 at the same time embrace the cock and guard. 
 
 2d mo. Quit hold with the left hand, and drop this hand 
 by the side ; lengthen at the same time the right arm. 
 
 For Corporals returning to the Ranks. 
 
 SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Detach the piece from 
 the shoulder, bring it erect between the eyes, seize it with 
 the left hand at the height of the neck ; grasp, with the right 
 hand, the handle, this hand at the height of the elbow, the 
 rammer to the front. 
 
 2d mo. Raise the piece with the right hand, the thumb 
 extended on the counter-plate; turn the barrel to the front; 
 support the piece against the left shoulder ; at the same time 
 drop the left hand and place it under the butt. 
 
 3d mo. Drop the right hand smartly by the side. 
 
 MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE FOR 
 
 OFFICERS. 
 
 Position of the Sword or Sabre under Arms. 
 
 The Cahky. — The gripe in the right hand, which will be 
 
 supported against the right hip, the back of the blade against 
 
 the shoulder. 
 
 52 
 
PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 53 
 
 To Salute with the Sword or Sabre. 
 
 1st. At the distance of six paces from the person to be 
 saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, the point 
 up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right eye, the guard 
 at the height of the shoulder, the elbow supported on the 
 body. 
 
 2d. Drop the point of the sword or sabre in extending 
 the arm, so that the right hand may be brought to the 
 side of the right thigh, and remain in that position until the 
 person to whom the salute is rendered shall be passed, or 
 shall have passed six paces. 
 
 3d. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and resume the 
 position first prescribed. 
 
 COLOUR-SALUTE. 
 
 In the ranks, the colour-bearer, whether at a halt or in 
 march, will always carry the heel of the colour-lance sup- 
 ported at the right hip, the right hand generally placed on 
 the lance at the height of the shoulder, to hold it steady. 
 When the colour has to render honors, the colour-bearer will 
 salute as follows: 
 
 At the distance of six paces, glide the right hand along 
 the lance to the height of the eye ; lower the lance by straight- 
 ening the arm to its full extent, the heel of the lance remain- 
 ing at the hip, and bring back the lance to the habitual posi- 
 tion when the person saluted shall be passed, or shall have 
 passed six paces. 
 
 INSTRUCTION 
 
 FOR THE DRUM MAJOR (OR PRINCIPAL MUSICIAN.) 
 
 In column in manoeuvre, the field music and band will 
 march abreast with the left centre company on the reverse 
 flank. 
 
 In column in route, as well as in the passage of defiles to 
 the front or in retreat, they will march at the head of their 
 respective battalions. 
 
 Beats of the Drum and Sounds of the Bugle. 
 The number of beats of the drum for the assembly, pa- 
 E2 53 
 
54 PART I. OF THE COMTANY. 
 
 rade, and movements of the infantry, independent of mere 
 police calls and the particular march of the regiment, is fixed 
 at eighteen. These beats are : 
 
 1. The generale. 
 
 2. The assembly. 
 
 3. To the colour. 
 
 4. The long roll. 
 
 5. The troop. 
 
 6. Quick time. 
 
 7. The charging step. 
 
 8. The reveille. ' 
 9- The retreat. 
 
 10. The disperse. 
 
 11. Drummer's call. 
 
 12. The roll. 
 
 13. First sergeant's call. 
 
 1 4. Double quick march. ' 
 
 15. Run. 
 
 16. Halt. 
 
 17. March in retreat. 
 
 18. Commence firing. 
 
 The number of bugle sounds is fixed at twenty-three, ex- 
 elusive of the particular march of each regiment. These 
 sounds are : 
 
 1. 
 
 The generale. 
 
 
 13. 
 
 Double quick march 
 
 2. 
 
 The assembly. 
 
 
 14. 
 
 Run. 
 
 3. 
 
 To the colour. 
 
 
 15. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 4. 
 
 The troop. 
 
 
 16. 
 
 Forward march. 
 
 5. 
 
 Common time. 
 
 
 17. 
 
 March in retreat. 
 
 6. 
 
 Quick time. 
 
 
 18. 
 
 By the right flank 
 
 7. 
 
 The charging step. 
 
 
 march. 
 
 8. 
 
 The reveille. 
 
 
 19. 
 
 By the left flank 
 
 9. 
 
 The retreat. 
 
 
 
 march. 
 
 10. 
 
 The disperse. 
 
 
 20. 
 
 Commence firing. 
 
 11. 
 
 Bugler's call. 
 
 
 21. 
 
 Cease firing. 
 
 12. 
 
 First sergeant's 
 
 call. 
 
 22. 
 23. 
 
 Rally on the reserve 
 Rally on the battal- 
 
 Signals of the Drum Major (or principal Musician) for 
 the different beats. 
 
 1. The generale. 
 
 2. The assembly. 
 
 Extend the right arm, seize the 
 staff at the middle, and raise the 
 pommel to the height of the chin 
 
 Extend the right arm, raise the 
 staff about a foot from the ground, 
 and place the thumb on the pom- 
 mel. 
 
 54 
 
TART I. OF THE COMPANY. 55 
 
 3. To the colour. Raise the staff perpendicularly, 
 
 the ferrule upwards, the arm ex- 
 tended and at the height of the 
 shoulder. 
 
 4. The long roll. Put the staff on the right shoulder, 
 
 the ferrule to the rear. 
 
 5. The troop. Raise the arm, turn the wrist 
 
 within, and place the staff hori- 
 zontally across the body at the 
 height of the chin. 
 
 6. Quick time Project the ferrule of the staff di- 
 
 rect and horizontally to the front. 
 
 7. The charging step. The same signal, with a brisk agi- 
 
 tation of the staff. 
 
 10. The disperse. Raise the staff perpendicularly, 
 
 the ferrule down, the arm extend- 
 ed at the height of the shoulder. 
 
 12. The roll. Raise the staff in the left hand in 
 
 the manner of the last signal. 
 
 Signals for the movements of the Field Music and Band. 
 1st. To march by the right flank, take the staff at the 
 middle and extend the arm to the right. 
 
 2d. To march by the left flank, make the same signal, 
 extending the arm to the left. 
 
 3d. To diminish front, let the ferrule fall into the left 
 hand, held as high as the eyes. 
 
 4th. To increase front, let the pommel of the staff fall 
 into the left hand, held as high as the eyes. 
 
 5th. To change direction, turn half round to the drum- 
 mers, and indicate to them, by a movement of the staff, to 
 which side they are to wheel or turn. 
 
 6th. To oblique to the right, extend the right arm as high 
 as the shoulder, holding the staff slantingly, and grasp the 
 ferrule, the left hand as high as the hip. 
 
 7th. To oblique to the left, make the contrary signal ; the 
 pommel of the staff will always indicate to which side the 
 obliquing is to take place. 
 
 To Ground Drums, Sfc. 
 1 . To put up drumsticks. Grasp the staff under the pom- 
 mel, and raise it as high as 
 the eyes, extending the arm 
 to the front. 
 
 55 
 
5ft 
 
 2. To unsling drums, 
 
 3. To ground drums. 
 
 1. To take up drums. 
 
 2. To suspend drums. 
 
 3. To draw out drumsticks. 
 
 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Draw the pommel to the 
 
 breast. 
 The same signal as for put- 
 ting up drumsticks. 
 
 f Make the same signals with 
 the staff as for putting up 
 drumsticks, for detaching 
 drums, and for grounding 
 drums. 
 
 Instruction for the Corporal of Pioneers. 
 
 In column in manoeuvre, the pioneers will be on the re- 
 verse flank, abreast with the right centre company. 
 
 In route marches, as also in passing defiles to the front or 
 rear, the pioneers will march six paces in front of the drum- 
 mers. In route marches, all the pioneers of a general col- 
 umn (column of several battalions) may be assembled at its 
 head. 
 
 Pioneers and drummers may be designated as markers, 
 and used accordingly, in the manoeuvres and evolutions. 
 
 56 
 
PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 a - n o n ; a u q a { 
 2d Platoon L. — IstPlatoon. « 
 
 Fro. 2. 
 
 OBBHBBBflBBflBBBIIHIflt' 
 
 a a a 
 
 S Fig. 3. 
 
 Fro. 7. 
 
PART 1. OF THE COMPANY. 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 Fig. 9. j ._ ° 
 
 / — '■ ■ 
 
 m 
 
 / i 
 
 V 
 
 Fig. 10 
 
 -^iiii£.. 
 
 B 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 58 
 
PART I. 
 
 OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of a Regiment, or Battalion, in order of battle. 
 
 (Fig. 1.) — The regiment or battalion is supposed to con- 
 sist of ten companies, to wit: one grenadier company, one 
 light infantry or rifle company, and eight battalion compa- 
 nies. 
 
 The battalion companies are drawn up according to the 
 rank of their captains, as follows : — 1st, 5th, 4th, 7th, 3d, 
 8th, 6th, 2d, and are designated from right to leR,frst com- 
 pany, second company, third company, &c 
 
 The grenadier company is posted on the right of the bat- 
 talion, and the light infantry or rifle company, on the left of 
 the battalion. 
 
 The two first companies on the right, whatever be their- 
 denomination, form the frst division : the next two compa- 
 nies, the second division ; and so on to the left. 
 
 The .colour-bearer (a sergeant) and five corporals, as a 
 colour-guard, are posted on the left of the right centre battal- 
 ion company, of which they make a part* They are formed 
 in two ranks, the colour-bearer in the front-rank, with a cor- 
 poral on his right and left, and three corporals in the rear- 
 covering. If there be two colours, then four corporals only 
 will constitute the colour-guard. The colour-bearers will be in 
 the front-rank, with a corporal between them, covered by 
 three corporals in the rear. 
 
 The colour-company and all on its right are denominated 
 the right wing of the battalion ; the remaining companies, 
 the left wing. 
 
 The colonel takes post thirty paces in rear of the file- 
 closers, opposite to the centre of the battalion ; the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel and major opposite to the centres of the right 
 and left wings respectively, and twelve paces in rear of the 
 file-closers. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major, are 
 mounted. 
 
 59 
 
60 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite to the right 
 and left of the battalion respectively, and eight paces in rear 
 of the file-closers ; they aid the lieutenant-colonel and ma- 
 jor respectively in the manoeuvres. 
 
 The quartermaster, surgeon, and assistant-surgeon, drawn 
 up in one rank, from right to left, in the order they are 
 named, are posted on the left of the colonel, three paces in 
 his rear. 
 
 The quartermaster sergeant is posted in a line with the 
 front-rank of the field-music, and two paces on the right. 
 
 The pioneers, with the corporal of pioneers on their right, 
 are formed in two ranks and posted on the right of the gre- 
 nadiers, their left four paces from the right of that company. 
 
 The field-music is formed in two ranks, the drummers in 
 the rear, and posted twelve paces in rear of the file-closers, 
 the left opposite to the centre of the left centre company. 
 The senior principal musician is two paces in front of the 
 field-music, the other two paces in the rear. 
 
 The band is formed in two ranks, and posted three paces 
 in rear of the field-music. 
 
 Two sergeants, one denominated the right general guide, 
 the other the left general guide, are posted in the line of file- 
 closers, the first in the rear of the right, and the second in 
 the rear of the left-flank of the battalion. 
 
 For manoeuvring, the companies in each battalion are al- 
 ways equalized. 
 
 To open Ranks. 
 
 PREPARE TO OPEN RANKS.— At this command, the 
 lieutenant-colonel and major place themselves on the right of 
 the battalion to direct the alignment. 
 
 TO THE REAR OPEN ORDER.— The covering ser- 
 geants, and the covering corporal step off smartly four paces 
 to the rear opposite to their places in line, and are aligned by 
 the lieutenant-colonel on the covering corporal who inverts 
 his piece and holds it erect between his eyes. 
 
 MARCH. — The rear-rank and file-closers step off to the 
 rear in common time ; the rear-rank passes a little in rear of 
 its new line, halts, dresses to the right, and is aligned by the 
 covering sergeants, superintended by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 The file-closers fall back two paces from the rear-rank, and 
 
 GO 
 
fART I. OF THE BATTALION. 61 
 
 are aligned by the major on the file-closer of the left, who 
 inverts his piece and holds it erect between his eyes. 
 
 FRONT. — The lieutenant-colonel and major return to 
 their places in line. 
 
 To close Ranks. 
 CLOSE ORDER— MARCH.— At the word march, the 
 rear-rank closes to the front, each man covering his file 
 leader. 
 
 Manual of Arms. 
 
 The ranks being closed, the manual of arms is executed in 
 the following order : 
 
 Present-arms^ ... Shoulder-arms, 
 Order-arms, - - - Shoulder-arms, 
 
 Support-arms, - - - Carry-arms, 
 Charge-bayonet, - - - Shoulder-arms. 
 
 LOADINGS AT WILL AND THE FIRINGS. 
 
 Loading at will is executed by the commands and in the 
 manner prescribed in the squad-drill; the officers and ser- 
 geants in the ranks, half face to the right with the men, and 
 face to the front when the men next to them cast about. 
 
 The fire by company and by file, is always direct, that 
 by battalion and by wing, is either direct or oblique ; in the 
 latter case the commanding officer gives the caution right 
 (or left) oblique, between the words ready and aim. 
 The colour-guard is not to fire, but to reserve itself for the 
 defence of the colour. 
 
 The fire by Company. 
 
 FIRE BY COMPANY.— At this command, the captains 
 and the covering sergeants place themselves in the manner 
 prescribed for this fire in the company drill. The colour 
 and its guard step back so as to bring the front-rank of the 
 guard on a line with the rear-rank; these rules are general 
 for all the different firings. 
 
 COMMENCE FIRING.— At this command, the right 
 company of each division begins the fire, their captains giv- 
 ing the words (such) company, ready, aim, fire, load, 
 F 6i 
 
62 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 The captains of the left companies of divisions, observe the 
 same rule, each taking care not to give his first command, 
 till he sees one or two pieces shouldered in the right com- 
 pany of his division : the captains of the right companies of 
 divisions, after the first discharge, observe the same rule 
 "vith regard to the left companies. In order that the right 
 companies of divisions may not all fire at once, their cap- 
 tains, for the first discharge only, give the word fire, in suc- 
 cession from right to left. 
 
 The commanding officer causes the firing to cease by a 
 short roll, when the captains and all the file-closers give the 
 words cease firing ; the men complete the loading and 
 come to the shoulder : the roll is followed by a tap of the 
 drum, when the captains, covering sergeants, and the colour- 
 guard resume their places in line. These rules are general 
 for all the firings. 
 
 The fire by Wing. 
 
 FIRE BY WING. RIGHT (or LEFT) WING. > The 
 
 READY. AIM. FIRE. LOAD. $ wings 
 
 fire alternately, care being taken to see that one or two pieces 
 
 are shouldered in the wing that has just fired before giving 
 
 the first command for the other. 
 
 The fire by Battalion. 
 This is executed by the commands: FIRE BY BAT- 
 TALION. BATTALION— READY. AIM. FIRE. LOAD. 
 
 The fire by File. 
 
 FIRE BY FILE. BATTALION. > At the command, 
 READY. COMMENCE FIRING. $ commence firing, 
 the firing begins on the right of each company at the same 
 time. 
 
 To fire by the Rear-rank. 
 FACE BY THE REAR-RANK.— The captains, cover- 
 ing sergeants, and the file-closers, conform to what is pre- 
 scribed in the company drill, under this head. The colour- 
 bearer passes into the rear-rank, the corporal of his file step- 
 ping before the corporal next on his own right, to let the 
 colour-bearer pass, and then stepping in front of the colour- 
 hearer to reform his file ; the closing" sergeant and covering 
 
 62 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 03 
 
 corporal change places; the lieutenant-colonel, adjutant, 
 major, sergeant-major, field-music, and band, throw them- 
 selves before the front-rank, each opposite to his place in 
 line, the first two passing round the right the others round 
 the left of the battalion. 
 
 BATTALION— ABOUT-FACE.— The battalion faces 
 about, the captains placing themselves in their intervals in 
 the rear-rank, now front, and their covering sergeants be- 
 hind them in the front-rank, now rear. 
 
 The different firings are executed by the same commands 
 as if the battalion were faced by the front-rank. The right 
 and left wings and companies, retain their former designa- 
 tions. The fire by file, commences on the left, now right, 
 of each company. The captains, covering sergeants, and 
 colour-guard, on the first command, take the places pre- 
 scribed for them in the fires, with the front-rank leading. 
 
 To resume the proper Front. 
 FACE BY THE FRONT-RANK. \ The battalion re- 
 BATTALION— ABOUT-FACE. \ turns to its proper 
 front in the manner prescribed for the face by the rear- 
 rank. 
 
 To stack and resume Arms. 
 
 STACK-ARMS. — Arms are stacked in the manner pre- 
 scribed in the squad-drill. 
 
 BREAK-RANKS— MARCH— At the word march, the 
 ranks disperse. 
 
 To return the battalion to the ranks, a short roll is given, 
 during which the battalion re-forms behind the stacks of 
 arms. 
 
 TAKE— ARMS. — This command is executed in the man- 
 ner prescribed in the squad-drill. 
 
 BATTALION. — At this word, the ranks fix their atten 
 tion and remain immoveable. 
 
 Manner of determining a Line. 
 
 The commanding officer having determined on the direc 
 tion of his line, and his points A B, sends out two officers 
 C D, to seek two intermediate points in the same line; the 
 officer D advances, when C finds him in the direct line be- 
 tween himself and the point A, he advances, taking care to 
 
 63 
 
64 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 keep D always between himself and the point A, which he 
 does by making him signals to advance or retire ; when D 
 finds C in the direct line between himself and B, he makes 
 him the signal to halt, and they will find themselves in the 
 intermediate points, C D. 
 
 L L 
 
 A. " . ID 
 
 Movements. 
 
 The following movements are arranged throughout as for 
 eight companies, but they are applicable to ten companies. 
 The movements are detailed as performed from the right ; 
 the mode of doing them from the left is explained in each 
 case. 
 
 In the successive formations, (see No.'s 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10, 
 of movements from open column, No.'s 8, 9 and 10, from 
 close column, and 1 and 2, from column doubled on the cen- 
 tre,) each captain causes his company to support arms the 
 moment the captain, who follows him, commands front. 
 
 If the firing is to commence during the execution of the 
 successive formations, the order to that effect is given to the 
 captain whose company is first in line ; this captain places 
 himself behind the centre, and as soon as the next captain 
 commands front, he commences the fire by file. At the 
 words fire by file, the marker nearest the company just 
 formed, places himself before the nearest file of that compa- 
 ny, and the other marker retires. The captain of this last 
 company commences the fire as soon as the captain of the 
 next following company commands front ; the marker re- 
 tires, and the guide before the opposite flank places himself 
 before the nearest file of the next company, and so on in con • 
 tinuation. 
 
 All the successive formations, except No. 8, from open 
 column, may be formed by inversions, and they are executed 
 
 64 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 65 
 
 according to the same principles as formation in direct or- 
 der, the first command always being, by inversion. (See 
 No. 5, from open column.) 
 
 The battalion being in line by inversion, to bring it back to 
 the direct order, it first breaks or ploys, by company or by di- 
 vision, according as the column may have been, by company 
 or by division, before it was formed in line by inversion. 
 
 When a battalion, in line by inversion, has to ploy into co- 
 lumn, the movement is executed according to the same princi- 
 ples as if the line were in direct order ; but observing the fol- 
 lowing rules : — If the column is to be by company or division, 
 with the first in front, the caution, left in front, is given in 
 the command, because the battalion being in line by inver- 
 sion, that subdivision is on the left. Each chief whose subdi- 
 vision takes post in the column in front of the directing 
 one, conducts his subdivision till it halts ; and each chief 
 whose subdivision takes post in rear of the directing one, 
 halts in his own person when up with the preceding right 
 guide, and sees his subdivision file past ; and every chief 
 aligns his subdivision by the right. When the column is to 
 be put in march, the command guide left, is given, be- 
 cause the proper right is in front. For the same reason, if 
 the last subdivision is to be in front, the words right in 
 front, are given in the command ; the divisions are aligned 
 by the left ; and in putting the column in march, the words 
 guide right, are given, because the proper left is in front. 
 
 In the movements, each chief of subdivision, previous to 
 the order of execution, steps in front of his subdivision and cau- 
 tions it as to the particular movement it has to perform ; the 
 covering sergeants always replace their captains in the front- 
 rank. 
 
 MOVEMENTS FROM LINE. 
 
 Movement No. l,from Line. 
 To break to the right into column. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 BY COMPANY. ) At the word march, each compa- 
 RIGHT-WHEEL. V ny wheels to the right on a fixed 
 QUICK-MARCH. ) pivot, the left guide placing himself 
 on the marching flank to conduct it ; when that flank arrives 
 within three paces of the point where it is to rest, the cap- 
 tain commands (such) company— halt ; the left guide steps 
 forward to the point where the left of the company is to rest, 
 F2 65 
 
66 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 and is aligned by the captain on the pivot man. Each cap- 
 tain aligns his company by the left, giving the words left" 
 dress, followed by front, and takes his place in column. 
 
 Wheeling to the left into column, is performed according 
 to the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Line. (Fig. 3.) 
 
 When the line breaks to the right, in order to march to 
 the left, or the reverse, the command break to the right 
 
 TO MARCH TO THE LEFT, Or BREAK TO THE LEFT TO MARCH 
 
 to the right, precedes the command by company-right 
 (or left)-wheel. The company on that flank towards 
 which the wheel is made, marches forward twice the extent 
 of its front, while the others are wheeling, and there halts. 
 The lieutenant-colonel places two markers, one abreast with 
 the leading company, the other abreast with the next com- 
 pany, near the directing guides. These two companies turn 
 to the left (or right) the moment the column is put in march. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Line. 
 To break to the rear into column. (Fig. 4.) 
 BY THE RIGHT OF COMPANIES, ) The battalion 
 TO THE REAR INTO COLUMN. } faces to the right, 
 BATTALION— RIGHT-FACE. ) each captain goes 
 to the right of his company, breaks two files to the rear, and 
 places himself so that his breast shall touch the left arm of 
 the front-rank man of the last file of the company on his 
 right ; for this object the captain of the right company sup- 
 poses a company to be on his right, and dresses on the other 
 captains. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. — Each company, conducted by the 
 covering sergeant in front of the leading front-rank man, 
 marches perpendicularly to the rear, each file wheeling or. 
 the same ground in succession. The captains stand fast 
 let their companies file past, and when the last file has wheel- 
 ed, each captain gives the words (such) company-halt, 
 front-face. The left guide then places himself so that 
 his left arm may touch the captain's breast, and the captain 
 adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes his place in 
 column. 
 
 To break to the rear by the left, the same command, sub- 
 stituting left for right, and the same means are observed. 
 
 66 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 67 
 
 The captajns shifting to the left of their companies and the 
 left guides leading. 
 
 Movement No 4, from Line. 
 
 To ploy into close column, or mass. (Fig. 5.) 
 This may be performed bv company or by division. 
 CLOSE COLUMN BY DIVISION, ON THIRD ) At 
 DIVISION RIGHT IN FRONT, INTO CO- > the 
 LUMN. BATTALION, INWARD-FACE. J word 
 pace, the divisions on the right and left of the directing di- 
 vision, which stands fast, face towards that division. Each 
 chief of those on the right goes to the left of his division, 
 causes files to break to the front and places himself by the 
 side of his left guide, who is in front of the leading front-rank 
 man. Each chief of those on the left of the directing divi- 
 sion, goes to the right of his division, causes files to break 
 to the rear, and places himself by the side of his right guide, 
 who is in front of the leading front-rank man. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— The chief of the directing division 
 gives the words guide left, when its left guide places him- 
 self on its left, and the file-closers advance one pace on 
 the rear-rank. The other divisions, each conducted by its 
 chief, step off* together at the word, and the file-closers in- 
 cline to the distance of one pace from the rear-rank. Each 
 division enters the column parallelly to the directing division, 
 to effect which those next to that division march by file, the 
 one on its right, to the front, the one on its left, to the rear, 
 each five paces before it turns to enter the column ; the other 
 divisions march diagonally towards the points at which they 
 are to enter the column. Each division that is to form in 
 front of the directing division, is conducted by its chief till 
 its left guide is nearly up with the left guide of the directing 
 division, the chief then gives the words: (such) division, 
 halt, front-face, and the left guide faces to the rear and 
 covers the preceeding guide at a distance of five paces ; the 
 chief then adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes 
 his place in column. Each chief of divisions which are 
 to form in rear of the directing division, halts when he is 
 up with the left guide of that division, lets his division file 
 past, and when the last file has passed him, gives the words, 
 (such) division, halt, front-face, when the left guide 
 covers the preceding guide at a distance of five paces ; the 
 
 67 
 
68 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 chief then adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes his 
 place in column. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel rectifies the position of the guides 
 in front, and the major, those in rear of the directing divi- 
 sion. 
 
 If the battalion is to ploy with the left in front, it will be 
 SO expressed in the command. The chief of the directing 
 division gives the words guide-right the moment the move- 
 ment begins, and the formation takes place according to the 
 same principles but by inverse means. 
 
 The battalion may ploy on any named division, with the 
 right or left in front, according to the same principles. 
 
 The guides who have faced about will face to the front at 
 the words guides about-face, given by the commanding- 
 officer, the moment the movement is complete. 
 
 The battalion may be ployed into column at full or half 
 distance, on the same principles, by substituting in the com- 
 mands, COLUMN AT FULL (or HALF) DISTANCE, for CLOSK 
 COLUMN. 
 
 Movement No. 5, from Line. 
 
 To ploy into column doubled on the centre. (Fig. C.) 
 
 DOUBLE COLUMN, ) The two centre 
 
 AT HALF DISTANCE. V companies (fourth 
 
 BATTALION, INWARD-FACE. J and fifth) stand fast, 
 the remaining companies face towards the centre. Each 
 captain whose company has faced, causes two files at the 
 head of his company to break to the rear ; the left guide of 
 each right company, and the right guide of each left compa- 
 ny places himself at the head of the front-rank, the captain 
 by his side. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. — The two centre companies stand fast, 
 their chief places himself before the centre, and gives the 
 words guide-right. The remaining companies, conducted 
 by their captains, enter the column at company distance, 
 each behind the one preceding in the same wing, the corre- 
 sponding companies of the two wings uniting ; that is, the 
 third company unites with the sixth, the second with the 
 seventh, and the first with the eighth. An instant before the 
 union, the left guides of the right companies pass into the 
 rank of file-closers, and when the. head of the companies 
 arrive opposite the centre of the directing division, each cap- 
 
 68 
 
TART I. OF THE BATTALION. 09 
 
 tain gives the words (such) company, halt, front-face ; the 
 senior captain of each division then adds right-dress, fol- 
 lowed by front, and takes his place in column. 
 
 The divisions thus formed, are denominated first, second, 
 third, fourth, beginning at the front. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel in rear assures the right guides of 
 the right companies on the direction, as they successively ar- 
 rive. 
 
 The double column, closed in mass, may be formed ac- 
 cording to the same principles, by substituting in the com- 
 mand, CLOSED IN MASS, for that of AT HALF DISTANCE. 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Line. 
 
 Changes of Front. (Fig. 7.) 
 Before the caution is given for a change of front, the base 
 company is established on the new line, and two markers 
 are placed in front of that company opposite the right and 
 left files ; the markers face to the right, if the company be- 
 long to the right wing ; and to the left, if it belong to the 
 left wing. If the change is to be made on the fifth company, 
 left wing forward, that company serves as the base, and the 
 moment it is established the fourth company is faced about, 
 wheeled to the right, halted, and faced to the front, its right 
 guide steps out on the line at the point where its right is to 
 rest and covers the markers, and the captain of the fifth 
 steps into the rear-rank to give place to the captain of the 
 fourth, who aligns his company by the left. If the change 
 is to be made on the fourth company, right wing forward, 
 the line is established by inverse means, the fourth company 
 serves as the base and the fifth is aligned upon it. In these 
 central changes, both the central companies are established 
 before the caution is given. 
 
 CHANGE FRONT ON FIFTH COMPANY, ^ At the 
 LEFT WING FORWARD. RIGHT WING, | word 
 ABOUT-FACE. BY COMPANY, RIGHT \ face, 
 HALF WHEEL. QUICK-MARCH. FOR- the , 
 WARD-MARCH. GUIDE-RIGHT. J com- 
 
 panies of the right wing face about, their captains behind 
 the rank now in rear : the companies of both wings half- 
 wheel to the right, and the moment they have sufficiently 
 wheeled, the words forward-march are given, when they 
 move forward in echellon towards the new line, dressing by 
 
 69 
 
70 PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 the right. Each company of the right wing, as it approaches 
 the new line, turns to the right, and when it has passed the 
 line three paces, its captain gives the words (such) company, 
 halt, about-face; its right guide throws himself on the 
 line opposite the right file and covers the preceding guides, 
 and the captain placing himself oil the right of the preced- 
 ing company, gives the words left-dress, followed by 
 front. Each company of the left wing, on approaching 
 the line, turns to the right, and when within three paces of 
 the line, its captain gives the words (such) company, halt ; 
 its left guide throws himself on the line opposite the left file 
 and covers the preceding guides, and the captain placing 
 himself on the left of the preceding company, gives the 
 words right-dress. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS.— The captains and guides take their 
 places in line, and the markers retire. 
 
 In central changes, the lieutenant-colonel rectifies the po- 
 sition of the guides of the right wing, the major those of the 
 left ; in other cases, the lieutenant-colonel alone rectifies the 
 position of the guides, always placing himself on their rear 
 as they successively arrive on the line. 
 
 If the change of front is to be made forward on the right 
 or left company, the command is given, change front for- 
 ward ON FIRST (or EIGHTH) COMPANY. BY COMPANY, RIGHT 
 
 (or left) half wheel, quick-march, forward-march, 
 guide-right (or left,) and the movement is executed ac- 
 cording to the principles prescribed above for the companies 
 of the left wing. 
 
 If the change of front is to be made to the rear on either 
 of the flank companies, the command is given, change 
 
 FRONT TO THE REAR ON FIRST (or EIGHTH) COMPANY. BAT 
 TALION ABOUT FACE. BY COMPANY, LEFT (or RIGHT) HALF 
 WHEEL. QUICK-MARCH. FORWARD-MARCn. GUIDE-LEFT 
 
 (or right,) and the movement is executed according to the 
 principles prescribed above for the companies of the right 
 wing. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Line. 
 
 To march by a flank. 
 
 BATTALION BY THE RIGHT (or LEFT) > The in- 
 
 FLANK. RIGHT (or LEFT)-FACE. \ stant the 
 
 battalion faces, the captains stop out. of the front-rank, and 
 
 70 
 
PAST 1. OF THE BATTALION. 71 
 
 nrs replaced by their covering sergeants. If the face be to 
 the right, the captains place themselves on the left of their 
 covering sergeants, and the closing sergeant, in like man- 
 ner places himself on the left of the covering corporal, who 
 steps into the front-rank. If the face be to the left, each 
 captain goes to the left of his company, and places himself 
 on the right of the covering sergeant of the company pre- 
 ceding his own ; the captain of the left company, on the 
 right of the closing sergeant, who is now in the front-rank, 
 the covering corporal in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 BATTALION FORWARD. QUICK-MARCH— At the 
 word march, the whole step off together, the sergeant of the 
 leading file giving the direction. 
 
 If it be necessary to change direction in marching, a mar- 
 ker is established at the point of change, and the command- 
 ing officer gives the words : by file, right (or left,) and adds 
 march, the instant the leading file is abreast of the marker. 
 Each file wheels in succession on the same ground. 
 
 If it be intended to halt and front the battalion, the com- 
 manding officer gives the words : battalion, halt — front- 
 face. The instant the battalion faces to the front, the cap- 
 tains and covering sergeants resume their places in line and 
 the former rectify the alignment. 
 
 If the battalion, marching by the right flank, is to form on 
 the right by file, two markers are placed in advance, at 
 points where the right and left of the leading company are 
 to rest, presenting their right shoulders to the line : the com- 
 manding officer then gives the words : on right Br file 
 Into line, and adds march, the instant the leading file is 
 opposite the first marker. The movement is executed in 
 the manner prescribed for this formation in the company 
 drill. Each company forms on the left of the one which 
 precedes it. The left guide of each company, except the 
 leading one, places himself on the direction of the markers, 
 and opposite to the left file of his company, the moment this 
 file arrives on the line. 
 
 The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
 words guides— posts. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, in succession assures the direc- 
 tion of the guides. 
 
 If the march be by the left flank, this .movement is exo- 
 
 71 
 
72 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 cuted according to the same principles, and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Line. 
 To advance in line. (Fig 8.) 
 
 The commanding officer places himself forty paces in rear 
 of the colour-file, facing to the front : the lieutenant-colonel 
 a like distance in front of the same file, facing to the rear, and 
 is established perpendicularly to the line by the commanding 
 officer, who then throws himself twenty paces further to the 
 rear and establishes two markers on the prolongation of the 
 line passing through the colour-bearer and the lieutenant- 
 colonel : the first marker twenty-five paces in rear of the 
 battalion ; the second, the same distance from the first, both 
 facing to the rear. The colour-bearer takes two points on 
 the ground in the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, the first 
 point, twenty paces in advance. 
 
 BATTALION-FORWARD.— At the word forward, 
 the front-rank of the colour-guard advances six paces, and is 
 re-placed by its rear-rank ; the two general guides also ad- 
 vance abreast with the colour-bearer, opposite the right and 
 left flanks of the battalion. The captains of the left wing 
 shift to the left of their companies, the covering sergeant of 
 the company next on the left of the colour-company, step- 
 ping into the front-rank, and the closing sergeant replacing 
 the covering corporal, who steps into the rank of file-closers. 
 The lieutenant-colonel having assured the colour-bearer on 
 the line between himself and the corporal of the colour-file, 
 places himself fifteen paces on the right of the captain of the 
 colour-company, to maintain this captain, and the next one 
 beyond him, abreast with the three centre corporals. The 
 major places himself eight paces on either flank of the colour- 
 rank. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— At the word march, the battalion 
 steps off with life : the colour-bearer is charged with the step 
 and the direction, the corporals on his right and left, and 
 the general guides maintain themselves abreast with him, 
 and march in the same step ; the centre corporal of the co- 
 lour-guard, in the front-rank, marches in the trace of the 
 colour-bearer. The captains of the colour-company, and 
 the company next on the left, with the three corporals in the 
 centre of the front-rank, constitute the basis of alignment for 
 both wings of the battalion ; the other captains maintain 
 
 72 
 
PART I OF THE BATTALION. 73 
 
 themselves on the prolongation of this basis. The men 
 march with the head and shoulders square to the front, feel 
 lightly the elbow towards the centre, and resist pressure 
 from the flanks, holding themselves always slightly behind 
 the line of captains. If opening or crowding of files occur, 
 or any disorder ensue, the remedy will be applied as prompt- 
 ly, and as gently as possible. 
 
 Pending the march, the line, determined by the two mar- 
 kers, is prolonged by placing, in proportion as the battalion 
 advances, a third marker behind the first ; then the second 
 marker quits his place and throws himself behind the third ; 
 the firs* marker, in his turn, does the like in respect to the 
 second, and so on in succession as long as the battalion con- 
 tinues to advance, each taking care to face to the rear and to 
 cover accurately. A staff-officer, or the sergeant-major, 
 placed twenty paces behind the marker nearest the battalion, 
 assures the markers on the direction, and cautions each when 
 to shift his place. 
 
 The major throws himself, from time to time, twenty 
 paces in front of the colour-bearer, faces to the rear and 
 covers the markers behind the centre, in order to rectify, if 
 necessary, the direction of the colour-bearer, who, in such 
 case, takes new points on the ground between himself and 
 he major. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Line. 
 To halt the battalion and to align it. 
 
 BATTALION-HALT. COLOUR > At the word 
 AND GENERAL GUIDES-POSTS. $ halt, the battal- 
 ion halts. At the word posts, the colour-bearer and the 
 general guides take their places in line ; the captains of the 
 left wing shift to the right of their companies ; the colour- 
 guard falls back into the rear-rank, and the closing sergeant 
 and covering corporal return to their places. 
 
 CAPTAINS-RECTIFY THE ALIGNMENTS.— The 
 captains cast an eye towards the centre, align themselves 
 under the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, and promptly 
 dress their companies. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Line. 
 To retire in line. 
 
 FACE TO THE REAR. } At the words about- 
 
 BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. \ face, the battalion 
 G ~3 
 
7* PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 faces about, the colour-bearer passes into the rear-rank now 
 leading, the corporal of his file stepping behind the corporal 
 on his right, to let the colour-bearer pass, and then placing 
 himself in his rear, to reform the colour-file. The com- 
 manding officer places himself behind the front-rank, now 
 rear, and the lieutenant-colonel and major before the rear- 
 rank, now front. 
 
 The same dispositions are then made as for the advance 
 in line, except that the markers, who were then in rear, are 
 now in front facing the battalion, the first twenty-five paces 
 from the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 BATTALION-FORWARD.— The colour-bearer and the 
 corporal on his right and left, advance eight paces and are 
 replaced by the next rank of the guard : the general guides 
 move out abreast with the colour-rank, the covering ser- 
 geants place themselves in the line of file-closers, and the 
 captains in the rear-rank, now front; the three file-closers 
 nearest the colour, unite in rear of the colour-rank, to serve 
 as a basis of alignment for the line of file-closers ; the cap- 
 tains of the left wing, now right, shift to the left, now right, 
 of their companies. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— The battalion retires in line on the 
 same principles which governed the advance in line ; the 
 file-closer behind the colour-bearer, marches exactly in his 
 trace, and the colour-bearer directs himself on the markers. 
 The lieutenant-colonel, on the outside of the file-closers of 
 the colour-company, maintains the three file-closers of the 
 basis of alignment, in a square with the line of direction ; 
 the other file-closers keep themselves aligned on this basis. 
 
 Movement No. 11, from Line. 
 To halt the battalion and face it to the front. 
 
 BATTALION-HALT. ) At the words about 
 
 FACE TO THE FRONT. } FACE.the colour-rank, 
 
 BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. ) general guides, cap- 
 tains, and covering sergeants, retake their habitual places in 
 in line ; the colour-bearer goes into the front-rank, and the 
 battalion is aligned as in No. 9. 
 
 Movement No. 12, from Line. 
 
 Passage of obstacles. (Figs. 9, 10.) 
 
 If the obstacle should be presented hefore the third com 
 
 74 
 
TART 1. OF THE BATTALION. 75 
 
 pany, while the battalion is advancing, it will be passed as 
 follows : 
 
 THIRD COMPANY, OBSTACLE— The captain of this 
 company steps out and gives the words, third company, by 
 the left flank, to the rear into column-march,- and hastens 
 to its left. At the word march, the company faces to the 
 left in marching, the two left files disengage to the rear, and 
 the company, quickening the step, is conducted by the left; 
 guide, at the head of the front-rank, parallelly to, and in 
 rear of the fourth company ; the captain of the third, halts 
 opposite to the captain of the fourth, lets his company file 
 past, and when its right file is up with him, faces his com- 
 pany to the right, and causes it to move forward, giving the 
 words, third company, by the right-flank march — guide 
 right, and placing himself before its centre ; when the com- 
 pany is at wheeling distance from the fourth, the captain 
 gives the words, to the step, at which k takes the step of 
 the battalion and preserves its distance, its right guide 
 following in the trace of the captain of the fourth. The 
 left guide of the second company places himself on the left 
 of the front-rank of his company as soon as the third faces 
 to the left, and maintains between himself and the right of 
 the fourth company, the space necessary for the return of 
 the third. 
 
 The obstacle being passed, the company returns into line 
 as follows : 
 
 THIRD COMPANY ) The captain adds, by 
 
 FORWARD INTO LINE. $ company, right half- 
 wheel, march ; the company quickening its step, makes a 
 half-wheel to the right, and when sufficiently wheeled, the 
 captain gives the words forward-r-march — guide-left ; the 
 company marches straight forward towards the line, and 
 enters it by a turn to the left ; as soon as it is in line, its 
 captain, placing himself on its right, gives the words, to the 
 step, and the company takes the step from the colour-bearer. 
 Should the obstacle cover the front of several contiguous 
 companies (the three right for example,) it will be passed as 
 follows : 
 
 THREE RIGHT COMPANIES, OBSTA- ) At the word 
 CLE. BY THE LEFT FLANK, TO V march, each 
 THE REAR INTO COLUMN-MARCH. ) of the desig- 
 nated companies faces to the left, disengages files to the rear 
 
 75 
 
76 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 and executes the movement in the manner prescribed for the 
 third, each forming in rear of the one which precedes it, and 
 as soon as it has its wheeling distance, taking the step of the 
 battalion. 
 
 The obstacle being passed, these companies return into 
 line as follows : 
 
 THREE RIGHT COMPANIES. > At the words, 
 
 FORWARD INTO LINE— MARCH. $ into line, the 
 captain of each of these companies adds, by company, right 
 half-wheel. At the word march, each company conforms 
 itself to what has been prescribed for the third company. 
 
 If the companies of the left wing are to pass an obstacle, 
 they execute the movement according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 In retiring in line, these movements are executed on the 
 same principles as if the battalion were advancing. 
 
 If, when advancing in line, it become necessary to halt 
 the battalion in order to retire, and there be companies in 
 column in its rear, these companies face about with the bat- 
 talion, precede it in march, and take their places in line by 
 the oblique step, as they clear the obstacles. 
 
 When the colour-company is to pass an obstacle, the co- 
 lour-rank returns into line the moment the company faces to 
 the right or left : the major places himself six paces before 
 the extremity of the company behind which the colour-com- 
 pany marches, in order to give the step and the direction : he 
 himself, first taking the step from the battalion- 
 
 As soon as the colour-company returns into line, the front- 
 rank of the colour-guard throws itself out six paces in front 
 of the battalion and takes the step from the major, who 
 throws himself twenty or thirty paces in front of the colour- 
 bearer, faces the battalion, and is established on the perpen- 
 dicular by the commanding officer, placed behind the centre ; 
 the colour-bearer then takes points on the ground between 
 himself and the major. 
 
 If the obstacle cover several companies of the centre, each 
 of these companies files into column behind that, still in line, 
 and of the same wing which may be nearest to it. 
 
 Movement No. 13, from Line. 
 
 To- pass a defile in relrcat. (Fie;. 11, 12.) 
 
 If a battalion, retiring in line encounter a defile, it is iun 
 
 70 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 77 
 
 mediately halted and faced to the front. If the defile be in 
 rear of the left-flank, and its width sufficient to admit a co- 
 lumn by platoon, a marker is placed fifteen or twenty paces 
 in reaB of the file-closers, at the point around which the sub- 
 divisions are to change direction, in order to enter the defile. 
 
 TO THE REAR, BY THE RIGHT > The captain of 
 
 FLANK, PASS THE DEFILE. \ the-right company 
 adds (such) company, by the right flank, right-face — quick 
 — march. At the word face, this company faces to the 
 right ; at the word march, its leading file wheels to the 
 right, marches to the rear four paces beyond the file-closers, 
 wheels again to the right, and marches forward towards the 
 left flank; the remaining files of this company wheel in suc- 
 cession at the same point where the first had wheeled. The 
 next company from the right, executes in its turn, the same 
 movement by the commands of its captain, who gives the 
 word march, so that his first file, wheeling on its ground, 
 may immediately follow the last file of the first company. 
 The following companies, each in its turn, execute what is 
 prescribed for the second. 
 
 When the whole of the second company is on the direc- 
 tion with the first, the captain of the first causes his com- 
 pany to form by platoon into line, and the guide of the first 
 platoon directs himself on the marker. The other companies, 
 each in succession, the moment the one in its rear is wholly 
 on the direction, forms by platoon into line, in the manner 
 prescribed for the first. 
 
 The first platoon of the leading company, when opposite 
 the marker, turns to the left, and the following platoons ex- 
 ecute the same movement, at the same point. As the last 
 companies will not be able to form platoons before reaching 
 the defile, they so direct themselves, in entering it, as to 
 leave room to the left for this movement. 
 
 As the platoons of each company clear the defile, compa- 
 nies are successively formed. 
 
 A defile in rear of the right flank is passed by the left 
 flank, the movement being executed according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 If the defile be too narrow to receive the front of a pla- 
 toon, it is passed by a flank. 
 
 G2 77 
 
78 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 MOVEMENTS FROM OPEN COLUMN. 
 
 Movement No. I, from Open Column. 
 
 To march in column. 
 
 COLUMN-FORWARD. > At the words guide-left, 
 
 GUIDE LEFT-MARCH. \ the leading guide takes two 
 points on the ground in the direction to be marched. At the 
 word march, the whole step off together, the leading guide 
 marching on the points he has chosen, and taking new points 
 as ho advances ; the following guides preserve both step and 
 distance, each marching in the trace of the guide who im- 
 mediately precedes him. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel marches abreast with the leading 
 guide, and assures him in the direction : the major is abreast 
 with the last subdivision, and sees that each guide marches 
 in the trace of the one immediately preceding. 
 
 With the left in front the same commands and means are 
 observed, substituting the words guide-right for guide- 
 left. 
 
 A close column, or a column at half distance, may be 
 put in march by the same commands and means. 
 Movement No. 2, from Open Cohimn. 
 To change direction in marching. (Fig. 13.) 
 
 A marker is placed on the side of the directing guide, 
 at the point at which the change is to take place, presenting 
 his breast to that flank of the column ; he remains in posi 
 tion till the last subdivision has passed. 
 
 HEAD OF COLUMN, > Each chief causes his 
 
 TO THE LEFT (or RIGHT.) \ subdivision to change 
 direction, the moment it arrives opposite the marker, in the 
 manner prescribed in the company drill. 
 
 The major sees that the guides direct themselves on the 
 marker, so as to graze his breast. 
 
 A column at half distance changes direction by the same 
 commands and means, except that in the change of direction 
 to the reverse flank, the pivot of each subdivision takes steps 
 of fourteen inches, instead of nine, in order to clear in time 
 the wheeling point, and the marching flank describes the arc 
 of a larger circle, in order to facilitate the movement. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Open Column. 
 To halt the column. 
 
 COLUMN-HALT. — At the word halt, the column halts 
 
 78 
 
PAKT I. OF THE BATTALION. 79 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Open Column. 
 
 To form to the left into line. 
 
 The column being at a halt, the guides on the directing 
 flank are directed to cover, each at a distance equal to the 
 front of his company. 
 
 LEFT-DRESS.— Each captain goes to the left of his 
 company, aligns it on the left guide, and gives the word 
 front. 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE-WHEEL.— The right guide of the 
 leading company throws himself on the line of the left 
 guides, opposite to where the right of his company is to rest, 
 faces to those guides, and is assured in position by the lieu- 
 Vmant-colonel. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. — Each company wheels to the left on 
 
 fixed pivot, the pivot man facing so as to present his breast 
 against the arm of the left guide, who stands fast ; when the 
 marching flank is within three paces of the line, each cap- 
 tain gives the words, (such) company -halt ; places himself 
 where the right of his company is to rest, and adds right- 
 dress, followed by front. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS.— The guides pass to their places in 
 line through the nearest captain's interval. 
 
 With the left in front, the line is formed to the right, ac- 
 cording to the same principles ; the left guide of the left com- 
 pany places himself on the direction of the right guide, as 
 prescribed above for the right guide of the right company, 
 and the captains align their companies by the left. At the 
 words guides-posts, the captains, as well as the guides, take 
 their places in line. 
 
 A column at half distance may form line in the same 
 manner, first taking wheeling distance. 
 
 Movement No. 5, from Open Column. 
 
 To form line to the right Dy inversion. 
 
 BY INVERSION, 1 At the words guide- 
 
 RIGHT INTO LINE-WHEEL. { right, the left guide 
 
 BATTALION GUIDE RIGHT, f of the leading com- 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. J pany places himself 
 
 on the direction of the right guides. At the word march, 
 
 the companies wheel to the right, and are aligned by the 
 
 left according to the principles prescribed in the last number. 
 
 79 
 
80 PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel in front assures the guides on the 
 direction. 
 
 With the left in front, the column forms line to the left 
 by inversion, according to the same principles. 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Open Column. 
 To ibrm on right into line. (Fig. 14.) 
 
 This is performed from the march. Two markers are 
 established in advance by the lieutenant-colonel, at points 
 where the right and left files of the leading company will 
 rest in line ; these markers are placed so as to present the 
 right shoulder to the battalion when formed. 
 
 ON RIGHT INTO LINE. BAT- ) When the lead- 
 
 TALION, GUIDE-RIGHT. $ ing company is up 
 
 with the first marker it turns to the right, receiving from its 
 captain the words right turn, march, followed by (such) 
 company, halt when within three paces of the marker, fhe 
 covering sergeant then takes his place in the rear-rank, the 
 left guide retires as file-closer, and the captain, placing him- 
 self at the point where the right of his company is to rest, 
 gives the words right-dr'ess, aligns his company on the 
 markers and adds front. Each of the other companies 
 continues to march straight forward until opposite the left 
 flank of the one which precedes it, when it turns to the right 
 and forms on the line in the manner prescribed for the first ; 
 the left guide, the instant his company halts, places himself 
 on the line opposite the left file, and covers the preceding 
 guide. 
 
 The line being formed, the commanding officer gives the 
 words guides-posts, and the guides and markers retire. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel placing himself in rear of the guides, 
 as they successively arrive on the line, assures them on the 
 direction. 
 
 With the left in front, the line is formed on the left accord- 
 ing to the same principles ; the captains go to the left of their 
 companies to align them, and at the words guides-posts 
 take their places in line. 
 
 A column at half distance, may form line in the same 
 manner. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Open Column. 
 To form to the front into line. (Fig. 15.) 
 
 The column being halted, two markers are established bv 
 
 80 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 81 
 
 the lieutenant-colonel at company distance in front of the 
 leading company, and at points where the right and left files 
 of that company are to rest ; these markers are placed so as 
 to present the right shoulder to the battalion when formed. 
 
 FORWARD INTO LINE.— The captain of the leading 
 company puts his company in march, giving the words 
 guide-right, halts it three paces from the markers, and aligns 
 it against them by the right, the left guide taking his place 
 as file-closer. 
 
 BY COMPANY, LEFT HALF-WHEEL. ) The re- 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. FORWARD-MARCH. V maining 
 
 GUIDE-RIGHT. ) companies 
 
 make a half-wheel to the left, and the moment they have 
 sufficiently wheeled, the words forward march, are given, 
 when they move forward in echellon towards the line, dress- 
 ing by the right. Each company, on approaching the line, 
 turns to the right on a caution from its captain, and when 
 within three paces of the line, the captain gives the words 
 (such) company halt ; the left guide then throws himself on 
 the line opposite to the left file, facing the preceding guide, 
 and the captain, placing himself on the left of the pre- 
 ceding company, gives the words right-dress, followed by 
 front. 
 
 The line being formed, the commanding officer gives ihe 
 words guides-posts, when the guides and markers retire. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
 scribed in the last number. 
 
 With the left in front, the line is formed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Open Column. 
 
 To form line faced to the rear. (Fig. 16.) 
 
 The column is halted, and the markers are established as 
 in the last number. 
 
 INTO LINE, FACED TO THE REAR.— At this com- 
 mand, the captain of the leading company faces his company 
 to the right, puts it in march and directs the leading file to- 
 wards the left marker ; the leading file passes in rear of 
 this marker, three paces beyond the line, wheels to the left, 
 and when opposite the right marker, the captain halts his 
 company and aligns it by the right on the two markers. 
 
 81 " 
 
82 PART I. OF THE BATTALION 
 
 BATTALION, RIGHT-FACE. > The remaining com- 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. \ panies face to the right, 
 
 and at the word march, move off, each, conducted by its 
 chief, towards the point where its left is to rest ; this point 
 being marked by the left guide, who precedes his company 
 on the line by fifteen paces and faces towards the markers. 
 Each captain directs his company in rear of his left guide, 
 passes the line three paces, wheels by file to the left, and 
 when the leading file arrives near the left of the preceding 
 company, gives the words (such) company, halt, front-face ; 
 he then places himself on the left of the preceding company, 
 and adds right~dress, followed by front. 
 
 The line being formed, the commanding officer gives the 
 words guides-posts, when the guides and markers retire. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
 scribed in No. 6. 
 
 With the left in front, the movement is executed accord- 
 ing to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 A column at half distance, may form line in the same 
 manner. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Open Column. 
 To form line by two movements. 
 
 Should a column, arriving behind the line, and prolonging 
 itself on that line, be halted before all the companies have 
 entered the new direction, it will form line as follows : 
 
 It is' here supposed that the column has been halted just 
 as the fifth company has entered the new direction, and that 
 there are eight companies in the column ; the guides of the 
 first live companies are assured on the direction. 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL, THREE ) At the words 
 
 REAR COMPANIES FORWARD IN- V for ward into 
 
 TO LINE. QUICK-MARCH. ) line, the chief 
 
 of each of the rear companies, gives the words by company, 
 left half-wheel. At the word march, the first five compa- 
 nies form to the left into line, and the three last, forward into 
 line, by means already prescribed : each captain of the three 
 rear companies, when his company has sufficiently wheeled, 
 gives the words, forward-march, guide-right. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Open Column. 
 If, instead of arriving behind, the column arrive before 
 the line, the formation will be made as follows : 
 
 82 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 83 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL, *) At the command, 
 THREE REAR COMPANIES, I faced to the rear, 
 INTO LINE FACED TO THE [ the captain of each 
 REAR. QUICK-MARCH. J of the rear compa- 
 
 nies gives the words (such) company, right-face. At the 
 word march, the first five companies form to the left into 
 line, and the three last, into line faced to the rear, by means 
 already prescribed. 
 
 With the left in front, these movements are executed ac- 
 cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 Movement No. 11, from Open Column. 
 To form close column. 
 
 Marching in column by company to close on leading com- 
 pany. 
 
 COLUMN, CLOSE IN MASS \ At the word march, 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. \ the captain of the lead- 
 
 ing company halts his company and aligns it by the left, the 
 file-closers closing one pace upon the rear-rank. All the 
 other companies continue to march, and as each in succes- 
 sion arrives at the distance of five paces from the one pre- 
 ceding, its captain halts it, and its left guide places himself 
 on the direction of the guides who precede ; the captain 
 there aligns his company by the left, and the file-closers close 
 one pace upon the rear-rank. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, in front of the leading guide, as- 
 sures the position of the guides as they successively place 
 themselves on the direction. The major follows the move* 
 ment abreast with the last guide. 
 
 Movement No. 12, from Open Column. (Fig. 17.) 
 
 The column by company being at a halt, to close on the 
 
 rear company. 
 
 ON EIGHTH COMPANY, "] At the word 
 
 COLUMN CLOSE IN MASS. face, all the 
 
 BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. \ companies, ex- 
 
 COLUMN FORWARD, cept the desig- 
 
 GUIDE RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. J nated one, face 
 
 about, their guides remaining in the front-rank, now rear. 
 
 At the words guide-right, all the captains place themselves 
 
 two paces outside of their companies, on the directing flank. 
 
 83 
 
84 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 At the word march, the designated company stands fast 
 and its captain aligns it by the left. The other companies 
 step off at the word march, and as each arrives at the dis- 
 tance of five paces from the one before it, its captain halts 
 it, and faces it to the front ; at the instant of halting, its left 
 guide places himself on the direction of the guides already 
 established, and the captain aligns his company by the left, 
 the file-closers closing one pace upon the rear-rank. 
 
 GUIDES, ABOUT-FACE.— The guides who are faced 
 to the rear, face to the front. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, in rear of the guide of the desig- 
 nated company, assures the position of the guides as they 
 come up ; the major is abreast of the rearmost company. 
 
 A column by division is closed in mass by the same com- 
 mands and means. 
 
 A column by company or division, at full distance, may 
 be closed to half distance, by the same means and commands, 
 substituting to half distance, close column, for column 
 close in mass. Each subdivision halts at platoon distance 
 from the subdivision immediately preceding. 
 
 With the left in front, these two last movements are exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles. 
 
 Movement No. Id, from Open Column. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 COUNTERMARCH. > At the word 
 
 BATTALION, RIGHT-FACE. } face, all the 
 
 BY FILE LEFT. QUICK-MARCH. ) companies face 
 
 to the right, and the movement is executed in the manner 
 
 prescribed in the company drill. 
 
 With the left in front, the countermarch is executed by the 
 
 same commands, substituting left for right, and right 
 
 for left, and by inverse means, the companies facing to the 
 
 left and wheeling by file to the right. 
 
 A column at half distance is countermarched in the same 
 
 manner and by the same commands. 
 
 Column in Route. 
 
 This column, like a column in manoeuvre, ought never to 
 have a depth greater than the front it occupied in line, less 
 the front of a subdivision. It is put in march, or, being in 
 march, takes the route step, and passes from the route to the 
 
 84 
 
TART I. OP THE BATTALION. 85 
 
 cadenced step, by the command prescribed in the company 
 drill. It is habitually formed by compan3 r , but it may be 
 broken into platoons or sections, according to the width of 
 the defile ; this may be done by all the companies at once, 
 or by each in succession, before entering the defile. In like 
 manner, files may be broken off, or subdivisions may be sue 
 cessively marched by a flank in double or single file. 
 
 Each company, as soon as the breadth of the way per- 
 mits, is formed into column by section, by platoon, or by 
 company, by commands of the captains. 
 
 In marching by a flank in double or single file, where the 
 pass is so narrow as to oblige it to defile with a front of two 
 men, or man by man, the captain and leading guide precede 
 the leading file of such company, and the file-closers pass 
 between the files corresponding with their usual positions ; 
 the whole follow closely and without loss of time. In pass- 
 ing from double to single file, the rear-rank man of each 
 file covers his front-rank man. 
 
 If the head of the column encounter an obstacle which 
 may oblige it to relax its march, all the following subdivi- 
 sions preserve the habitual step, and close up in mass, if 
 necessary, on the subdivision nearest to the obstacle, in order 
 not to increase the usual depth of the column. Distances 
 are afterwards recovered as each subdivision has successive- 
 ly passed the obstacle. If this cannot be done without run- 
 ning, the leading subdivision is halted beyond the obstacle, 
 at a distance sufficient to contain the whole column closed 
 in mass, until the rear subdivision has closed ; the column 
 is then put in march, and the subdivisions take their proper 
 distances. 
 
 The commanding officer, at the head of the column, regu- 
 lates the step of the leading subdivision, and indicates to its 
 chief, the time for executing the various movements which 
 the nature of the route may render necessary. 
 
 MOVEMENTS FROM CLOSE COLUMN. 
 
 Movement No. l,from Close Column. 
 
 To form open column by the head. 
 
 BY THE HEAD OF COLUMN, > At this command 
 
 TAKE WHEELING DISTANCE. \ the captain of the 
 
 leading company puts it in march. The instant the second 
 
OO PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 company has its wheeling distance from the first, its captain 
 puts it in march, and so with the other companies in succes- 
 sion. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, at the head of the column, directs 
 the march of the leading guide ; the major is abreast with 
 the rearmost guide. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Close Column. 
 
 To form open column on the rear. 
 Two markers are established on the direction to be given 
 to the line, the first opposite to the rearmost company, the 
 second towards the head of the column, at company distance 
 from the first, both facing to the rear; the right general 
 guide places himself on the prolongation of these markers, 
 a little beyond the point at which the head of the column 
 will extend. 
 
 ON EIGHTH COMPANY, ^ At the words guide 
 
 TAKE WHEELING DISTANCE. I -left, the captains 
 COLUMN, FORWARD. f place themselves 
 
 GUIDE-LEFT. QUICK-MARCH. J two paces outside 
 of the directing flank. At the word march, the designated 
 company stands fast ; its captain aligns it by the left on the 
 first marker, and gives the word frcnt, when the marker, 
 replaced by the left guide, retires, and the captain takes his 
 place in column. All the other companies step off at the 
 word march, the guide of the leading one directing himself 
 a little within the right general guide ; when the company 
 next the rearmost one arrives opposite the second marker, 
 its captain halts and aligns it on that marker, in the manner 
 prescribed for the rearmost company. As each of the other 
 companies arrives at wheeling distance from the one in its 
 rear, its captain halts and aligns it on the left guide, who, at 
 the instant of halting, places himself on the direction facing 
 to the rear. 
 
 The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
 words, guides, about-face, when they face to the front. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel successively assures the guides on 
 the direction, placing himself in their rear ; the major, at the 
 head of the column, directs the march of the leading guide 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Close Column. 
 
 To form open column on the head. (Fig. 18.) 
 
 Two markers are placed in the manner just prescribed, 
 
 86 
 
FART I. OF THE BATTALION. 87 
 
 one abreast with the leading company, the other at company 
 distance in rear of the first, both faced to the rear ; the left 
 general guide places himself on the prolongation of the 
 markers, a little beyond the point at which the rear of the 
 column will extend. 
 ON FIRST COMPANY, TAKE WHEEL- -| All the 
 ING DISTANCE. BATTALION, ABOUT- I compa- 
 FACE. COLUMN, FORWARD, GUIDE- f nies, ex- 
 RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. J cept the 
 
 designated one, face about, the guides remaining in the front- 
 rank, now rear. At the words guide-eight, the captains 
 throw themselves outside of their guides. At the word 
 march, the designated company is aligned by the left, as in 
 the last number ; the other companies are put in march, and 
 as each arrives at wheeling distance from the one in its rear, 
 it is halted, faced about, and aligned by the left. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel and major, conform themselves to 
 what is prescribed in the last number. With the left in 
 front, these movements are executed according to the same 
 principles. To take half distance, the word half is substi- 
 tuted for wheeling, in the command. A column at half 
 distance takes wheeling distance in the same manner. Dis- 
 tances are taken according to the same principles, in a co- 
 lumn by division. 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Close Column. 
 To change direction in marching. (Fig. 19.) 
 
 The change is made to either flank, on the principles of 
 wheeling in marching. A marker is placed at the point of 
 change, and the battalion takes the guide on the flank oppo- 
 site to the intended change ; as soon as the direct march is 
 resumed, and the last subdivision is in direction, the battal- 
 ion takes the guide on its proper flank, the commanding offi- 
 cer giving the words, guide-left (or right.) 
 
 BATTALION, RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH.— The lead- 
 ing division wheels to the right, the pivot-flank taking steps 
 of fourteen inches, and the marching flank conforming to 
 the movement of the pivot, by describing the arc of a large 
 circle. The other divisions at the same time, conform to the 
 movement of the first ; the left guide of each advancing 
 slightly the left shoulder, and lengthening a little the step 
 obliques to the left, and gains so much ground to the front 
 
 87 
 
88 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 that there may constantly be an interval of three paces be- 
 tween his division and that which precedes it ; as soon as he 
 covers the preceding guide, he ceases to oblique, and marches 
 exactly in his trace. Each division conforms itself to the 
 movement of its guide. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel regulates the march of the leading 
 guide, and the major, in rear, regulates the march of the fol- 
 lowing guides. 
 
 FORWARD-MARCH.— The leading division resumes 
 the direct march ; the others conform to its movement. 
 
 Movement No. 5, from Close Column. ] 
 
 To change direction from a halt. (Fig. 20.) 
 
 This is executed by the flank of subdivisions. Two mark- 
 ers are placed on the new direction, at points where the right 
 and left flanks of the leading subdivisions are to rest. 
 CHANGE DIRECTION BY THE ) At the word 
 RIGHT FLANK. BATTALION, } face, the column 
 RIGHT-FACE. QUICK-MARCH. ) faces to the right 
 and each chief of the subdivision places himself by the side 
 of his leading guide. At the word march, all the subdivi- 
 sions step off together ; the leading guide of the first, directs 
 himself from the first step, parallelly to the markers ; its 
 chief stands fast, lets his subdivision file past him, and as 
 soon as the last file has passed, halts it, faces it to the front, 
 and aligns it by the left on the two markers. Each of the 
 following subdivisions, enters the column parallelly to, and 
 three paces from, the subdivision which precedes it ; the 
 chief, on arriving at the point where the left of his subdivi- 
 sion is to rest, halts, lets it file past him, and when the last 
 file has passed, halts it, faces it to the front, (the left guide 
 placing himself on the direction,) and aligns it by the left. 
 
 In changing direction by the left flank, the same means 
 are observed, substituting in the commands the word left 
 for right. Each chief conducts his subdivision until the 
 leading file arrives at the point where it is to rest, when the 
 subdivision is halted and aligned as already prescribed. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel in front, assures the guides as they 
 successively arrive on the direction ; the major follows 
 abreast with the last subdivision. 
 
 88 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 89 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Close Column. 
 Countermarch. (Fig. 21.) 
 
 COUNTERMARCH. BATTALION, > At the word 
 
 RIGHT AND LEFT-FACE. \ face, the odd 
 
 divisions, counting from the head of the column, face to the 
 right, the even divisions, to the left ; the right and left guides 
 of all divisions face about : each chief goes to the head of 
 his division, breaks two files to the rear, and places himself 
 by the side of his leading front-rank man. 
 
 BY FILE LEFT AND > At the word march, each 
 
 RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. $ division conducted by 
 its chief, steps off, the guides standing fast ; each odd divi- 
 sion wheels by file to the left around its right guide ; each 
 even division wheels by file to the right around its left guide, 
 each division so directing its march as to arrive behind its 
 opposite guide, and when its head is up with this guide, the 
 chief halts the division, faces it to the front, and aligns it by 
 the right, the chiefs of the even divisions shifting to the right 
 for that purpose. As each division is aligned, its chief gives 
 the word front, and the guides shift to their proper flanks. 
 
 A column left in front, is countermarched by the same 
 commands and means, except that the divisions are aligned 
 by the left. 
 
 The movement ended, the lieutenant-colonel places him- 
 self abreast with the leading; and the major abreast with 
 the rearmost division. 
 
 A close column by company is countermarched by the 
 same means and commands. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Close Column. 
 
 To form divisions from close column of companies. (Fig. 22.) 
 
 FORM DIVISIONS. LEFT > The left companies 
 COMPANIES, LEFT-FACE. $ face to the left, and their 
 captains place themselves by the side of their left guides. The 
 right companies stand fast, the right and left guides of each 
 place themselves before the right and left files of their re- 
 spective companies, the guides facing so as to rest the right 
 arm against the breast of the front-rank man of the file. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— The left companies only are put in 
 march, their captains standing fast ; each captain as the left 
 H2 89 
 
90 PART t. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 file of his company has cleared the right company, gives the 
 words : (such) company halt, front-face, and places himself 
 on the left of the right company of his division ; the left 
 guide at the same time places himself before the left file of 
 his company, faces to the right and covers the guides of the 
 right company ; the captain then gives the words, right- 
 dress, and aligns his company on the left guide, which being 
 done, he adds front, and remains in his position. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS.— The captains and guides take their 
 places in column, the left guide of each right company pass- 
 ing through the interval in the centre of the division. 
 
 A column at full or half distance, forms division in the 
 same manner ; but the captains of the left companies, after 
 commanding/hmf-^/ace, give the words: company, forward, 
 guide-right-march, followed by halt, right-dress. 
 
 If the left be in front, these movements are executed by 
 inverse means ; the right companies conform themselves to 
 what is prescribed above for the left companies, and the 
 guides in front of the left companies face to the left. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Close Column. 
 
 To deploy on the first division. (Fig. 23.) 
 
 The column being at a halt, the lieutenant-colonel estab- 
 lishes three markers, three paces in front of the leading divi- 
 sion, one opposite the right and left files of that division, and 
 one opposite the left file of the right company : these mark- 
 ers face to the right; the left general guide covers these 
 markers, at a point a little beyond where the left of the bat- 
 talion is to rest. 
 
 ON FIRST DIVISION ) At the word face, 
 
 DEPLOY COLUMN. V the three last divisions 
 
 BATTALION, LEFT-FACE. ) face to the left, and the 
 chief of each places himself by the side of its left guide. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH. — At the word march, the chief of the 
 first division goes to its right and gives the words right- 
 dress ; the division is aligned on the markers, each captain 
 aligning the company on his left and giving the word front. 
 The other divisions march parallelly to the line ; the chief 
 of the second stands fast, sees his division file past him, and 
 the instant its right guide is abreast with him, halts his divi- 
 sion and faces it to the front, giving the words second divi- 
 sion halt, front-face : the left guides of both companies then 
 
 90 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 91 
 
 step out and cover the markers, each opposite to the left file 
 of his company, and the chief placing himself on the left of 
 the first division, gives the words right-dress, when the divi- 
 sion is aligned in the manner indicated for the first. The 
 instant the second division is halted, the chief of the third 
 halts in his own person, sees his division- file past him, and 
 when its right guide is abreast with him, halts his division 
 and faces it to the front in the manner indicated for the second, 
 he then gives the words forward, guide-right, march, fol- 
 lowed by halt when his division is within three paces of the 
 line: the division is then aligned in the manner indicated for 
 the second. The chief of the fourth division conforms him- 
 self to what is prescribed for the third. 
 
 The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
 words guides-posts, when the captains and guides take 
 their places in line and the markers retire. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is prescrib- 
 ed No. 13, in movements from open column. The major 
 follows abreast with the last division. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Close Column. 
 To deploy on the fourth division. (Fig. 24.) 
 
 The markers are established as indicated in the last num- 
 ber, facing to the left, the central marker opposite the right 
 file of the left company, and the right general guide covers 
 them at a point a little beyond where the right of the batta- 
 lion is to rest. 
 
 ON FOURTH DIVISION -) At the word face, the 
 DEPLOY COLUMN. BAT- ' first three divisions face 
 TALION, RIGHT-FACE. f to the right and the chief 
 QUICK-MARCH. J of each places himsel f by 
 
 the side of his right guide. At the word march, these divi- 
 sions step off, the guide of the first directing himself, three 
 paces within the line marked by the general guide. The 
 chief of the third stands fast, sees his division file past him, 
 halts it when its left guide is abreast with him, and faces it to 
 the front. The chief of the fourth, the moment his division 
 is unmasked, causes it to advance, giving the words fourth 
 division, forward, guide—left, march ; when this division is 
 three paces from the marker, its chief halts it and gives the 
 words left-dress; each captain aligns the company on his 
 right and gives the word front. The instant the third divi- 
 
93 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 sion is unmasked, its chief causes it to approach the line, and 
 halts it in the manner prescribed for the fourth : the moment 
 it halts, its right guide, and the covering sergeant of its left 
 company, place themselves on the line opposite the right files 
 of their respective companies, and cover the markers ; the 
 division is then aligned in the manner prescribed for the 
 fourth. The second and first divisions are in succession 
 halted and aligned by the left in the same manner as the 
 third, their chiefs giving the words left— dress the moment 
 their divisions face to the front and the guides are on the 
 line. 
 
 The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
 words guides-posts, when the captains and guides take 
 their places in line and the markers retire. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
 scribed in the last number. The major follows abreast with 
 the last division. 
 
 If the left be in front these deployments are made accord- 
 ing to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Close Column. 
 
 To deploy on an intermediate division. 
 
 The line is first traced by the means already indicated, 
 both the general guides throwing themselves out in the man- 
 ner above prescribed. 
 
 ON— DIVISION, DEPLOY COLUMN. ) Whether the 
 
 BATTALION, OUTWARD-FACE. \ right or left be 
 . QUICK-MARCH. Jin front, the 
 
 divisions, which, in line, belong to the right of the directing 
 division, face to the right, those which belong to the left of 
 that division, face to the left; t.he divisions in front of the 
 directing division, deploy by the means indicated in No. 9 , 
 those in its rear, deploy as prescribed No. 8. The directing 
 division, the moment it is unmasked, approaches the line, 
 taking the guide left or right, according as the right or left 
 is in front. The chief of this division aligns it by the di- 
 recting flank, and then steps into the rear-rank, to give place 
 to the chief of the next division for aligning his division. At 
 the words guides-posts, all the captains take the right of 
 their companies. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel assures the positions of the guides 
 
 92 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 93 
 
 on the right of the directing division ; the major, those on 
 the left. 
 
 A column at half distance, may ploy into line by one of 
 the means here prescribed, the column first closing in mass. 
 
 A column by company may be ployed in the same man- 
 ner as a column by division. 
 
 MOVEMENTS FROM COLUMN DOUBLED ON THE 
 CENTRE. 
 
 Movement No. 1. 
 To form line to the front. (Fig. 25.) 
 The line is first traced in the manner prescribed in the 
 last number. 
 
 DEPLOY COLUMN. BAT- ) The column is de- 
 TALION, OUTWARD-FACE. V ployed t>n the two com- 
 QUICK-MARCH. ) panies at its head, ac- 
 
 cording to the principles prescribed for deployment of close 
 columns. The captains of these companies, each, at the 
 word march, places himself on the right of his own com- 
 pany and aligns it by the right ; the captain of the fourth 
 stepping into the rear-rank the moment he aligns his com- 
 pany, to give place to the captain of the third to align his 
 company by the left. 
 
 The deployment ended, the command is given guides- 
 posts. 
 
 Movement No. 2. 
 To form line to the right (Fig. 26.) 
 RIGHT INTO LINE WHEEL, LEFT COM- ) At the 
 PANIES ON RIGHT INTO LINE. BATTA- } words 
 LION, GUIDE-RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. ) guide- 
 right, the left guide of the fourth company, places himself 
 on the line at the point where the left of his company will 
 rest, and covers the right guides. At the word march, the 
 right companies wheel to the right into line, and the left 
 companies move forward and form on right into line, in the 
 manner prescribed in No. 6, from open column. 
 
 The column may form line to the left according to the 
 same principles. 
 
 Dispositions against Cavalry. 
 The battalion is first formed into column by division, at 
 
 93 
 
94 PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 half (or company) distance ; or into column, doubled on the 
 centre, at half distance. (Fig. 27.) 
 
 The commands for forming into column with a view to 
 the square, are always preceded by the caution, to form 
 
 SQUARE. 
 
 The moment the column is formed, the file-closers of the 
 fourth division, passing by the outer flanks of their compa- 
 nies, throw themselves two paces before the front-rank op- 
 posite to their respective places in line, and face towards the 
 head of the column. The music, formed in one rank, place 
 themselves at platoon distance, behind the inner platoons ot 
 the second division, and the pioneers behind the colour-guard. 
 The lieutenant-colonel and major are abreast with the lead- 
 ing division, the former on the left, and the latter on the right 
 flank of the column. 
 
 The column may now be put in march, or it may form 
 square, as follows : (Fig. 28.) 
 
 FORM SQUARE The lieutenant-colonel, facing to the 
 
 left guides, and the major, facing to the right guides, align 
 them from the front, on the respective guides of the fourth 
 division, who stand fast, holding up their pieces inverted, 
 perpendicularly ; the right guides, in placing themselves on 
 the direction, take their exact distances. 
 
 RIGHT AND LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL The 
 
 chief of the first division cautions it to stand fast ; all the 
 captains of the second and third divisions throw themselves 
 before the centres of their respective companies, and caution 
 them that they are to wheel, the right companies to the right, 
 and the left companies to the left, into line. The colour- 
 bearer steps back into the line of file-closers, opposite to his 
 place in line, and is replaced by the corporal of his file. 
 The chief of the fourth division gives the words, fourth di- 
 vision, forward, guide left, and places himself two paces 
 outside of its left flank. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— The first division stands fast, but its 
 right file faces to the right, and its left file to the left. The 
 companies of the second and third divisions wheel Jo the 
 right and left into line, and the music advances a space equal 
 to the front of a company. The fourth division closes up 
 to form the square, and when closed, its chief halts it, faces 
 it about, and aligns it by the rear-rank ; the junior captain 
 passes into the rear-rank, now front, and is covered by the 
 
 94 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 9S 
 
 covering sergeant of the left company, in the front-rank, now 
 rear ; the file-closers close up a pace on the front-rank, and 
 the outer file of each flank of the division face outwards. 
 
 GUIDES-POSTS.— The chiefs of the first and fourth 
 divisions, as well as the guides, enter the square. The cap- 
 tains whose companies have formed to the right into line, 
 remain on the left of their companies, covered by their left 
 guides in the rear-rank ; the covering sergeant of each of 
 these companies places himself as a file-closer behind the 
 right file of his company. The field and staff enter the 
 square, the lieutenant-colonel placing himself behind the left, 
 and the major behind the right of the first division. 
 
 If the battalion present ten instead of eight companies, the 
 fourth division makes the same movements prescribed above 
 for the second and third divisions, and the fifth, the move- 
 ments prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 The fronts of the square are designated as follows : the 
 first division is always the first front ; the last division the 
 fourth front ; the right companies of the other divisions, the 
 second front ; and the left companies of the same divisions 
 the third front. These designations are always maintained, 
 whether the column shall have been with the left or right in 
 front. Each front is commanded by the lieutenant-colonel, 
 the major, or its senior captain. The commander of each 
 front places himself four paces in its rear, and if a captain, 
 he is replaced momentarily in command of his company, by 
 the next in rank therein. 
 
 In a simple column, left in front, the square is formed ac- 
 cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 If the square is to advance, the movement is performed as 
 follows : (Figs. 29, 30.) 
 
 FORM COLUMN.— The commander of the first front 
 adds, first division, forward, guide left ; the commander of 
 the fourth front cautions it to stand fast ; the commander of 
 the second front causes it to face to the left, and then gives 
 the words, by company, by file left ; the commander of the 
 third front causes it to face to the right, and then gives the 
 words, by company, by file right. At the moment the se- 
 cond and third fronts face to the left and right, each captain 
 in them causes the two headmost files of his company to 
 break to the rear. 
 
 QUICK-MARCH.— The first front marches forward ; its 
 
 95 
 
96 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 chief halts it when it shall have advanced a space equal to 
 half its front, and aligns it by the left. The corresponding 
 companies of the second and third fronts wheel by file to 
 the left and right, and march to meet each other behind the 
 centre of the first division, and the moment they unite, the 
 chief of each division halts it, faces it to the front, and 
 aligns it by the left. The commander of the fourth front 
 causes it to face about ; its file-closers remaining before the 
 front-rank. 
 
 The column may now be put in march. 
 
 If the square is to be reformed, the column is first halted, 
 and the square is reformed in the manner already prescribed. 
 
 If the square is to march in retreat, the column is formed 
 as above, and as soon as formed the command is given : 
 (Fig. 31.) 
 
 TO MARCH IN RETREAT. > At the words face 
 
 FACE BY THE REAR-RANK. ] by the rear-rank, 
 the file-closers of the interior divisions throw themselves 
 passing by the outer flanks of their respective companies 
 behind the front-rank opposite to their places, in line ; thi- 
 file-closers of the other divisions stand fast. 
 
 BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE.— The battalion face, 
 about ; each chief of division throws himself before its rear 
 rank, become front, passing through the interval between 
 its two companies ; the guides step into the rear-rank, now 
 front. 
 
 The column may now be put in march ; or it may form 
 square, as if it were faced by the front-rank, its fronts pre- 
 serving the same designations as when faced by the front- 
 rank. (Fig. 32.) 
 
 The battalion being in square by the rear-rank, may march 
 in retreat, or in advance, by reforming column according to 
 the principles already prescribed, the fourth, instead of "the 
 first front marching forward. If the column, thus reformed, 
 is to continue the march in retreat, it remains faced by the 
 rear-rank ; but if it is to advance, it faces to the front by the 
 commands, to march in advance, face by the front- 
 rank. BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. 
 
 To reduce the square. 
 REDUCE SQUARE. > This is executed in the manner 
 QUICK-MARCH. $ prescribed for forming column 
 from square; but the file-closers of the fourth front throw 
 
 or. 
 
PAKT I. OF THE EATTALION. 07 
 
 themselves behind the rear-rank the moment it faces about, 
 and the field and staff, the colour-bearer, pioneers, and mu- 
 sic, return to their places in column. 
 
 A column by company may also form square in the man 
 ner prescribed for a column by division. The leading and 
 rearmost companies conform themselves to what is prescribed 
 for divisions in those positions. The other companies form 
 by platoons to the right and left into line ; each chief of pla- 
 toon, after halting it, places himself on the line, as if the 
 platoon were a company, and is covered by the guide in the 
 rear-rank. 
 
 A battalion in column at full distance, having to form 
 square, always closes on the leading subdivision ; and a 
 column closed in mass, always for the same purpose, takes 
 distances by the head. 
 
 When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the square, it 
 should always be in the rear of the right or left division, in 
 order that it may be able to commence firing pending the 
 execution of the movement. The double column affords this 
 advantage, and being more promptly formed than any other, 
 is to be preferred. 
 
 In firing in square, the colour-guard will fire like the men 
 of the company of which it forms a part. 
 
 Rules for manoeuvring by the rear-rank. 
 The battalion being by the front-rank, to cause it to ma- 
 noeuvre by the rear-rank, the command is given, face by 
 
 THE REAR-HANK BATTALION. ABOUT-FACE. 
 
 If the battalion be deployed, this movement is executed as 
 prescribed for the fire by the rear-rank. 
 
 If the battalion be in column by company, or by platoon, 
 right, or left in front, the chiefs of subdivision, in taking 
 their new places in column, each passes by the left flank of 
 his subdivision, and the file-closers by the right flank ; the 
 guides place themselves in the rear-rank. 
 
 If the column be formed by division, the chiefs of division, 
 each passes by the interval in the centre of his division, and 
 the file-elosers by the outer flanks of their respective compa- 
 nies ; the junior captain in each division steps into the rear- 
 rank, and is covered in the front-rank by the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company. 
 
 I 97 
 
93 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel is abreast with the leading subd 
 vision, and the major abreast with the rearmost one. 
 
 The battalion being faced by the rear-rank, the companies, 
 divisions, and wings, preserve their prior denominations re- 
 spectively. 
 
 The manoeuvres by the rear- rank are executed by the 
 same commands and on the same principles as if the battalion 
 faced by the front-rank ; but in such manner that when the 
 battalion shall be brought to its proper front, all the subdivi- 
 sions may find themselves in their regular order from right 
 to left. 
 
 According to this principle, when a column, formed by 
 the rear-rank, is deployed, the subdivisions which, in line 
 by the front-rank, ought to find themselves on the right of 
 the subdivision on which the deployment is made, face to tbe 
 left; and those which ought to be placed on its left, face to 
 the right. 
 
 When a battalion in line, faced by the rear-rank, is to be 
 ployed into column, the words left, or eight in front, are 
 announced in the commands, according as it may be intend- 
 ed, that the first or last subdivision shall be at the head of 
 the column, because the first subdivision is on the left, and 
 the last on the right of the battalion faced by the rear-rank. 
 The column by the rear-rank takes the guide to the right, if 
 the first division be in front, and to the left in the reverse 
 case. 
 
 A column, faced by the rear-rank, is brought to its proper 
 front by the commands, face by the front-rank. Bat- 
 talion, about-face, which are executed in the manner 
 prescribed for facing by the rear-rank. If the column be 
 formed by company or by platoon, the chiefs of subdivision, 
 m order to take their new places in column, pass by the left 
 of subdivisions, now right, and the file-closers by the right, 
 now left. 
 
OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 A Colonel. 
 
 a Lieut. Colonel. 
 
 a Major. 
 
 6 Qr. Master. 
 
 c Adjutant. 
 
 d Sergt. Major. 
 
 x Field Music. 
 - / Band. 
 j£ Colour and guard 
 
 p^ Pioneers. 
 £> Right genl. guide. 
 && Left genl. guide. 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 rYYYYYYY\ 
 
 ( 
 
 a 
 
 m 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 i i i ■ 
 
 i i I ! ! ! 
 
 m 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 TTT 
 // 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 100 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 Fra. 8. 
 ■fr 
 
 12 
 
 101 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Fig. 10. 
 
 102 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Fig. 14 
 
 10.3 
 
PA.RT I. OP THE BATTAIION. 
 
 i / / / / / / • 
 
 / / / / / / / 
 
 / / / Z / Z / 
 
 104 
 
Fio. 19. 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
 Fig. 24. 
 
 u a -. 
 
 Fig. 27 
 
 Fig. 28. 
 
 r^Crn 
 
 i^rdb 
 
 \\/A : 
 
 i„. ; -..v.. _j 
 
 — T y~ 
 
 
 FIG. 30. 
 
 
 OOP 
 
 
 
 — ■ 
 
 "«" 
 
 
 BtcOua unci 
 
 
 o" »a ■«• 
 
 106 
 
PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 
 Fig. 31. Fro. 32. 
 
 -* " r- 
 
 1 A ; 
 
 107 
 
LIGHT INFANTRY AND RIFLE. 
 
 A SUPPLEMENT TO PART I. 
 
 OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Deployments. 
 
 A company may be deployed as skirmishers, either for- 
 ward, or by the flank. It is deployed forward, when it is 
 behind the line on which it is to be established ; and by the 
 flank when already on that line. In both cases it is divided 
 into three platoons : the right and left platoons, denominated 
 respectively, first and second platoons, form the line of 
 skirmishers ; the centre platoon, the reserve. 
 
 A company may be deployed, as skirmishers, on its left, 
 on its right, or on its centre file. 
 
 A line of skirmishers ought, as far as possible, to be align- 
 ed ; but to obtain this regularity, advantages which the ground 
 may present for covering the men, ought not to be neglected. 
 
 The intervals between files of skirmishers depend on the 
 extent of ground to be covered ; but they should not exceed 
 ten, or, at most, fifteen paces. 
 
 The front to be occupied to cover a battalion, comprehends 
 the front of the battalion and half of each interval on the 
 right and left of the battalion. 
 
 1st. To deploy fonoard. (Fig. 1.) 
 
 The company being at a halt, to deploy it forward on the 
 left file, the captain, previously to giving the order, indicates 
 to the left guide the point towards which he is to direct him- 
 self, and cautions the centre platoon that is to form the re- 
 serve. 
 
 Deploy as skirmishers. — The first and second lieutenants 
 
 throw themselves respectively on the right and left flanks of 
 
 l the company ; the third sergeant places himself two paces 
 
 \jn front of the centre of the company, to move forward on 
 
 ^t line with the skirmishers between the platoons ; the third 
 
 K 109 
 
 V 
 
110 XIGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 lieutenant takes command of the centre platoon, two paces 
 behind the centre of the file-closers, and cautions it to stand 
 fast. 
 
 On the left file, at ten paces, take intervals. Quick (or 
 double quick) march. — At the word march, the first and se- 
 cond platoons put themselves in movement ; the left guide 
 conducts the left file towards the indicated point ; the other 
 files, throwing forward the left shoulder, advance in double 
 quick time, or in a run, (according as the order is, quick or 
 double quick?) diagonally to the front and to the right, in 
 order to gain to the right the space of ten paces, which ought 
 to separate each file from that next on its left ; when the se- 
 cond file, counting from the left, arrives abreast with the 
 first, it conforms itself to the direction of the latter, takes 
 the quick step, holds itself steadily at ten paces from the 
 first, and on the' same alignment ; the third file, and all the 
 others towards the right, as they successively arrive on the 
 alignment, conform themselves to what is prescribed for the 
 second ; the right guide arrives with the last file ; the first 
 and second lieutenants, at the commencement, throw them- 
 selves behind the centres of the right and left platoons re- 
 spectively, and direct their movements. 
 
 When the left guide arrives at the point where the left of 
 the line is to rest, the captain halts the skirmishers ; each 
 rear-rank man immediately places himself two paces on 
 the left of his file-leader ; the files which are not yet in line 
 promptly come into it, taking the prescribed intervals, and 
 aligning themselves by the left. 
 
 The line being formed, the first and second sergeants 
 throw themselves ten paces behind the first two files of the 
 right and left respectively, and the third sergeant at a like 
 distance behind the centre of the line. 
 
 The first and second lieutenants promptly rectify any 
 irregularity committed in the taking of intervals ; they then 
 throw themselves twenty or thirty paces behind the centres 
 of their respective platoons. Each of these officers has with 
 him two men taken from his platoon before the commence- 
 ment of the movement. 
 
 The fourth and fifth sergeants, and the second bugler or 
 drummer, remain with the reserve ; the fourth sergeant oa 
 its left flank, the fifth as file-closer. 
 
 At the beginning of the deployment, the third lieutenant 
 
 110 
 
OP THE COMPANY. Ill 
 
 marches the reserve, by the shortest line, to about a hundred 
 and forty paces behind the centre of the line of skirmishers, 
 halts, faces it to the front, and maintains it steadily at that 
 distance ; the reserve conforms itself to all the movements 
 of the line. 
 
 The captain gives a general superintendence to the whole 
 deployment, and then throws himself about seventy paces in 
 rear of the line, taking with him the first bugler or drummer, 
 and two or three men from the reserve. 
 
 The deployment may be made on the right or centre of 
 the company according to the same principles and by the 
 same commands, substituting right-file or centre-file, for 
 left-file : if on the centre file, the right file of the second 
 platoon closes upon the third sergeant in marching, and all 
 the other files to the right and left, take their intervals from 
 the centre. 
 
 On whatever file, the right, left, or centre, the deploy- 
 ment may be made, the rear-rank men place themselves to 
 the left of their respective file-leaders at the moment of form- 
 ing the line. 
 
 2 c?. To deploy by the flank. 
 
 To deploy the company from a halt, on the left file, the 
 captain, previously to giving the caution, indicates to the 
 right guide the point on which to direct himself. 
 
 Deploy as Skirmishers. — The first and second lieuten- 
 ants and the third sergeant conform themselves to what 
 is prescribed under this command in the preceding case ; 
 the third lieutenant in rear of the centre platoon, cautions it 
 to face about. 
 
 By the right fiarik, at ten paces, } The centre platoon 
 take intervals. $ faces about, and its 
 
 chief marches it to the point which it is to occupy as the re- 
 serve, halts and faces it to the skirmishers ; the other pla- 
 toons face to the right, the left file of the second standing 
 fast ; the first and second lieutenants, each places himself by 
 the left file of his platoon ; the right guide on the left of the 
 right file to conduct it. 
 
 Quick (or Double-Quick)-March. — At the word march, 
 given the instant the centre platoon has cleared the line, 
 the first platoon stands fast until joined by the second, 
 when the lieutenant of the former gives the words, (such) 
 
 111 
 
112 LIGHT INFANTE Y. 
 
 platoon, forward, quick (or double-quick) march ; m the 
 mean time the second platoon commences the movement; 
 its left file stands fast ; the next file halts at the distance of 
 ten paces from the first, the third at the same distance from 
 the second, and so on to the right file of the first platoon. 
 As each file halts in succession it faces to the enemy, and 
 each rear-rank man places himself two paces on the left of 
 his file-leader. 
 
 The captain and first and second lieutenants conform 
 themselves to what is prescribed in the first case. 
 
 The deployment on the right file is executed on the same 
 principles, substituting in the command, left for right. 
 
 (Fig. 2.) To deploy on the centre, the captain, previously 
 to giving the caution, causes the centre platoon to march to- 
 wards its position as the reserve, closes the intervals between 
 the remaining platoons, and indicates to the two guides the 
 direction in which each ought to march. 
 
 Deploy as Skirmishers, by the right and "1 The right 
 left Flanks, on the Centre, take In- > file of the 
 tervals. ) second pla- 
 
 toon stands fast ; the first platoon faces to the right, the se- 
 cond to the left ; the right and left guides place themselves 
 by the side of the leading files of their respective platoons to 
 conduct them. 
 
 Quick (or Double-Quick)-March. — The two platoons 
 march in opposite directions ; the file next on the right, and 
 the file next on the left of the centre file, each halts at ten 
 paces from this file, and all the other files halt each at the 
 same distance from the file next in its rear. 
 
 The officers conform themselves to what is prescribed in 
 the first case. 
 
 Any interior file, other than that on the right of the second 
 platoon, may be designated as the directing file ; in which 
 case the third sergeant places himself on the right of the 
 designated file, and the deployment is executed in the man- 
 ner just prescribed. 
 
 Sd. To extend intervals. 
 
 The line of skirmishers being at a halt, intervals are ex 
 tended to the left as follows : (Fig. 3.) 
 
 112 
 
OF THE COMPANY. 113 
 
 By the left flank, five (or ) paces, \ The num- 
 
 Extend intervals. Quick (or Double- V ber of paces 
 quick)-March. ) designated, 
 
 will be understood as so many paces in addition to the then 
 intervals. The right file stands fast, the others face to the 
 left, and extend in the manner prescribed in the second case. 
 The line being in march to the front, will be extended by 
 the right as follows : 
 
 On the left file five (or ) paces, ex- } The left 
 
 tend intervals. Quick (or Double- > file con- 
 quick)-March. ) tinues to 
 
 march on the point of direction, all the others extend inter- 
 vals in the manner prescribed in the first case. 
 
 Intervals may be extended by the right flank, by the right 
 and left flanks at once, and also on the 4 right file according 
 to the principles just given. 
 
 (Fig. 3.) If, in extending intervals, the object be to make 
 one company occupy a line as skirmishers, which had been 
 occupied by two, the files of the retiring company throw 
 themselves successively to the rear, and form company in 
 close order, in proportion as they are replaced on the line. 
 
 toh. To close intervals. 
 
 The line of skirmishers being at a halt, will close on the 
 left as follows : (Figs. 4 & 5.) 
 
 By the left fiank, five (or ) paces, } The left 
 
 Close intervals. Quick (or Double- > file stands 
 quick)-March. ) fast ; the 
 
 others face to the left, close on that file the number of paces 
 prescribed, and face to the right as each halts. 
 
 The number of paces named in the command, denote the 
 number of paces less than the then intervals. 
 
 The line being in march to the front, will close on the left 
 file as follows : 
 
 On the left file, five (or ) paces, Close } The left 
 
 intervals. Quick (or Double-quick)- > file con- 
 March. * ) tinues to 
 
 march on the point of direction ; the other files, each throws 
 forward the right shoulder, assumes the double-quick step or 
 run, according as the command is quick or double-quick 
 and inclines to the left until its interval is reduced the pre- 
 scribed number of paces. 
 
 K 2 U3 
 
114 LIGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 Intervals are closed by the right flank, and on the right 
 or centre file, according to the principles just given. 
 
 (Figs. 4 & 5.) When intervals are reduced in order to 
 receive a reinforcement of skirmishers, that is, for example, 
 to cover the same extent of ground with two companies 
 which had been covered by one, the new company is so de- 
 ployed as to finish the movement at about twenty paces be- 
 hind the line which it will have to occupy, and its files suc- 
 cessively throw themselves on that line in proportion as they 
 are unmasked by the files of the old company. The re- 
 serves of the two companies unite behind the centre of the 
 line. 
 
 5th. To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 (Figs. 6 & 7.) When a company so deployed, is to be 
 relieved, the captain is advised of the intention, and commu- 
 nicates it to the first and second lieutenants. 
 
 The new company executes its deployment forward so 
 as to finish the movement at about twenty paces in rear of 
 the line. Arrived at this distance, the files of the new com- 
 pany by command of their captain, throw themselves a few 
 paces beyond the old line and halt ; the new line being es- 
 tablished, the old company assembles on its reserve. 
 
 If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching in retreat, 
 the company thrown out to relieve them, deploys by the 
 flank, as prescribed in the second case. The old skirmishers 
 continue to retire with order, and after having passed the 
 new line, they rally on their reserve. 
 
 To march in advance. 
 
 When a company, deployed as skirmishers, marches in 
 line, the guide is habitually in the centre ; if it be intended 
 that the directing guide shall be on the flank, the words guide- 
 left (or right) will precede the word march. 
 
 Whether the skirmishers march in line, or by a flank, the 
 first and second lieutenants, and in case of need, the sergeants 
 repeat, with the greatest rapidity, all the commands for the 
 movement. 
 
 Skir?nishers forward. — The three sergeants throw them- 
 selves on the line, the first oir the right, the second on the 
 left, and the third in the centre : the chief of the reserve gives 
 the words, platoon forward, guide left. 
 
 114 
 
OF THE COMPANY. 115 
 
 Quick (or double-quick) march. — At the word march, 
 the line and the reserve step ofF; the guide charged with the 
 direction, marches on the point indicated to him : the skir- 
 mishers hold themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve 
 their intervals towards him. The first and second lieuten- 
 ants, each directs the movements of his platoon, holding him- 
 self behind its centre. 
 
 To halt the skirmishers advancing. 
 Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the line and the 
 reserve halt: the first and second lieutenants, if necessary, 
 promptly rectify the alignment and intervals, and then take 
 their places, as. also the three sergeants. 
 
 To march in retreat. 
 
 Skirmishe?'s in retreat. — The reserve and skirmishers 
 face about ; the skirmishers individually, the reserve by com- 
 mand of its chief, and the three sergeants throw themselves 
 on the line as prescribed in the advance in line. 
 
 Quick (or double-quick) March. — At the word march, 
 the skirmishers and the reserve step off in conformity with 
 what is prescribed in the advance in line. The chief of the 
 reserve in front of the rear-rank, now front, maintains his 
 platoon opposite the centre of the line at the prescribed dis- 
 tance. 
 
 To halt the skirmishers retreating. 
 
 Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the skirmishers 
 and the reserve halt and face to the front, the skirmishers 
 individually, the reserve by command of its chief. The first 
 and second lieutenants rectify the alignment and intervals, 
 and then resume their places, as also the three sergeants. 
 
 To march by a flank. 
 
 Skirmishers, by the right flank. — The skirmishers face to 
 the right ; the right guide throws himself to the side of the 
 leading man, to conduct him ; the reserve also faces to the 
 right by command of its chief. 
 
 Quick (or double quick) march. — At the word march, the 
 skirmishers and the reserve put themselves in march ; the 
 right-guide directs himself on the point indicated to him ; 
 each skirmisher follows in trace of the one immediately pre- 
 ceding, and preserves his distance. 
 
 115 
 
116 LIGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 The march by the left flank is executed according to the 
 same principles, substituting in the commands left for right. 
 
 To halt the skirmishers marching by a flank. 
 
 Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the skirmishers 
 and the reserve halt and face to the front. 
 
 The Firings. 
 
 The fire is given either at a halt, or in marching, and al- 
 ternately by the two men of the same file, who so arrange 
 it between them, that one or the other always has his piece 
 loaded ; to this end the right hand (front-rank) man fires 
 and loads ; the left hand (rear- rank) man withholds his fire 
 until the first shall have rammed ; the second, in his turn, 
 waits, in like manner, for the first, and so on in continuation. 
 
 To fire at a halt. 
 
 Commence Firing. — This command is executed accord- 
 ing to the rules just prescribed ; the men are not to remain 
 in the same place whilst reloading, unless covered by some 
 chance object. 
 
 To fire marching 
 
 This fire, like that at a halt, is executed by the command, 
 commence firing. 
 
 At this command, if the line be advancing, the front-rank 
 man of every file halts, fires, and reloads, before throwing 
 himself forward ; the rear-rank man of the same file con- 
 tinues to march eight or ten paces beyond the first, halts, 
 fires, and reloads; the front-rank man having reloaded, 
 throws himself forward a like distance beyond his rear-rank 
 man, and fires again, conforming himself to what has just 
 been prescribed, and so on in continuation. 
 
 If the line be marching in retreat, the front-rank man of 
 every file halts, faces about, fires, and then reloads whilst 
 throwing himself to the rear ; the rear-rank man of the same 
 file continues to march, halts at eight or ten paces beyond 
 the front-rank man, faces about, fires, and then observes 
 what is just prescribed for the front-rank man ; the latter 
 man at the same distance in rear of his rear-rank man, halts 
 again, faces about, finishes loading, fires, and then does as 
 he had done before, and thus the alternate fire by the men 
 of the same file is continued. 
 
 116 
 
OF THE COMPANY/. 117 
 
 If the company be in march by the right flank, the front- 
 rank man of every file faces to the enemy, steps one pace 
 forward, halts, fires, and throws himself behind his rear-rank 
 man, who had been next behind him, reloading as he marches ; 
 as soon as this second man, who lias continued to march, 
 shall judge that the first has rammed, he in his turn faces to 
 the enemy, steps one pace forward, halts, fires, and throws 
 himself behind his front-rank man, reloading as he marches, 
 and thus the fire is continued. 
 
 ; If the company be in march by the left flank, the fire is 
 executed in the same manner ; but it is the rear-rank man 
 (the leader) who fires first. 
 
 In executing this fire, the files must avoid mingling with 
 each other ; consequently, the man who has continued to 
 march, must never pass a man of another file, who shall be 
 at a halt, for the purpose of firing. 
 
 Skirmishers should also be taught to load and fire kneel- 
 ing and lying. In commencing the fire, officers are to see 
 that all the files do not firo at once, but in succession. 
 
 Marching in retreat, the commander of the skirmishers 
 takes advantage of any chance object the ground may pre- 
 sent, to arrest the march of the enemy as long as possible. 
 
 The fire is stopped by the sound or beat indicated for that 
 purpose : at this signal, the men cease firing, and those who 
 have not reloaded, load. If the lhe be in march, it con- 
 tinues the movement ; and of the two men of the same file, 
 the one in front waits till the other is abreast with him. 
 
 Rallying and assembling. 
 A company, deployed as skirmishers, rallies to resist ca- 
 valry ; it assembles under other circumstances. The rally 
 is made in a run ; the assembly in quick time. 
 
 To rally on the reserve. (Fig. 8.) 
 Rally on the reserve. — This command being given, the 
 captain throws himself on the reserve, the chief of which 
 begins the formation of the circle by throwing back a little 
 the two flanks of the reserve. The skirmishers running in, 
 form themselves as they successively join the reserve, on its 
 right and left, in two ranks, without regard to height, face 
 outwards and complete the circle. The officers and sergeants 
 
 117 
 
118 MGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 direct the execution of the movement, and then place them- 
 selves within the circle. 
 
 These dispositions being made, the captain profits by any 
 interval of time the cavalry may allow him for putting him- 
 self in safety against its attacks, either by rejoining his bat- 
 talion, or by gaining some advantageous position : to this 
 end he reduces the circle, and reforms the company into co- 
 lumn by platoon, and in two platoons ; he marches in this 
 order, by the front or rear-rank ; and if threatened anew by 
 the cavalry, he halts and again forms circle, by throwing 
 back the flanks of the two platoons ; the second platoon, if 
 not already faced by the rear-rank, is first so faced, and the 
 other platoon by the front-rank. 
 
 The company being formed into circle, is deployed as 
 skirmishers, as follows : 
 
 Reduce circle. — At this command, the officers ai d ser- 
 geants pass out ; the chief of the reserve aligns it on its 
 centre ; the first and second lieutenants reform their platoons 
 on the right and left of the reserve; which being executed, 
 the company is deployed by one of the means already indi- 
 cated. 
 
 If the suddenness of the attack leave no time to rally the 
 skirmishers on the reserve, the rally is made by platoon ; 
 the first and second lieutenants each rallies his platoon on 
 the ground the most advantageous behind the line of skir- 
 mishers. Pending the movement, the captain throws him- 
 self on the reserve, and so disposes it as to protect the rally- 
 ing of the platoons and to resist the cavalry. The platoons 
 being rallied, they rejoin the reserve as promptly as possible. 
 
 To rally on the battalion. 
 
 The company being deployed as skirmishers, rallies on 
 the battalion, as follows : 
 
 Rally on the battalion. — The skirmishers of each platoon 
 and the reserve unmask the front of the battalion, directing 
 themselves, in a run, towards its nearest flank, and then form 
 in its rear. 
 
 The company being formed, it places itself, for the time, 
 whatever be its designation or number, on the left or right 
 of the battalion, according as it may belong to the left or 
 right wing, and if not a flank- company, it will not resume 
 
 118 
 
OF THE BATTALION. 119 
 
 Us proper place in line, except by order of the commanding 
 officer. 
 
 To assemble on the reserve. 
 
 The company being deployed as skirmishers, assembles 
 on the reserve, as follows : 
 
 Assemble on the reserve. — At this command, the reserve 
 is formed in the precise order it stood before the deployment ; 
 the skirmishers assemble upon it, and each resumes his place 
 in his previous rank and file. The company being reformed 
 rejoins the battalion. 
 
 OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 To deploy the battalion as Skirmishers. (Fig. 9.) 
 
 The battalion being in line, it is supposed to consist of but 
 eight companies, and that it is to deploy on the sixth com- 
 pany holding the three right companies in reserve. This 
 example will serve for a battalion of ten, or any other num- 
 ber of companies. Each company, deployed as skirmishers, 
 is supposed to occupy a front of one hundred paces. 
 
 The commanding officer, previously to giving the cau- 
 tionary command, communicates his purpose to the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel, the adjutant, and the major, the last of whom 
 is charged with the command of the battalion reserve. He 
 also indicates to the lieutenant-colonel the direction to be 
 given to the line, as well as the point of rest for the sixth 
 company, and to the major, the position in which to estab- 
 lish the reserve. The lieutenant-colonel throws himself eight 
 or ten paces before the right of the sixth company, and the 
 adjutant, a like distance before its left. 
 
 DEPLOY AS SKIRMISHERS. BY COMo At this 
 PANY, AT A HUNDRED PACES, ON THE I command, 
 RIGHT OF THE SIXTH COMPANY, TAKE tthe sixth 
 INTERVALS. J and fifth 
 
 captains march their companies eight or ten paces forward, 
 make the preparatory dispositions, and give the preparatory 
 commands for deploying forward, the sixth company on its 
 right file, the fifth on its left file. The fourth captain causes 
 
 119 
 
120 LIGHT INFANTRV. 
 
 his company to face to the right, the seventh and eighth cap- 
 tains cause their companies to face to the left. 
 
 QUICK (or double-quiclc) MARCH. — At the word march, 
 the movement commences. The sixth and fifth companies 
 deploy forward ; the right guide of the sixth, directing him- 
 self on the point indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 The companies which have faced to the right and left, march 
 straight forward. The fourth takes its interval of a hundred 
 paces from the left of the fifth and then deploys forward on 
 its left file ; the seventh and eighth, each takes the like inter- 
 val from the nearest file of the company next on its right, 
 and then deploys forward on its right file. Each of the 
 five companies deploys according to the principles prescribed 
 for an isolated company, and those on the right and left of 
 the sixth and fifth, are each aligned on these central compa- 
 nies, the first deployed. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant follow up the deploy- 
 ment, the first towards the right, the second towards the 
 left, and when finished, place themselves near the command- 
 ing officer, the first on the right, the second on the left. 
 
 The company reserves are established as echellons in re- 
 spect to each other, as follows : the reserve of the sixth, at 
 a hundred and forty paces behind the right of its skirmishers : 
 the reserves of the fourth and fifth, united, opposite to the 
 interval between their skirmishers, and thirty paces nearer 
 the line than the reserve of the sixth ; the reserves of the 
 seventh and eighth, also united, opposite to the interval be- 
 tween their skirmishers, and thirty paces farther from, the 
 line than the reserve of the sixth. 
 
 The major, on receiving the orders of the commanding 
 officer, marches the battalion reserve thirty paces to the rear, 
 and ploys it into column by company, at half distance; which 
 being done, he conducts it to the position indicated by the 
 commanding officer. 
 
 The commanding officer superintends the general deploy- 
 ment, and when finished, throws himself at a point in rear 
 of the line, whence his view may best embrace all the parts 
 in order to direct their movements. 
 
 If, instead of deploying forward, it be intended, to deploy 
 by the flank, the sixth and fifth companies are marched 
 eight or ten paces forward, halted and deployed, the sixth 
 on its right file, the fifth on its left, by the means indicated 
 
 120 
 
OP THK BATTAUOW. 12' 
 
 in the second case in the drill of the company. Each of the 
 other companies marches by the flank, and as soon as the 
 last file of each, nearest to the point of direction, shall have 
 taken the interval of one hundred paces, the company moves 
 up on the line, halts, and deploys. 
 
 The battalion, in the preceding cases, has been supposed 
 to commence each movement from line : if, on the contrary, 
 it be in column, the deployment is made by the same com- 
 mands and according to the same principles, observing what 
 follows : — If to deploy fonoard, the directing company, as 
 soon as unmasked, marches eight or ten paces in front of 
 the line which had been occupied by the head of the column, 
 halts, and then deploys on the designated file ; each of the 
 other companies, marching by the flank, takes its interval 
 to the right or left, halts, and then deploys forward. — If to 
 deploy by the flank; the directing company advances as be- 
 fore, halts, and then deploys on the designated file ; each of 
 the other companies, having taken its interval to the right 
 or left, moves up on the line, halts, and then deploys as soon 
 as the company next towards the direction shall have finish- 
 ed its deployment. 
 
 The echellons in the example given, descend from right 
 to left ; they may be posted on the same principles so as to 
 descend from left to right. The commanding officer indi- 
 cates to the captains, before the commencement of the de- 
 ployment, the number of paces which the reserve of each 
 company ought to take to the rear. 
 
 When the colour-company is to be deployed as skirmish- 
 ers, the colour, without its guard, is detached, and remains 
 with the battalion reserve. 
 
 To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers. 
 (Figs. 10, 11.) 
 
 The commanding officer rallies his battalion by the com- 
 mands indicated for the rally of a company, and so disposes 
 the battalion reserve as to protect this movement. 
 
 The companies deployed as skirmishers rally in squares 
 on their respective reserves : each reserve forms the first 
 front of the square ; the skirmishers who rally first form the 
 lateral fronts, and the other files the fourth front. The of- 
 ficers and sergeants direet the rally, and form the men, as 
 L 121 
 
122 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 they successively arrive, into two ranks, without regard to 
 height, and cause them to face outwards. 
 
 The rally being effected, the commanders of company 
 squares (senior captains, and the sixth captain) profit by an 
 interval of time the cavalry may allow for putting them in 
 safety, either by marching upon the battalion reserve, or by 
 taking an advantageous position : to this end, each of those 
 squares is formed into column, and marched in this order, and 
 if threatened anew, it halts, and again forms itself into square. 
 
 As the companies successively arrive near the battalion 
 reserve, each reforms as promptly as possible, and, without 
 regard to designation or number, takes the place in the co- 
 lumn next in rear of the companies already in it. 
 
 The battalion reserve also forms square, if itself threatened 
 by cavalry. 
 
 Indication of movements which may be executed by the 
 sounds of the bugle, or beats of the drum. 
 
 Double-quick march. 
 
 Run , 
 
 Forward march 
 
 Halt 
 
 March in retreat 
 
 Commence firing...., 
 
 No. of 
 
 No. of 
 
 sounds. 
 
 beats. 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 13 
 
 16 
 
 14 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 19 
 
 Cease firing. 
 
 March by the right > 
 
 flank $ 
 
 March by the leftrlank. 
 Rally on the reserve. 
 Rally on the battalion. 
 
 No. of 
 
 sounds 
 
 No. of 
 heats. 
 
 18 
 
 14 
 
 19 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 
 12 
 2 
 3 
 
 Remark. — The words of command given by the instructor who represents 
 the commander in the company manoeuvres of Light Infantry, are printed 
 in itahes at the beginning of the paragraph ; but in the battalion manceu 
 vres of Light Infantry, they are printed in capitals. 
 
 122 
 
OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Fio. 1. 
 
 looooooooooooogoooouoooooa oo ooo«oooo o > 
 
 o o o o 
 
 1 ? T i 
 
 r 
 
 M 
 
 f 
 
 O O O o 6 
 
 S 
 f 
 
 ? ? ? 
 
 : I ! 
 
 rh|l.l 
 III ill' 
 
 O60600 000/0 aooooi 1 
 
 [\ 1 1 1 11 ? t vi t 1 : 1 n 
 
 UWUHH !!? tmh 
 \ \ t ■ /l / / / /// 
 
 ti!////////A^-- 
 
 
 Fia. 2. 
 laaoooaoooooo 006 00 ooojooasooooooaooooooa 
 
 ta.5.0 00 a O 3< 
 
 123 
 
LIGHT IWPANTBT. 
 
 ••M«1M*.(I(»*IH MMfinW«>lu!i!! 
 
 m 
 
 ioo«g«t»t«»M««00.«gi 
 
 Fio.3. 
 
 Fio. 4. 
 
 I 
 
 i kjfi 
 
 "St* 
 
 124 
 
OP THE COMPANY. 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 es» «s» 
 
 ria.6 
 
 » 6 4.64 6«»* ii *«ri8oV*'ii$lo**'«K«rB a »•«»•• 6 6 448 
 
 & 8 
 
 L2 125 
 
LIGIIT INFANTRY. 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 i ! ; ! I ■ i ■ •■ J i j ! 
 
 i i I I i • I I I i i ! 
 
 to 'oo po jeo }oo \po joo |oo joo loo fc>n !oo joo oo Joo 
 
 K ! hi 
 
 o 6\i A 4 6 4 4 A i 6 4 i 4 4 o 6 6 4 5 4 6 i 6 
 
 f ! 
 - j, 
 
 i 
 
 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 
 
 \ 
 
 6 6 4 A/i 6 i 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 6S* 
 
 \ - 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 J o © o o o o o a a o « « a o o «:o a a o, c a 
 
 I ! 
 
 // 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 
 // 
 // 
 
 
 12 
 
OP THE BATTALION. 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 #^ 
 
 ::/ 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 •t.. 
 
 4' 
 
 
 •5 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 .1 
 
 127 
 
LIGHT INFANTRY. 
 
 Fro. 10. 
 
 V 
 
 ® 
 
 \ ( \ / 
 
 \u/ 
 
 # 
 
 m 
 
 fta 12 
 
 190 
 
PART II. 
 
 CAVALRY TACTICS. 
 
The words of command given by the Instruc- 
 tor, (who represents the commander,) are printed 
 in Capital letters. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 It is not to be expected that the militia or volunteer 
 Cavalry are to be instructed in all the minutise prac- 
 tised by the regular Cavalry. It will be sufficient that 
 every man learns the rudiments of Infantry formations, 
 to act occasionally on foot, and to mount and dismount 
 with ease, to sit a horse naturally, and to have his 
 stirrups sufficiently short to enable him to command 
 his horse, and to rise in them to strike, when it may be 
 necessary to use the sword or the lance. 
 
 The manoeuvres are simple, and can easily be learned. 
 The sword exercise is reduced to a very few motions. 
 It has not been thought necessary to enter into all the 
 cuts usually practised by Cavalry in the attack and 
 defence ; it is deemed sufficient that a militia or volun- 
 teer trooper should be able to draw and return his 
 sword with agility, to pay the compliments with grace, 
 and, for the attack, to come to the preparatory, of 
 " raise sword," and dash at his adversary with cut, or 
 point, as may be most effectual in the charge against 
 horse or foot. 
 
 131 
 
>£ 
 
CONTENTS OF PART SECOND. 
 
 Pag. 
 
 Definitions of certain terms of formation and manceuvre 7 
 
 Mounting 10 
 
 Position on horseback JO 
 
 Dismounting H 
 
 Riding lesson H 
 
 Manual of the sword ?.. J3 
 
 Of the squad 14 
 
 Formation of the squad.. . s 15 
 
 Alignments .. .,£ ]5- 
 
 Marches to the right . 16 
 
 Formations to the reft 16 
 
 Formations to the Tight or reverse flank 17 
 
 Formations to the front 17 
 
 To advance and retire in line 18 
 
 Diminution and increase of front J 8 
 
 Formation of the company . 20 
 
 Formation of the squadron 21 
 
 Formation "of the regiment 22 
 
 To open and close ranks . 23 
 
 Posts of officers and others in column... 23 
 
 Of the charge or attack 24 
 
 Rules for guides and markers 25 
 
 Movements from line 27 
 
 No. 1. To change front forward on first squadron , 27 
 
 2. To change front to the rear on left squadron 28 
 
 3. To change front on central squadron 28 
 
 4. To break to the right into column 2D 
 
 5. To break to the right, to march to the left 29 
 
 6. To break to the right to the rear, to march to the left 30 
 
 7. To ploy into close column on second squadron 30 
 
 8. To advance in echellon of squadrons 31 
 
 9. Passage of lines to the front .' 32 
 
 10. Passage of lines to the rear 32 
 
 11. To march in line 33 
 
 Movements from close column -. : 35 
 
 No. 1. To deploy on second squadron » 35 
 
 2. To wheel into line on rear squadron 35 
 
 3. To change direction from a halt ." 36 
 
 4. Countermarch 37 
 
 Movements from open column. ..- 37 
 
 No. I. To form line to the left 37 
 
 2. To form line to the right by inversion 38 
 
 3. To form line to the front 39 
 
 4. To form line to the front on rear company 39 
 
 5. To form line faced to the rear 39 
 
 6. To form line faced to the rear on rear company 40 
 
 7. 8. To form line by two movements 40, 41 
 
 9. To form on right into lino 41 
 
 10. To form close column 42 
 
 Skirmishing 42 
 
 M 133 
 
PART II. 
 
 CAVALRY. 
 
 Definitions of certain terms of Formation and Manoeuvre. 
 
 A Rank — Is any number of men side by side in line 
 
 Cavalry are said to be marching by— 
 
 Files — When each front-rank man has his rear-rank man 
 following him, the whole in one single string. 
 
 Twos — When each front-rank "two" has its rear-rank 
 "two" following it, being a column two abreast. 
 
 Fours — When each front-rank "four" has its rear-rank 
 "four" by its side, being a column eight abreast. 
 
 Sections of Fours — When each front-rank "four" has its 
 rear-rank "four" following it, being a column four abreast. 
 
 A Platoon — Is the fourth part of a squadron. Platoons 
 in squadron are numbered 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, from the right. 
 
 A Company — Is the half of a squadron. Companies are 
 right and left in each squadron. 
 
 A Squadron — Two or more squadrons compose a corps 
 or regiment. Squadrons are numbered 1st, 2d, 3d, &c. from 
 the right. 
 
 Close Order — The ordinary distance at which the rear 
 rank is formed behind the front-rank — one yard or pace. 
 
 Open Order — The increased distance taken by the rear 
 rank on some occasions of parade — six yards or paces. 
 
 Front — The direction towards which the line faces when 
 formed — the extent from flank to flank — that is, the breadth. 
 
 The extent of front of a squadron is to be calculated at 
 about as many yards as it contains files. 
 
 Depth — Distance from front to rear. 
 
 Distance — Space between one division and another in co- 
 lumn. 
 
 From one horse to another when marching in file, twos, 
 fours, or sections of fours — one yard. 
 
 135 
 
8 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 From one squadron to another in close column — ten yards. 
 
 From one squadron, company, or platoon, to another, in 
 open column. The extent of front of such squadron, com- 
 pany, or platoon, taken from front-rank to front-rank, adding 
 ten paces for the interval between squadrons when in line. 
 
 The depth of two ranks, taking the length of the fullest 
 sized cavalry horses, at eight feet, and the distance between 
 the ranks at three feet, is to be reckoned at about nineteen 
 feet. 
 
 Intervals — Spaces between squadrons and regiments in 
 line — those between squadrons, ten paces; those between 
 regiments, fifteen. 
 
 Points of Direction — Objects towards which it is intended 
 to march in line or column. The directing guide must march 
 perfectly straight, by always keeping in line two objects at 
 some distance before him. 
 
 Flank. — The extremity of the right or left of a military 
 body in line or column. 
 
 Directing Flank — That flank of a column towards which 
 the guides cover in marching. When the column is march- 
 ing with the right in front, the left is the directing flank ; 
 with the left in front, the right (except under peculiar cir- 
 cumstances or manoeuvres.) The directing flank is indicated 
 by the commands "guide left" or "guide right" as the 
 case may be, and the dressing is towards that flank. Pres- 
 sure must be yielded when coming from that flank, and 
 resisted when coming from the opposite flank. 
 
 Pivot — The man on that flank which forms the central 
 point in wheeling. 
 
 Alignment — A straight line, upon which a body of troops 
 is to form. 
 
 Every division which is to be aligned upon another, will 
 halt abreast of the rear- rank, parallel to the line of forma- 
 tion, to move forward into the alignment of the division al- 
 ready formed. 
 
 Inversion — When the squadrons are not in their propei 
 order ; or when the right are to the left, and the left to the 
 right. 
 
 Column — A line broken into several parts, each part fol- 
 lowing exactly behind the other. 
 
 Column of Route — A column (of twos or sections of fours) 
 for convenience and ease. 
 
 136 
 
PAHT II. CAVALRY. 
 
 Direct Echellon — A line broken into several parts, mov- 
 ing direct to the front or rear, in this manner — 
 
 Oblique Echellon — A line broken into several parts by 
 wheels from line, or column, less than the quarter circle, so 
 as to be oblique to the former front, and parallel with each 
 other — thus : 
 
 Paces— There are three paces, the walk, the trot, and the 
 gallop. — The walk at the rate of three and a half to four 
 miles an hour. The trot at eight miles and a half an hour. 
 The gallop at eleven miles an hour. The gallop is not con- 
 sidered applicable to general purposes of manoeuvre, though 
 it may be used occasionally for very simple formations. 
 
 The rate of charge should not exceed the speed of the 
 slowest horses. 
 
 To preserve uniformity of movement, the trot and gallop 
 should commence gradually, and by the whole body at the 
 same time. 
 
 The term pace, by which distance and intervals are mea- 
 sured, is reckoned at one yard. 
 
 Commands — Are of two kinds, those of caution and those 
 of execution. They should be given in a firm and clear 
 tone, and repeated by the chiefs of subdivisions. There 
 should be a short pause between the command of caution 
 and of execution. At the command of caution, chiefs of 
 subdivisions will caution their subdivisions as to the particu- 
 lar movement which each has to perform. 
 
 The commands march and halt should be instantly re 
 peated by chiefs of subdivisions. When a line breaks from 
 a halt by a wheel, the chief of each subdivision will judge 
 of the instant when the movement ought to finish to order 
 halt, and left, or right-dress. 
 
 At the word march, a line or column will move at a walk, 
 M2 137 
 
10 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 unless the command indicates a different pace. When a 
 command is not distinctly heard by some part of the line, 
 each officer (when the intention is obvious) will conform as 
 quickly as possible to the movement which he sees executed 
 on his right or left, according to the point from whence he 
 perceives it to be given. 
 
 Mounting. 
 
 STAND TO HORSE.— The position of the man is on the 
 left side of the horse, square to the front ; toes on a line with 
 the horse's fore feet ; right hand, back upwards, holding the 
 rein of the snaffle over the curb, six inches from the ring of 
 the bitt ; left hand hanging down by the thigh. 
 
 PREPARE TO MOUNT.— Face to the right, place the left 
 hand where the right was, and run the right up to the mid- 
 dle of the reins or knob, which is held between the finger and 
 thumb ; step to the right opposite the horse's shoulder, and 
 taking both sides of the curb-rein with the left hand, just 
 under the right, put the little finger between them, the back 
 of the hand towards the horse's head ; run down the left 
 hand to, the neck of the horse, and still holding the bridle, 
 seize with the fore-fingers of the left hand, a lock of the 
 mane, about a foot from the saddle ; seize the stirrup-leather 
 with the right hand near the stirrup ; step back with the right 
 foot, and place the ball of the left in the stirrup, the left knee 
 close to the horse's shoulder, and the right hand on the can- 
 tie of the saddle. 
 
 MOUNT. — By a spring from the right foot, rise in the stir- 
 rup, bring both heels together, knees against the saddle, and 
 body upright ; place the right hand on the pommel and sup- 
 port the body, while the right leg passes clear over the horse, 
 the right knee closes on the saddle, and the body comes 
 gently into it ; the left hand quits the mane and the right the 
 pommel ; the snaffle-rein is laid with the right hand, back 
 upwards, into the left, the middle finger dividing them, the 
 superfluous part of the reins hanging down on the off-side ; 
 both reins are pressed between the thumb and first joint of 
 the fore-finger, the bridle hand raised so as just to feel the 
 horse's mouth ; the right foot takes the stirrup without the 
 aid of hand or eye. 
 
 Position on Horseback. 
 The body balanced in the middle of the saddle ; head up- 
 
 138 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 11 
 
 right and square to the front ; shoulders well thrown back ; 
 chest advanced; upper part of the arms hanging down 
 straight from the shoulder ; left elbow bent, and slightly- 
 closed to the hips : little finger on a level with the elbow ; 
 wrist rounded, throwing the knuckles to the front ; thigh 
 stretched down from the hip ; the flat of the thigh well turn- 
 ed inward to the saddle ; knees a little bent ; legs hanging 
 straight down from the knee and near the horse's sides ; 
 heels stretched down, the toes raised from the insteps, and 
 as near the horse's sides as the heels. 
 
 Dismounting. 
 
 PREPARE TO DISMOUNT— The right hand takes the 
 rein above the left j the right foot quits the stirrup ; the left hand 
 slides forward on the rein and seizes a lock of the mane 
 about twelve inches from the saddle, feeling the horse's 
 mouth very gently ; the right hand drops the reins to the 
 off-side, and is placed on the holster. 
 
 DISMOUNT.-Supporting the body with the right hand and 
 left foot, the right leg is brought clear over to the near side ; 
 heels close ; the right hand on the cantle preserves the bal- 
 ance of the body ; the right foot is brought to the ground, 
 and then the left ; seize the reins with the right hand under 
 the left, and advance, left foot first, tp the position of stand 
 
 TO HORSE. 
 
 Riding Lesson. 
 
 Aids are given by the hand and legs : corrections and 
 animations by the spur. 
 
 To March. — At the word forward, raise the hand so as 
 to feel gently the horse's mouth, and approach the legs with- 
 out closing them : this is called " to gather the horse," and 
 is preparatory to all movements. At the word march, turn 
 the nails downwards, so as to give a little more rein, and 
 close the calves of both legs according to the sensibility of 
 the horse : when the horse obeys, ease the legs by degrees, 
 and replace the hand quietly in its former position. 
 
 To Halt. — At the word halt, feel the reins equally and 
 firmly, drawing the hand towards the body, and closing for 
 an instant both legs, in order to press the horse well up to 
 the bridle : when the horse has obeyed, resume the former 
 position. 
 
 To Rein Back. — Raise the hand a little and draw it gen» 
 
 139 
 
12 FART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 tly to the centre of the body, bending a little forward, till 
 the horse obeys — use the calves of the logs only to keep 
 him straight ; ease the reins after every step and feel them 
 again. 
 
 To Turn to the Right. — Open the right rein and close 
 gradually the right leg, making the horse pass over a quar- 
 ter of a circle of two or three paces, on the line of the 
 shoulders ; diminish the effect of the rein and right leg, and 
 sustain the horse with the left rein and leg, to terminate the 
 movement. Turning to the Left, is performed on the same 
 principles, by contrary movements. 
 
 To Turn to the Right (or Left) About, is performed by 
 similar movements continued, making the horse pass over a 
 half circle of about five paces, on the line of the shoulders. 
 
 To Trot. — Ease the reins and press the calves of both 
 legs, according to the horse's temper ; then feel both reina 
 to raise the fore-hand. 
 
 To Canter. — A light and firm feeling of the reins, to raise 
 the horse's fore-hand ; a pressure of both legs, to bring the 
 haunches under him. 
 
 Passaging. — When ground is to be taken to a flank, by 
 passaging the whole move at the words right (or left) pass, 
 march— until the word halt. In passaging to the right, 
 at the words right pass, propel the horse's shoulders to the 
 right, by opening the right rein and slightly closing the right 
 leg : at the word march, open the right rein and close the 
 left leg, in order to make the haunches follow ; hold the right 
 leg ready to sustain the horse. Passaging to the left is exe- 
 cuted by contrary movements. 
 
 Obliquing. — At the words right oblique, march, each 
 man makes a quarter turn of his horse to the right, so that 
 his right knee comes behind the left knee of the man on his 
 right ; the man on the right of the rank marches steadily in 
 the direction indicated to him, the others dress on him. The 
 rear-rank moves in the same manner, and is regulated by 
 the front-rank, which it takes care to conform to ; and thus 
 the horses' heads of the rear- rank are directed in rear of the 
 second man from their leader towards the right. In obli- 
 quing to the left the same principles and contrary movements 
 are employed. 
 
 Wlieeling. — Wheelings are of two kinds, from the halt, 
 
 140 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 13 
 
 and upon the move : in either case the dressing is the outer 
 or marching flank. 
 
 From the Halt. — The pivot man turns Iris horse on his 
 fore-feet, keeps his ground, and comes gradually round with 
 the rank. The outward flank man looks to his rank, regu- 
 lates the pace at which the wheel is made, and conducts the 
 flank so as to avoid crowding on the rank, the men resisting 
 pressure from the outward and yielding to pressure from the 
 inward flank. The rear-rank must rein back at the pivot 
 and partly passage and incline towards the wheeling flank 
 in order to cover, 
 
 On the Move. — Both flanks are kept in motion : the inner 
 flank describing an arc of a lesser circle : the outer flank de- 
 scribing an arc of the large circle and moving about one 
 half faster than the rate at which the body is marching : the 
 intermediate men conforming to the movements of the flanks. 
 Pressure must be yielded when coming from the side towards 
 the guide, and resisted from the opposite side, whether the 
 guide be on the pivot, or the marching flank. 
 
 In the evolutions, the wheelings are on a fixed pivot. In 
 changes of direction in column the wheels are made on the 
 move so as not to retard the march, the arcs described by 
 the pivots are five paces, and when marching in column of 
 four, or twos, the pivots wheel without slacking the pace. 
 
 The wheelings should be first practised in single rank. 
 
 In wheeling from line into column, the dressing after the 
 wheel is to the marching flank. 
 
 Manual of the Sword. 
 
 DRAW-SWORD. — Carry the right hand over the reins ; 
 run the hand to the wrist, through the sword-knot ; grasp 
 the sword and draw it six inches out of the scabbaTd. 
 
 Draw the sword briskly, carry it to the right shoulder, 
 point upwards ; drop the hand on the upper part of the right 
 thigh, the little finger on the outside of the gripe and the 
 back of the blade in the hollow of the shoulder. This is the 
 position of carry-sword, 
 
 SLOPJ3-SWQRD. — Loosen the grasp of the handle, ad- 
 vancing at the same time the sword-hand, with the wrisl 
 turned up, so as to allow the back of the sword to rest on 
 the shoulder in a sloping position. 
 
 141 
 
14 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 CARRY-SWORD.— Draw the hand to its position, so 
 as to allow the sword to resume i&s perpendicularity. 
 
 RAISE-SWORDS.— As front-rank. Raise the sword- 
 hand perpendicularly and bring it as high as the chin, blade 
 to the left and fingers opposite the face, which is the position 
 preparatory to give point. Raise the wrist to the height of 
 the eyes — the arm half extended — the edge turned towards 
 the right, and the point a little lower than the wrist. 
 
 As rear-rank. — Raise the sword, the arm half extended ; 
 the wrist a little above the head ; the edge upwards, the point 
 backwards and about one foot above the wrist. These are 
 the positions of the sword by the two ranks just before the 
 charge and at the shock when the men are to give point, or 
 cut and use their swords as they see fit, after breaking the 
 line. 
 
 CARRY-SWORDS. — Bring the sword to its original po- 
 sition on the thigh. 
 
 RETURN-SWORDS.— Raise the blade perpendicularly ; 
 the flat to the front, edge to the left, the thumb to the height 
 of the chin and six inches from it. Carry the wrist near, 
 and opposite to, the left shoulder, drop the point, turn the 
 head to the left, return the sword, bringing the head again to 
 the front and the hand to its position behind the thigh. 
 
 Pistol and carbine exercise are omitted, because it is deem- 
 ed best to let every man use his pistol or carbine as may be 
 most convenient to him. 
 
 Officer's Salute Mounted. 
 
 Being at the position of " carry-swords," raise the hand 
 by a circular motion as high as, and opposite to, the chin, 
 with the edge of the blade to the left, then stretching the arm 
 out, and at the same time bringing the point of the blade in 
 a line with the knee and foot, the edge still kept to the left. • 
 
 The salute being made the s^yord is recovered by bring- 
 ing it back smartly to carry-swords. 
 
 Dismounted. 
 The salute is the same as that prescribed for the infantry. 
 
 Of the Squad. 
 The first drills should be in single rank of squads not ex- 
 ceeding twelve men. The following examples apply to a 
 
 142 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 15 
 
 squad of sixteen men in two ranks, but they are equaiiy ap 
 plicable to a squad in single rank, by leaving out what re- 
 gards the rear-rank in the instructions. 
 
 The marches and formations should be executed as often 
 by the left as by the right ; but in order to avoid repetitions 
 of right and left, they are laid down with reference to the 
 former hand only. 
 
 After the men go through the whole correctly at a walk, 
 the marches and formations should be performed generally 
 at a trot. 
 
 Short halts should take place at intervals : the men should 
 also be dismounted at least once during the drill. 
 
 Formation of the Squad. 
 
 The squad is formed in two ranks at open order, six yards 
 distance : the men in the position of stand to horse. 
 
 ATTENTION, SQUAD— TELL OFF BY FOURS.— 
 The men of each rank number themselves one, two, three, 
 four, from right to left. 
 
 PREPARE TO MOUNT.— Numbers two and four step 
 forward with the right foot, face their horses, take the snaffle 
 rein with both hands near the ring, rein back their horses 
 gently to the distance of four yards, and all prepare to 
 mount. 
 
 MOUNT. — As already explained. Being mounted, num- 
 bers two and four move into their intervals gently, and the 
 rear-rank closes to the distance of one yard frQm the front- 
 rank. (Fig. 1.) 
 
 In dismounting in two ranks, at the words prepare to 
 dismount, numbers one and three of the front-rank move 
 forward four paces, and two and four of the rear-rank rein 
 back the same distance. 
 
 The whole are then dismounted as already explained. 
 
 Alignments. 
 The three right files of each rank are placed four paces 
 forward and aligned. 
 
 BY FILE, RIGHT-DRESS.— The men of each rank ad- 
 vance singly and dress on the men of their respective ranks 
 already established, taking care not to pass beyond them, 
 and feeling the touch of the boot gently to the right. 
 
 FRONT. — The men turn their heads to the front. Dress 
 
 143 
 
16 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 .ng back is practised in the same manner. After the men 
 are sufficiently practised to align by files, they are taught to 
 align by the whole rank at once, by the command right- 
 
 Marches to the Right. 
 
 BY FOURS. 
 
 FOURS, RIGHT.— Each rank wheels by fours to the 
 right. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 GUIDE LEFT-MARCH.— The whole move forward 
 dressing to the left. 
 
 By Sections of Fours. 
 
 SECTIONS OF FOURS-RIGHT-— The whole wheel 
 fours right, as before. 
 
 GUIDE LEFT-MARCH.— The leading four of the front- 
 rank marches straight forward, its rear-rank inclining and 
 covering it ; the remainder move off their ground in succes- 
 sion in the same manner : first a front-rank four, and then a 
 rear-rank four 4 alternately. (Fig. 3,) 
 
 By Twos. 
 
 TWOS-RIGHT.— The right hand two of the front-rank 
 wheels to the right ; the remainder turn their horses' heads 
 towards the right. 
 
 MARCH. — The leading two marches straight forward, 
 followed by its rear-rank two : the remainder move off their 
 ground in succession in the same manner ; first a front-rank 
 two and then a rear-rank two, alternately, the whole covering 
 by the left. (Fig. 4.) 
 
 Marches to the right By Files, are made according to the 
 same principles as By Twos, substituting in the command 
 files for twos. The files should be instructed to cover ac- 
 curately. 
 
 Formations to the Left. 
 
 If the column is marching by subdivisions of eight, or it 
 the front of subdivisions exceed that number, the column 
 must be halted before it is wheeled into line ; in other cases 
 the formations may be made from the move. 
 
 From Fours. 
 
 COLUMN-HALT — LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL- 
 
 144 
 
TART II. CAVALRY. 17 
 
 MARCH. — The whole of the fours wheel to the left, and 
 dress to the right. (Fig. 5.) 
 
 From Sections of Fours* 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE-MARCH— The leading four wheels 
 to the left, and moves up three horses' lengths, followed by 
 its rear-rank : the remainder continue moving on, and as 
 each four arrives opposite its place, it wheels to the left, and 
 forms up to the rank to which it belongs, dressing to the 
 right. (Fig. 6.) 
 
 Formations to the left, From Twos and Files, are made 
 according to the same principles and by the same command 
 as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 7.) 
 
 Formation to the Right or Reverse Flank. 
 
 These formations are made from the move. 
 From Fours. 
 
 ON RIGHT INTO LINE-MARCH— The rear-rank 
 fours check their pace till the front-rank fours of the rank 
 next behind come up abreast of them ; in the meantime the 
 leading four of the front-rank wheels to the right, and ad- 
 vances three horses' lengths beyond the right flank of the 
 column, and halts : its rear-rank wheeling to the right, co- 
 vering it and moving up to the proper distance ; the remain- 
 der continue to move on, each four wheeling to the right 
 when opposite its place, and forming up to the rank tp winch 
 it belongs, dressing to the right. (Fig. 8.) 
 
 From Sections of Fours. 
 
 ON RIGHT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The leading four 
 of the front-rank wheels to the right, advances three horses' 
 lengths, and halts : its rear-rank four arriving behind it, 
 wheels, covers, and moves up to its proper distance ; the re- 
 mainder continue moving on, and as each four arrives oppo- 
 site its place, it wheels to the right, and forms up to the 
 rank to which it belongs, dressing to the right. (Fig. 9.) 
 
 Formations to the right from Twos and Files, are made 
 according to the same principles and by the same command 
 as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 10.) 
 
 Formations to the Front. 
 
 These formations are made from a halt, or move. 
 
 N 145 
 
18 PAKT II. CAVALRY. 
 
 From Fours. 
 FRONT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The leading four ot 
 the front-rank advances three horses' lengths and halts, its 
 rear-rank fours moving up by an incline, to its proper dis- 
 tance and covering it ; the rest of the rear-rank fours check 
 their pace till the front-rank fours of tne rank next behind 
 come up abreast of them, the whole moving up into line by- 
 inclining to the left, and dressing, as they come up, by the 
 right. (Fig. 11.) 
 
 From Sections of Fours. 
 
 FRONT INTO LINE-MARCH— The leading four of 
 the front-rank advances three horses' lengths and halts, its 
 rear-rank four moving up to its proper distance, and covering 
 it : the remainder move up into line, by inclining to the left, 
 and dressing, as they come up, to the right. (Fig. 12.) 
 
 Formations to the front, From Twos and Files, are made 
 according to the same principles and by the same commands 
 as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 13.) 
 
 To Advance in Line. 
 SQUAD, FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT) 
 MARCH. — The whole move forward together, dressing to- 
 wards the guide, who marches straight to the front on the 
 points of direction. 
 
 To Retire in Line. 
 
 This may be done either from a halt, or on the move : in 
 both cases the wheels about must be on a fixed pivot. 
 
 FOURS RIGHT (or LEFT) ABOUT.— Each rank wheels 
 about by fours. 
 
 GUIDE RIGHT (or LEFT)-MARCH.-The word march, 
 to be given, the instant the fours have gone about, and the 
 whole move forward together, dressing towards the guide. 
 
 To resume the natural order the same commands and 
 means are observed. 
 
 Diminution and Increase of Front. 
 These movements are intended for the passage of defiles, 
 and will be executed by the sub-divisions in successions, at 
 the same given point. 
 
 In diminishing from platoons to sections of fours and so 
 
 14G 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 19 
 
 down to files, it will be necessary first to halt the column, in 
 order to avoid crowding and confusion, which would, other- 
 wise, obviously arise from the want of space necessary to 
 execute the movements. 
 
 Diminish. From Squadron to Companies. 
 
 BY COMPANIES, MARCH.— The right company con- 
 tinues to move forward ; the left company halts until its 
 right is cleared, when its chief gives the words right ob- 
 lique, march, and as soon as it covers in column, forward 
 guide-left. 
 
 From Companies to Platoons, 
 
 BY PLATOONS-MARCH.— The first platoon continues 
 to move forward ; the second platoon halts until its right is 
 disengaged, when its chief gives the word, right oblique, 
 march, and as soon as it covers in column, forward, guide- 
 left. The fourth platoon executes the same movement when 
 it arrives at the place where the second platoon broke. 
 
 From Platoons to sections of Fours. 
 BY SECTIONS OF FOURS, MARCH.— The leading 
 right hand four continues to move forward followed by its 
 rear-rank ; the leading left hand four halts until its right is 
 disengaged when it obliques to the right, followed by its rear- 
 rank, and covers in column by the left. All the other fours 
 execute the same movement, as they arrive in succession on 
 the same ground, 
 
 From sections of Fours to Tivos. 
 
 BY TWOS, MARCH.— The leading right hand two fol- 
 lowed by its rear-rank, continues to move forward ; the lead- 
 ing left hand two, halts until its right is disengaged, when it 
 obliques to the right, followed by its rear-rank, and covers 
 in column by the left. All the other twos execute the same 
 movement as they successively arrive on the same ground. 
 From Twos to Files. 
 
 BY FILES, MARCH.— The leading right hand file con- 
 tinues to move forward, followed by its left hand file, which 
 obliques to the right for the purpose. All the other files 
 make the same movements as each arrives at the same point 
 
 Increase. From Files to Twos. 
 FORM TWOS, MARCH.— The leading file continues to 
 
 147 
 
20 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 move forward ; the remainder move on at a trot, numbers 
 two and four, forming on the left of one and three, as they 
 successively arrive at those last formed, and then dropping 
 into a walk. 
 
 From Twos to sections of Fours. 
 
 FORM SECTIONS OF FOURS, MARCH.— The lead- 
 ing twos move steadily forward ; the remainder move ori at 
 a trot, numbers three and four forming on the left of one and 
 two, as they successively arrive at those last formed, and 
 then dropping into a walk. 
 
 From sections of Fours to Platoons. 
 FORM PLATOONS, MARCH.— The leading section 
 moves steadily forward, the others move on at a irot, the 
 left sections forming on the left of the right sections of pla- 
 toons, as they successively arrive at those last formed, and 
 then dropping into a walk. 
 
 From Platoons to Companies. 
 
 FORM COMPANIES, MARCH.— The first platoon 
 moves steadily forward ; the others move on at a trot, the 
 second platoon forming on the left of the first, and the fourth 
 on the left of the third, as they successively arrive at the 
 same point, and then dropping into a walk. 
 
 From Companies to Squadron. 
 
 FORM SQUADRON, MARCH.— The right company 
 moves steadily forward ; the left company moves at a trot, 
 obliques to the left, forms on the left of the right company 
 and then drops into a walk. 
 
 In the foregoing movements, the column is supposed to be 
 marching right in front. If the column should be marching 
 with the left in front, the movements would be executed by 
 inverse means. 
 
 Formation of the Company. 
 Each company forms on its own parade, in single rank, 
 according to size from right to left, the tallest men and horses 
 on the right. 
 
 The company is next divided into two equal parts, those 
 on the right to compose the front-rank, those on the left, the 
 rear-rank. 
 
 IN TWO RANKS FORM COMPANY.— The men com 
 
 148 
 
l'AKT II. CAVALRY. 21 
 
 [.osing the front-rank advance four paces dressing by the 
 righf. The men of the rear-rank turn their horses' heads to 
 ihe right. 
 
 MARCH. — The men of the rear-rank file off to the right 
 m rear of the front-rank : and as each arrives opposite his 
 file-leader, he turns to the left and covers at the distance of 
 one yard. 
 
 The company is then divided into two platoons, the first 
 platoon on the right, the second on the left ; each consisting 
 of eight files. 
 
 The non-commissioned officers are next posted as follows : 
 the first sergeant, on the right of the company, in the rank 
 of file-closers," (one yard from the rear-rank,) the second, 
 third, fourth and fifth sergeants, in the front-rank on the 
 right and left of each platoon, each covered by a corporal. 
 The company thus formed will present thirty-two men, in- 
 cluding sergeants and corporals in the ranks, or (sixteen files. 
 
 The captain is in front of the centre of the company, one 
 fard from the front-rank : the first lieutenant commands the 
 Irst platoon, and the second lieutenant commands the second 
 platoon^ each taking post in front of the centre of his platoon 
 ji a line with the captain. 
 
 The saddler and farrier are in rear of the left of the com- 
 pany, eight yards in rear of the rank of file-closers ; and the 
 trumpets twenty yards in rear of the centre. 
 
 The company being formed, the men, including the non- 
 commissioned officers in the ranks are told off by fours, be- 
 ginning on the right of each rank. 
 
 It is recommended to the militia to form and exercise in 
 single rank, both as a simpler formation and as more useful 
 and effective on many occasions in which they may be re- 
 quired to act. 
 
 Formation of the Sqvadron. 
 
 Two companies constitute a squadron, and when united 
 for that purpose, the platoons are numbered from right to 
 left, frst, second, third, fourth. 
 
 The officers are posted as follows : 
 
 The senior captain commands the squadron and is in front 
 of the centre, one yard from the front-rank. The junior 
 captain three yards in rear of the centre. The first lieu- 
 tenants in front of the centre of their respective companies on 
 N2 149 
 
22 TART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 a line with the senior captain, each commanding his own 
 company : the second lieutenants : ,n rear of the centre of 
 their respective companies in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 The first sergeants of companies are, one on the right and 
 one on the left of the squadron, in the rank of file-closers, 
 to be employed as markers. The other non-commissioned 
 officers retain their places in line. 
 
 The saddlers and farriers retain their places in their re- 
 spective companies : the trumpets are twenty yards in rear 
 of the centre of the squadron. 
 
 When a single company of militia acts in one rank, it 
 should, unless very weak in number, be told off and formed 
 as a squadron. 
 
 Formation of the Regiment. (Fig. 14.) 
 
 Three squadrons ordinarily constitute a regiment: tho 
 squadrons are numbered from right to left, first, second, 
 third. 
 
 The intervals between the squadrons are ten yards. The 
 colonel is eight yards in advance of the centre of the regi- 
 ment, and attended by an officer and a trumpeter. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel in front of the centre of the first, 
 and the major in front of the centre of the third squadron ; 
 both on a line with the colonel. The adjutant on a line 
 with the front-rank, two yards from the right : the ser- 
 geant-major on the same line, two yards from the left of the 
 regiment. 
 
 The dut.es of the field officers, adjutant and sergeant- 
 major are the same as prescribed in the infantry tactics. 
 
 The quartermaster, surgeon, and assistant-surgeon, post- 
 ed from right to left in the order they are mentioned, are in 
 the rear of the centre of the regiment, four yards from the 
 rank of file-closers : the veterinary surgeon six yards on 
 their left. The quartermaster-sergeant, in rear of the right 
 of the second squadron, six yards behind the rank of file- 
 closers. 
 
 The trumpets twenty yards in rear of the centre of the 
 regiment. 
 
 The sergeant on the left of the right company of the 
 centre squadron, carries the standard > and the sergeants 
 on the left of the right platoons of companies, carry each 
 a guidon. 
 
 150 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 23 
 
 To Open and Close Ra?ilcs. 
 
 The ranks being closed, the commanding officer gives tho 
 words prepare to open ranks, when the markers of squad- 
 rons place themselves on the flanks of their squadrons in the 
 rear-rank. The commanding officer then adds, to the rear 
 open order ; at which, the markers rein back five yards 
 and are aligned by the right, by the lieutenant-colonel. The 
 commanding officer then gives the word march, when the 
 rear-rank reins back and is aligned by the lieutenant-colonel 
 on the markers, the whole dressing by the right. The file- 
 closers rein back at the word march, and place themselves 
 one yard in rear of the rear-rank. The rear-rank being 
 aligned, the commanding officer gives the word front. 
 
 When the ranks are to close, the commanding officer gives 
 the words close order, march. At the word march, the 
 rear-rank closes to the front, each man covering his file- 
 leader at the prescribed distance, and the markers take their 
 places as file-closers. 
 
 Posts of officers and others in column. 
 Column of Twos or Fours., (Right in Front.) 
 
 The colonel, abreast with the centre of the regiment, eight 
 lards from the left flank of the column, 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel and major on the same flank, the 
 5rst abreast with the centre of the two first squadrons, and 
 file last abreast with the centre of the last squadron. 
 
 The adjutant on the same flank, ahreast with the leading 
 files ; the sergeant-major in rear of the column, except when 
 the left is in front, when he is on the right flank, abreast with 
 the leading files. 
 
 The chiefs of squadrons on the left flank opposite to ths 
 centre of their squadrons ; the junior captains in the sama 
 relative position, on the right flank. The chiefs of the lead- 
 ing companies of squadrons, in front of their companies, the 
 thiefs of the other companies on the left of their leading 
 lies. 
 
 The file-closers on the right flank of the column, abreast 
 with the files they cover when in line. The trumpets six 
 yards in advance of the officers at the head of the column. 
 
 Column of Platoons. 
 The field officers, adjutant and sergeant-major, as in co- 
 lumn of fours. 151 
 
24 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 The chiefs of squadrons on the left flank, abreast with 
 their second platoons. The junior captains on the right 
 flank, abreast with the third platoons. The chiefs of pla- 
 toons on the left of their platoons. The file-.closers on the 
 right of their platoons. 
 
 The trumpets, as in column of fours. 
 
 Column of Companies. 
 
 The field officers, adjutant,- and sergeant-major, as in cc 
 lumn of platoons. 
 
 The chiefs of squadrons, junior captains of squadrons, 
 and trumpets, as in column of platoons, all the other officers, 
 and non-commissioned officers as in line. 
 
 Close Column. Of Squadrons. 
 
 The field officers, adjutant, sergeant-major, and trumpets, 
 as in column of companies. All the other officers and non- 
 commissioned officers, as in line, except chiefs of squadrons, 
 who are on their left flanks. 
 
 The distance from one squadron to another, in close co- 
 lumn, is ten yards. 
 
 In all movements in column, the officers not herein pro- 
 vided for, march in- rear of the regiment. 
 
 Of the Charge or Attack. 
 
 The charge is regulated by the principles of the direct 
 march, but is more animated and impetuous. The enemy 
 is the point of direction, and his overthrow the object. It 
 commences with a brisk trot, then a gallop, constantly in- 
 creasing in velocity in proportion to the approach to the 
 enemy, and finally assumes the character of an attack. 
 There are three modes of charging. In a line parallel or 
 oblique to the front of the enemy, by echellon, and in co- 
 lumn. 
 
 When at a suitable distance from the enemy to make a 
 charge, say about 250 yards, the commanding officer com- 
 mands, REGIMENT, ( SQUADRON Or COMPANY )-DRAW-SWORDS 
 
 — trot — march. The regiment continues at a trot for 150 
 paces, when the commanding officer gives the word, gallop, 
 which is repeated by the field officers and chiefs of squad- 
 rons. He then commands march, which in like manner ia 
 repeated ; and after passing about 100 paces at a gallop, the 
 commanding officer causes the charge to be sounded by all 
 
 152 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 25 
 
 the trumpets, at which signal the gallop is increased in 
 speed. The men rise in their stirrups, lowering the bridle 
 hand, but keeping the command of their horses, as well as 
 preserving their dressing, and thus dash upon the enemy ; 
 the front-rank with the sword pointed forward, immediately 
 before the shock, and the rear-rank with the sword to the 
 raise. The enemy being routed, the commanding officer 
 orders the trumpeters to sound the rally, when each man 
 pulls up and joins his standard. But as it is important that 
 the enemy should not have time to rally, the flank platoons 
 of each squadron or some others, are sent in pursuit, and 
 lo recall them the rally is sounded, when they return to 
 their respective places in their squadrons. 
 
 The charge ought alwaysj if possible, to be anticipated, as 
 there is great danger of being overthrown by receiving a 
 charge at a halt. 
 
 At the signal to charge, officers in the front of the line, 
 cause the file in rear of them to fall back so as to admit the 
 croup of their horses into the rank. Chiefs of squadrons 
 charge at the head of their respective squadrons. The colo- 
 nel at the head of such squadrons as he may think his pre- 
 sence most necessary. The lieutenant-Colonel and major at 
 the head of other squadrons of their wing. Adjutants, ser- 
 geants major, and general guides, keep their places as in 
 line. The trumpets in rear of the centre, with the trumpet- 
 major at their head, unless the colonel shall see fit to have 
 him near his person. 
 
 Rules for Guides and Markers. 
 
 The guides are the non-commissioned officers on the right 
 and left of platoons, told off in the ranks. 
 
 Guides should be instructed to march with precision, to 
 cover correctly, and to judge of distances by the eye ; as on 
 them depend, in a great measure, the accuracy with which 
 the movements are performed. 
 
 It may sometimes happen that the proper guides are not 
 on the directing flank of a column, as in the marches by 
 fours, and twos : in such cases, the men on that flank serve 
 as guides for the time being. 
 
 The markers to be employed for regimental movements 
 are the first sergeants of companies. There are two for 
 
 153 
 
26 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 each squadron, and their duties are to mark the line on 
 which their squadrons are to rest in the different formations. 
 
 The markers of the squadron to which the base com- 
 pany belongs, mark the base of the intended line, and are 
 placed by a field officer, or the adjutant, at points where the 
 right and left files of the base company are to rest. Upon 
 the caution being given for a movement, the base is instant- 
 ly placed. 
 
 The right markers of squadrons which are to form on the 
 right of the base, mark the points where the right of their 
 squadrons are to rest ; and the left markers of squadrons 
 which are to form on the left of the base, mark the points 
 where the left of their squadrons are to rest. Each moves 
 out from his squadron and faces towards the base markers 
 just time enough to take his dressing from them, before his 
 squadron arrives on the line. 
 
 In marking lines, the markers raise their swords to the 
 height of the cheek, keeping the blade, the edge to the front, 
 perfectly upright. They remain posted until the command- 
 ing officer gives the word front, (which should succeed 
 each formation,) when they retire to their places in line. 
 
 In aligning their squadrons, the chiefs place themselves 
 on that flank towards which the men are to dress, and give 
 the word front, when their squadrons are aligned. 
 
 In forming close column, the base for the covering, con- 
 sists of the markers of that squadron on which the forma- 
 tion takes place; who are placed by the lieutenant-colonel, 
 immediately upon the caution, facing to the pivot flank of 
 the intended column. 
 
 In deployments, and all other movements from close co- 
 lumn, the base consists of the markers of that squadron upon 
 which the deployment or movement takes place ; who are 
 posted by a field officer, or the adjutant, immediately upon 
 the caution, at points where the flanks of that squadron are 
 to rest. 
 
 When a column changes direction in marching, one of 
 the markers of the leading squadron is placed at the point 
 where such change is made. This marker remains posted 
 until the head of the next succeeding squadron is abreast 
 with him, when his place is supplied by the marker of tha," 
 squadron, who in like manner is relieved by the marker of 
 he next squadron ; and so in succession. 
 
 154 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 27 
 
 The markers are rectified in their positions by a field of- 
 ficer, or the adjutant. 
 
 Movements* 
 
 The followihg movements are arranged throughout as for 
 three squadrons ; but they are applicable to any number. 
 They are detailed as performed from the right, but they may 
 be performed from the left, by substituting in the cautions 
 and commands, i.eft for right, and right for left. 
 
 Movements from Line. No*. 1. 
 To change front forward on first Squadron. (Fig. 15.) 
 
 Commanding officer, > CHANGE FRONT FORWARD 
 repeated by chiefs of VON RIGHT COMPANY OF 
 squadrons. ) FIRST SQUADRON.* 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, right— wheel. 
 
 Chief of company next the base— Company forward. 
 
 Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons— By company, right half- 
 wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > M .p P TT 
 ed by same chiefs. \ TROT- \ MAKUH - 
 
 On the word march* the whole move as follows : 
 
 The base company wheels to the right and is aligned on 
 the markers * receiving from its chief the words halt, right- 
 dress. 
 
 The company next the base advances until its right un- 
 covers the left of the right company ; it then receives from 
 its chief the words right-wheel, followed by forward, halt, 
 right-dress. 
 
 The other companies wheel half right, and then receiving 
 the words, forward, guide-right, from the chiefs of squad- 
 rons, advance in echellon towards the new line. Each com- 
 pany on approaching its place, receives from its chief right- 
 wheel, followed by forward, and on arriving on a line with 
 the rear- rank of the preceding company, kali, right-dress. 
 
 * The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
 new line in ftont of the right end left files of the base company, facing to 
 the right. 
 
 155 
 
28 PART IT. CAVALRY. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Line. 
 
 To change front to the rear on the left Squadron. 
 
 (Fig. 16.) 
 
 Commanding officer, ( CHANGE FRONT TO THE 
 repeated by chiefs of 1 REAR ON LEFT COMPANY 
 squadrons. ( 0F THIRD SQUADRON.* 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 
 
 Chief of company next the base — Company, fours, right- 
 about, followed by company, right-wheel, as soon as fours 
 have gone about. 
 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Fours, right-about, fol- 
 lowed by — By company, right half— wheel, as soon as fours 
 have gone about. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- $ WALK or > M . RPH 
 peated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MAKUtl « 
 
 On the word march, the base company wheels to the right, 
 and is aligned on the markers, receiving from its chief, the 
 words halt, left-dress. The company next the base having 
 wheeled to the right, receives from its chief the word forward, 
 passes the line a horse's length, leaving sufficient interval be- 
 tween it and the left company, to enable it to wheel about by 
 fours, and receives from its chief, halt, fours, right-about, 
 left-dress. The other companies wheel half right, and re- 
 ceiving from the chief of squadrons, the words forward, 
 guide-right, retire in echellon towards the new line ; each 
 company, on approaching its place, receives from its chief 
 right-^ioheel, followed by forward, and when it has passed 
 the line a horse's length, taking care to leave sufficient ground 
 on its right to wheel about, receives from its chief halt, 
 fours, right-about, left-dress. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Line. 
 To change front on central Squadron. (Fig. 17.) 
 n A . K n r CHANGE FRONT ON RIGHT 
 
 Commanding officer,! COMPANY OF SECOND 
 
 repeated by chiefs of SQUADRON. LEFT-WING 
 
 squadrons. ^ FORWARD.f 
 
 ♦The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed on the 
 new line in front of the left and right files of the base company, facing to 
 the left. 
 
 tThe base is given by the markers of the second squadron, placed on the 
 new line in front of the right and left files of the base company, facing to 
 the right 
 
 156 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 29 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, right-ivheel. 
 
 Chief of company next the base — Company, forward. 
 
 C Fours, right-about, followed by 
 
 Chief of 1st squadron, < By company, right half-wheel,. 
 { as soon as fours have gone about. 
 
 Chief of 3d squadron — By company, right half-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- \ WALK or > M .p rH 
 peated by same chiefs. \ TROT- \ lvlAKUtl - 
 
 On the word march, the companies of the second squad- 
 ron execute what has been prescribed in No. 1, for the com- 
 panies of the first squadron. The companies of the third 
 squadron conform to what is prescribed in the same No. for 
 the companies of the second and third squadrons ; and the 
 companies of the first squadron to what is prescribed in No. 
 2, for the companies of the first and second squadrons. 
 
 Movement No. 4, from line. 
 To break to the right into column. (Fig. 18.) 
 
 Commanding officer, re- ) BY COMPANY, RIGHT- 
 peated by chiefs of squad- > WHEEL, WALK (or TROT) 
 rons, ) -MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the companies wheel to the right, 
 and receive from their chiefs the words, halt, left-dress, 
 followed by front. 
 
 Should it be ' intended to move the column forward, the 
 commanding officer gives the words, column forward, 
 guide-left, walk (or trot)-march, and the whole move 
 forward at the pace indicated. 
 
 If, while the column is in march, it be intended to change 
 direction by the head, the commanding officer gives the words, 
 head of column to the right, (or left,) when the chief 
 of the leading company adds, company, right (or left) 
 wheel-march. The company having wheeled into the new 
 direction, its chief gives the word forward, and the compa- 
 ny resumes the direct march. Each company, on arriving 
 on the ground where the first wheeled, executes the same 
 movement, receiving from its chief the same command- 
 Movement No. 5, from line. 
 
 To break to the right, to march to the left. (Fig. 19.) 
 
 ~ ~ , ( BY COMPANY, BREAK 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- > TQ TRE RIGHT TO 
 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, £ MARC H TO THE LEFT 
 
 O 157 
 
^0 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 Chief of Right Company, 1st Squadron— Company, for- 
 ward, guide-left. 
 
 Commanding officer < WALK or > MARCH . 
 repeated by same chief, ( lKOl- ^ 
 
 On the word march, the right company of the first squad- 
 ron advances ten paces, wheels to the left by command of 
 its chief, and marches forward. The other companies do 
 the same, in succession ; their chiefs giving the command in 
 time to enable them to take their proper distances in column. 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Line. 
 
 To break by the right, to the rear, to march to the left. 
 (Fig. 20.) 
 
 r BY COMPANY, BY 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- J THE RIGHT, BREAK 
 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, TO THE REAR, TO 
 
 I MARCH TO THE LEFT. 
 
 Chief of Right Company, 1st Squadron — Company, right 
 about-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- i WALK or ) ^ . RCH 
 peated by same chief, ( TROT- $ 
 
 On the word march, the right company of the first squad 
 ron wheels about, receives the words forward, guide left, 
 from its chief, marches ten paces to the rear ; wheels again 
 to the right by command of its chief, and again receiving the 
 word forward, continues its march. The other companies 
 are, in succession, wheeled to the right-about by their chiefs, 
 and moving to the rear in like manner, follow in column. 
 
 The movements in this and the preceding number, are in- 
 tended for the passage of defiles in front and rear of the left. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Line. 
 To ploy into close column, on second squadron. (Fio. 21.) 
 
 n ,< a, . C CLOSE COLUMN ON 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- S SEC0ND SQUADRON , 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, ^ RI QHT IN FRONT.* 
 Chief of 1st squadron — Squadron, fours left. 
 Chief of 3d squadron — Squadron, fours right. 
 
 * The base for the covering of the pivots is given by the markers of the 
 second squadron, placed in front of the left flank of the leading squadron, 
 facing to the rear. 
 
 158 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 81 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated ( WALK or > marpii 
 by chiefs of 1st & 3d squadrons, J TROT- \ MAKUn « 
 
 On the word march, the second squadron stands fast, its 
 chief giving the words guide left. The first squadron hay- 
 ing wheeled fours left, is conducted by its chief (on the right 
 flank of the leading fours) along the front of the second 
 squadron ; when abreast of the fourth file from the left of 
 the second squadron, the chief of the firsj squadron gives the 
 words halt, fours right, left-dress, and front. The third 
 squadron having wheeled fours right, is conducted by its 
 chief (on the left flank of the leading fours) towards its place 
 in rear of the second squadron ; he himself halts where its 
 left will cover on the second squadron, allows his squadron 
 to pass him, and as soon as the left is up with him, gives the 
 words halt, fours left, followed by left-dress and front. 
 
 The above instructions are applicable to the formation of 
 close column on a flank squadron, by naming it in the cau- 
 tion, with either the right or left in front ; the chiefs of squad- 
 rons giving their commands accordingly. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Line. 
 To advance in echellon of squadrons. (Fig. 22.) 
 
 n ,. - . ( ADVANCE IN ECHEL- 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- > LQN op SQ tj ADR0NS 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, ^ from THE RIGHT. 
 
 Chief of 1st squadron — Squadron forward. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or > M .pp„ 
 repeated by same chief, \ TROT- $ MAKU "« 
 
 On the caution to advance, the squadron-markers place 
 themselves on the right and left of the front-rank of their 
 squadrons. On the word march, the first squadron ad- 
 vances. The remaining squadrons receive the word march, 
 from their chiefs, in succession, as soon as each has got a 
 distance equal to its front and interval from the one which 
 precedes it ; the right markers of squadrons taking care to 
 preserve that distance and interval. During this march the 
 guide is to the right. 
 
 The retreat in echellon is exactly like the advance, each 
 squadron wheeling to the right-about by fours, just in time 
 not to lose its distance from the one before it. In the cau- 
 tion, the word retire is substituted for advance. 
 
 159 
 
32 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 When squadrons, having advanced in echellon, are requir 
 ed to form line to the front, the squadron, on which the line 
 is to be formed, is named ; those squadrons in front, if any, 
 are wheeled about by fours to the right, and the whole move 
 into line upon the named squadron. 
 
 When a formation into line is required to the left, the 
 squadrons wheel to that hand, and form line upon a named 
 squadron. 
 
 If, while advancing in echellon from the right, it be re- 
 quired to form an oblique line to the left, the squadrons close 
 to company distance, on the named squadron, and then half 
 wheel to the left into line. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Line. 
 Passage of lines to the front. (Fig. 23.) 
 
 „ ,.''■■« f ( ADVANCE BY FOURS 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- } FR0M THE RIGHT OF 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons. ^ SQUADRONS. 
 
 Chiefs of squadrons— -fours right — leading fours, left- 
 wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or ) iu a Rfjij 
 repeated by same chiefs, { TROT- $ 
 
 On the word march, each squadron wheeling fours right, 
 and its leading fours again to the left, advances through the 
 intervals of the line in front, each squadron passing on the 
 right of the squadron in its front. 
 
 When the line is to be formed again, the commanding of- 
 ficer gives the words, front into line-march, (repeated by 
 chiefs of squadrons,) when each squadron forms on its lead- 
 ing fours ; the chiefs dress their squadrons by the right, and 
 then resume their places. 
 
 The intervals of heads of squadrons from each other, are 
 preserved from the first squadron. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Line. 
 Passage of lines to the rear. (Fig. 24.) 
 
 rWmnr^nrr ft ffl««r ~n»ot ( RETIRE BY FOURS 
 
 ed c b rr e f o n f s ° q srr \ z™S£ 1GnT 0F 
 
 Chiefs of squadrons — Fours right — leading fours, right- 
 wheel. 
 
 160 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 83 
 
 Commanding officer, ( WALK or > u^Ttrn 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MAKOtl - 
 
 On the word march, each squadron, wheeling fours right 
 and its leading fours again to the right, retires. The inter- 
 vals of the heads of squadrons from each other are preserv- 
 ed from the first squadron. Each squadron passes through 
 the interval, on the left of the squadron in its rear. 
 
 When the columns approach within fifty yards of the 
 place where the commanding officer intends to reform his 
 line, the lieutenant-colonel moves forward and establishes a 
 marker at the point where the right of the first squadron is 
 to rest. The left squadron markers then move out and mark 
 the points where the left of their squadrons are to rest on the 
 line, and each chief conducts his squadron, round his left 
 marker, towards the point where the right of his squadron 
 is to rest, and when there, gives the words halt, fours left, 
 right-dress, followed by front, and resumes his place in 
 line. 
 
 Movement No. 11, from Line. 
 To march in Line. 
 
 To cause the regiment to advance in line, the commanding 
 officer gives the caution, regulate on-sq,uadron. Squad- 
 rons forward, (repeated by chiefs of squadrons,) on which 
 all the squadron markers move to the right and left of the 
 front-rank of their respective squadrons. If the first, cen- 
 tral, or any intermediate squadron is to be the regulating one, 
 the lieutenant-colonel causes the right marker of that par- 
 ticular squadron to place himself exactly in front of the right 
 guide of his squadron, on a line with the officers, and desig- 
 nates to him the point on which he is to march. If the re- 
 gulating squadron is on the left of the centre, the left-marker 
 of that particular squadron is placed in like manner, in front 
 of the left guide of his squadron. 
 
 These dispositions being made, the commanding officer 
 gives the word march, (repeated by chiefs of squadrons,) 
 and the whole move forward. The officers in front of squad- 
 rons maintain themselves on the alignment of the marker 
 of the regulating squadron, without regarding the dressing 
 of their men. Each squadron dresses towards the regulat- 
 jng one, and the intervals are preserved in that direction. 
 2 161 
 
34 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 The squadrons should, if any thing, be rather behind, than 
 m advance of the regulating squadron. 
 
 If an obstacle present itself in front of a platoon, compa- 
 ny, or squadron, its chief places it behind the platoon, com- 
 pany, or squadron, to his right or left, according to circum- 
 stances, by wheeling by platoons to the right or left ; and 
 when the obstacle is passed, bringing it into line by a con- 
 trary movement. 
 
 If, while marching in line, it be intended to gain ground 
 to the front and to a flank, the commanding officer gives the 
 
 WOrds, BY COMPANY, RIGHT (or LEFT) HALF WHEEL-MARCH, 
 
 and when sufficiently wheeled, he adds forward guide 
 right (or left ;) the whole move in the direction indicated, 
 in echellon of companies. To bring them again into line, 
 and to continue the direct march, the commanding officer 
 gives the words, by company, left (or right) half- 
 wheel, march, and when wheeled into line, he adds for- 
 ward, when the line moves forward, conforming to what 
 has already been prescribed. The commands here given, 
 are repeated by chiefs of squadrons. 
 
 To halt the regiment, marching in line, the commanding 
 officer gives the words, regiment, halt. At the word 
 halt, repeated by chiefs of squadrons, each squadron halts. 
 The markers of the regulating squadron place themselves 
 facing to the right, in front of the right and left files of their 
 squadron, a little in advance of the line of officers, so as not 
 to be masked by them, and are rectified on the alignment by 
 the lieutenant-colonel. The right markers of squadrons on 
 the right of the regulating one, and the left markers of those 
 on its left, step out, face towards the markers already es- 
 tablished, and are rectified on them by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 The commanding officer then gives the words, on — squad- 
 ron-dress, when each squadron moves forward on the 
 alignment, dressing towards the regulating squadron. The 
 alignment being completed, the commanding officer gives 
 the word front, and the markers retire. 
 
 In the retreat in line, the same rules apply as in the ad 
 vance, the squadrons wheeling about by fours, and the file- 
 closers acting as leaders, except that they give no commands. 
 
 The march in line being a difficult and important move- 
 ment, should be frequently practised, in order to render it as 
 familiar and as easy as possible. 
 
 162 
 
PARr II. CAVALRY. 35 
 
 Movements from Close Column, No. 1. 
 To deploy on second squadron. (Fig. 25.) 
 Commandingofficer, \ DEPLOY ON SECOND SQUAD- 
 
 Chief of 1st squadron — Fours right. 
 
 Chief of 3d squadron — Fours left. 
 
 Commanding officer, $ WALK or ) Mi p r , 
 repeated by same chiefs, I TROT- $ MAi40h - 
 
 On the word march, the first squadron leads out to the 
 right, and the third squadron leads out to the left, each con- 
 ducted by its chief. The chief of the first squadron, when 
 opposite the ground on which the left of his squadron is to 
 rest, halts, and lets his squadron march past him ; when the 
 last rank of fours is abreast with him, he gives the words, 
 first squadron, halt— fours left — left-dress, followed by 
 front. In like manner, the chief of the third squadron, 
 when opposite the point where the right of his squadron is 
 to rest, halts, lets his squadron march past him, and when 
 the last rank is abreast with him, gives the words, third 
 squadron, fours right, forward, guide right, and when 
 abreast with the rear-rank of the second squadron, halt, 
 right~dress, followed by front. The chief of the base 
 squadron, (the 2d,) the moment his front is unmasked, gives 
 the words, second, squadron, forward, guide left, and 
 when within two paces of the line, he halts his squadron and 
 aligns it by the right on the markers. 
 
 The above example is applicable to the deployment of a 
 close column on any named squadron. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Close Column. 
 To wheel into line on the rear squadron. (Fig. 26.) 
 Commanding officer— ON THIRD SQUADRON, LEFT 
 INTO LINE.f 
 
 Chief of 3d squadron — Third squadron, left-wheel. 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Squadron, forward. 
 Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > at ARCH 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, ( TROT- $ 
 
 *On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the second squad- 
 ron, placed at points where the flanks of that squadron are to rest in line 
 they face to the right. 
 
 t On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the third squadron, 
 placed at pointe where the flanks of that squadron are to rest, facing to th« 
 •ft. 
 
 163 
 
36 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 On the word march, the first and second squadrons ad 
 vance ; each, as soon as it has got its proper distance from 
 the one in its rear, receives from its chief the words left- 
 wheel, followed by forward, and as it arrives on a line 
 with the third squadron, halt, left-dress, front. The 
 third squadron wheels to the left, receives from its chief the 
 word forward, and when it has moved up three horses' 
 lengths, halt, left-dress, front. 
 
 If the column be required to form line to the right (re- 
 verse) flank, the caution is given, by inversion, on thirb 
 squadron, right into line ; the movements and com- 
 mands are the same, only substituting right for left. 
 
 The column may also, in both cases, be opened from the 
 front or centre, as well as from the rear ; the squadrons in 
 the rear going about by fours, and fronting when they have 
 got their proper distances, and those in front of the named 
 one advancing. The formation is the same as already laid 
 down. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from dose Column. 
 To change direction from a halt. (Fig. 27.) 
 
 Commanding officer— CHANGE DIRECTION BY THE 
 RIGHT FLANK.* 
 
 Chiefs of squadrons — Fours right. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or > mapph 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- \ iV1AU ^ n 
 
 On the word march, the front squadron, receiving from 
 its chief left wheel, and then forward, moves straight in 
 the new direction ; its chief halting himself at the point 
 where its left is to rest, and permitting his squadron to march 
 past him ; when the last rank comes abreast with him, he 
 gives the words, halt, fours-left, left-dress, aligns his 
 squadron on the markers, and adds, front. The second 
 and third squadrons are conducted by their chiefs, who halt 
 when arrived at the points where the left of their squadrons 
 are to rest, let their squadrons march past them in the new 
 direction, and when the last rank is abreast with them, they 
 give the words, halt, fours-left, left-dress, followed by front. 
 
 *On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the headmost squad 
 ron, placed at points whero the flanks of that squadron are to rest, feeing to 
 the right. 
 
 164 
 
PART It. CAVALRY. 87 
 
 In changing direction by the left flank, each chief con- 
 ducts his squadron until its left flank arrives at the point 
 where it is to rest. 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Close Column. 
 Countermarch. (Fig. 28.) 
 
 Commanding officer— COLUMN, COUNTERMARCH. 
 
 Chiefs of Squadrons — File to the right. 
 
 Commanding officer, $ WALK or \ M ARptr 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MAKOW - 
 
 On the word countermarch, the left markers place them- 
 selves one yard beyond the left of their squadrons, facing to 
 the rear, the croups of their horses six yards in rear of the 
 ■fcar-rank. The file-closers place themselves on the left of 
 ieir squadrons ; those of the right companies, abreast with 
 ;he front-rank ; the junior captains on their left ; those of 
 the left companies abreast with the reai'-rank. 
 
 On the words, File to the Right, the right hand men of 
 both ranks turn to the right-about, and the front-rank man 
 moves up on the left of his rear-rank man ; the remainder 
 turn their horses' heads towards the right. 
 
 On the word march, the leading file of each squadron 
 wheels to the right, passes near the rear-rank, and when 
 nearly opposite the left marker, each man, on a caution from 
 his chief of squadron, turns to the left, halts, and dresses to 
 the right, the front-rank man placing himself on the left of 
 the marker. The other files move off their ground in suc- 
 cession, front and rear- rank men together, as it comes to 
 their turn, wheel at the same point where the leading file 
 wheeled, and when arrived opposite to their places in line, 
 each man turns to the left, and forms up to the rank to which 
 he belongs, dressing to the right. The officers and file- 
 closers follow the movement of the men, and take their 
 places successively as they reach them. 
 
 Movements from Open Column. No. 1. 
 To form line to the left. (Fig. 29.) 
 
 ^ ,. ra t C LEFT INTO LINE- 
 
 Command,ngofficer,repeat-S WHEEL _ # WALK ( 
 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, i TROTVMARCH 
 
 * The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed at points 
 where the flanks of the right company are to rest, facing each other, and 
 covered by the left markers of the other squadrons, at points where the left 
 of their squadrons arc to rest. 
 
 165 
 
38 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 On the word march, the companies wheel left into line, 
 receiving from their chiefs the words halt, right-dress, as 
 soon as the wheel is completed. The chiefs of squadrons 
 align their squadrons by the right, and then give the word 
 front. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Open Column. 
 To form line to the right by inversion. 
 
 Commanding officer, ( BY INVERSION, RIGHT INTO 
 repeated by chiefs of 1 LINE-WHEEL.* WALK (or 
 squadrons, . ( TROT)-MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the companies wheel right into line, 
 receiving from their chiefs the words, halt, left-dress, as 
 soon as the wheel is completed. The chiefs of squadrons 
 aligi. their squadrons by the left, and then give the word 
 Front. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Open Column. 
 To form line to the front. (Fig. 30.) 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- > FRQNT INTQ LJNE , 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, ^ 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, forward. 
 
 Chief of company next the base — Company, left, half- 
 wheel. 
 
 Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons — By company, left, half- 
 wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or > TVfARf'FT 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- \ 
 
 On the word MARcn, the base company advances three 
 horses' lengths, and then receives from its chief the words, 
 halt, right-dress. The other companies make a half 
 wheel to the left, and then, receiving from the chiefs of 
 squadrons the words, forward, guide-right, advance in 
 echellon towards their places in line. Each, as it approaches, 
 receives from its chief, right- wheel, followed by forward, 
 and on arriving on a line with the rear-rank of the preced- 
 
 The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed at points 
 where the flanks of" the right company of that squadron are to rest, facing 
 each other, and covered by the left markers of the other squadrons, at points 
 where the left of their squadrons are to rest. 
 
 t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed at points 
 where the flanks of the base company are to rest, facing to the right 
 
 166 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 81) 
 
 ing company, halt, right-dress. Each chief of squadron 
 aligns his squadron by the right, and then gives the word 
 front. 
 
 If the column be required to form line to the front by in- 
 version, the caution is given, by inversion, front into 
 line. The movement is performed according to the same 
 principles, but by inverse means and commands ; the lead- 
 ing company is established on the markers ; the other com- 
 panies half-wheel to the right, and advance in cchellon to- 
 wards the line, each forming on the right of the one which 
 precedes it. 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Open Column. 
 To form line to the front on rear company. (Fig. 31.) 
 Commanding officer, repeat- \ ON REAR COMPANY, 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, \ FRONT INTO LINE.* 
 
 Chief of company next the base — Company, left half- 
 wheel. "■ 
 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons— By company, left half- 
 wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or ) m^RCH. 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ 
 
 On the word march, the whole, except the base company, 
 (which stands fast,) move as follows : 
 
 The companies make a half wheel to the left, and receiv- 
 ing from the chiefs of squadrons, the words, halt, fours 
 right-about, followed by forward, guide-right, retire in 
 echellon towards their places in line. Each, on approach- 
 ing the line (taking care to leave sufficient space on its right 
 to' wheel fours about) receives from its chief the words, 
 right-wheel, followed by forward, and when it has pass- 
 ed the line a horse's length, halt, fours right-about, left- 
 dress. 
 
 Movement No. 5, from Open Column. 
 To form line faced to the rear. (Fig. 32.) 
 Commanding officer, repeat- > INTO LINE, FACED 
 ed by c hiefs of squadrons, \ TO THE REAR.f 
 
 * The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed in front 
 of the right and left files of the left company, facing to the left 
 
 t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
 new line, at points where the flanks of the right company are to rest, and 
 facing towards the right flank. 
 
♦0 PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, left about-wheel. 
 
 Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons, >- „ . , 
 
 and company next the base, \ ±ours ri ^ llt ' 
 
 Commanding officer, ( WALK or \ mapppt 
 repeated by same chiefs, { TROT- \ MAKUW ' 
 
 On the word march, the base company wheels left about 
 and receives from its chief the words, halt, right-dress. — 
 The other companies move off together, and are conducted 
 by their chiefs to the points where their left will stand on the 
 new line, being marked by squadron markers ; each chief 
 conducts his company round the marker, and when the head 
 of the company arrives near its point of formation, leaving 
 space sufficient to wheel by fours, he gives the words, halt, 
 fours-left, right-dress. 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Open Column. 
 To form line faced to the rear on rear company. (Fig. 33.) 
 
 - Commanding officer, repeat- < ™ ?^5 S?S£% 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, } TFffl REAr/ 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, left-about-tvheel. 
 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — By company, left-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or ) M . Dp „ 
 repeated by same chiefs, } TROT- $ MAKUH - 
 
 On the word march, the base company wheels left about 
 receives from its chief the word forward, and after advanc 
 ing three horses' lengths, halt, left-dress. The othei 
 companies wheel three-quarters left, and receiving from their 
 chiefs of squadrons the words, forward, guide-left, ad- 
 vance in echellon towards their places in line ; each, on ap- 
 proaching the line, receives from its chief the words, left- 
 wheel, followed hy forward, and on arriving on a line with 
 the rear-rank of the preceding company, halt, left-dress. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Open Column. 
 To form line by two movements. (Fig. 34.) 
 A column having changed direction to the right, or re- 
 verse flank, may form line to its former front, as follows : 
 
 *Thc base is given by Hie markers of the third squadron, placed on the 
 new line, at jioiiits where the flanks of the left company are to lest, nnd 
 facing towards the left flank 
 
 16S 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 41 
 
 I LEFT INTO LINE-WHEEL, 
 
 Commanding officer, { REAR SQUADRON, FRONT 
 ( INTO LINE.* 
 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Left into line-wheel. 
 
 Chief of 3d squadron — Front into line. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or ) MADniI - 
 lepeated by same chiefs, } TROT- $ MAKUH - 
 
 On the word march, the companies of the first and se 
 cond squadrons wheel into line, as prescribed in movement 
 No. 1, from open column ; and the companies of the third 
 squadron form to the front into line, as prescribed in move- 
 ment No. 3, from open column. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Open Column. 
 To form line by two movements. (Fig. 35.) 
 A column having changed direction to the left, or pivot 
 flank, may form line to its former rear, as follows : 
 
 ( LEFT INTO LINE- WHEEL. 
 
 Commanding officer, ^ REAR SQUADRON INTO 
 
 f LINE FACED TO THE REA R.* 
 
 Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Left into line-wheel. 
 
 Chief of 3d squadron, \ , ^ line, faced to the rear 
 
 r ( followed by fours-right. 
 
 Commanding officer, ( WALK or \ M . DPU 
 repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MAK( -^ 
 
 On the word march, the companies of the first and se 
 cond squadrons wheel into line, as prescribed in movemen 
 No. 1, from open eolumn ; and the companies of the 3d 
 squadron form line faced to the rear, as in movement No. 5. 
 from open column. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Open Column 
 
 To form on right into line. (Fig. 36.) 
 
 Commanding officer, re- i ON RIGHT INTO LINE- 
 .peated by chiefs of squadrons, } GUIDE RIGHT. | 
 
 * The base in these two movements is given by the markers of the first 
 squadron, placed on the new line, at points where the flanks of the right 
 company are to rest, facing each other. 
 
 t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
 new line, at points Where the flanks of the right company are to rest facirur 
 to the right ■ • , 
 
 P 169 
 
42 PART II. CAVALRY* 
 
 Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > ^ . RCH 
 ed by chief of base company, \ TROT- \ 
 
 On the word march, the leading company wheels to the 
 right, receives from its chief the word forward, and when 
 it has advanced a distance equal to its front, halt, right- 
 dress. The other companies pass along the rear of the 
 leading company ; each in succession, as soon as it arrives 
 opposite its place in line, receives from its chief the words, 
 right-wheel, followed by forward, and when on a line 
 with the rear- rank of the preceding company, halt, right- 
 dress. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Open Column. 
 To form close column. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- ) FORM CLOSE CO- 
 ed by chiefs of squadrons, \ LUMN. 
 
 Chiefs of right companies of squadrons — Company, for- 
 ward. 
 
 Chiefs of left companies of squadrons — Company, left— 
 oblique. 
 
 Commanding officer, i WALK or ) MARCIL 
 repeated by same chiefs, ( TROT- $ 
 
 On the word march, the leading company advances three 
 horses' lengths, and receives from its chief the word halt. 
 The other right companies move straight forward. The left 
 companies oblique to the left, at double the pace, till their 
 right flanks are uncovered ; they then receive the word for~ 
 ward, from their chiefs, followed by walk, when in line 
 with their right companies. Each squadron, as soon as 
 formed, receives the words, guide-left, from its chief, and 
 when moved up to its proper place in column, halt, left- 
 dress, followed by front. 
 
 Skirmishing. 
 Skirmishers are usually employed to gain time, to watch 
 the movements of the enemy, to keep him in check, and to 
 prevent him from approaching so close to the main body as 
 to annoy the line of march. On service, regularity in skir- 
 mishing and correctness of distance cannot always be main- 
 tained, on account of the movements of the enemy and the 
 nature of the ground. It is, nevertheless, essential, that some 
 
 170 
 
PART It. CAVALRY. 43 
 
 general rules should be laid down, which may he easily con- 
 formed to and applied, according to circumstances. 
 
 On ordinary occasions a few mounted men may be suffi- 
 cient for this duty ; yet it is frequently necessary on service 
 to employ whole squadrons as skirmishers. The following 
 example embraces a company, which is deemed sufficient to 
 cover the front and flanks of a regiment composed of three 
 squadrons. One of the flank companies is usually employed 
 for this purpose. 
 
 LEFT COMPANY OF THIRD SQUADRON, > At 
 
 SKIRMISH TO THE FRONT-MARCH. \ the 
 
 word march, the company named moves forward ten paces, 
 and the men deploy as skirmishers, extending so as to cover 
 the whole front of the squadron, as well as its flanks ; for 
 this purpose, the man on the right of the front-rank moves 
 in an oblique direction, towards a point sixty paces in ad- 
 vance, and beyond the right flank of the regiment ; the man 
 on the right of the rear-rank follows his file-leader, and then 
 moves to his left on the same alignment ; the other files con- 
 form themselves to this movement, placing themselves at 
 equal intervals from each other. 
 
 In advancing, the skirmishers draw the left pistol, the 
 sword hanging to the wrist. When the regiment is advanc- 
 ing, the forward march is sounded, when the skirmishers 
 move forward, and at the sound commence firing, they be- 
 gin the fire. When the halt is sounded, the skirmishers 
 halt, and observe the movement of the regiment, to which 
 they conform. If it turn to the right, or left, they do the 
 same singly, to cover the front ; if the regiment retire, the 
 march in retreat is sounded, when the skirmishers retire 
 by a checquered movement, as follows : — All the skirmishers 
 who belong to the front-rank wheel about singly to the left, 
 march fifty paces to the rear, and then resume their front by 
 wheeling about singly to the right, The same movements 
 are made by the rear-rank men, who place themselves fifty 
 paces in rear of the others, and so on as long as the regi- 
 inent continues in retreat. 
 
 When the regiment resumes its front, the halt is sounded, 
 at which the skirmishers halt and form again on the same 
 line. Cease firing is then sounded, and afterwards the 
 rally, when they return by the shortest way to their places 
 *n the regiment. 
 
 171 
 
44 PART IX. CAVALRY. 
 
 Skirmishers always move out and return at a gallop : they 
 never draw their pistols until they are deployed ; they never 
 fire until within reach of the enemy, unless by order, and 
 they should always keep their horses in motion, even when 
 loading, to avoid becoming a mark to the enemy. They re- 
 tire by wheeling about to the left, and resume their front by 
 wheeling about to the right. When they reform again in 
 company, they return pistol and carry sword. 
 
 172 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 00000000 
 
 mm 
 
 ill 
 
 Fig. 5. Fig. 6. 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 0000 00 
 
 % 
 
 00 
 
 Fig. a 
 
 Fig. ft Fig 1(X 
 
 
 ii mm 
 
 Fig. 11. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ $& 
 
 Ficia 
 
 ft 
 
 P2 
 
 173 
 
PART 11. CAVALRfc. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 Adjutant. 
 
 First Lieutenant. 
 
 Second Lieutenant. 
 
 Chief of Squadron. 
 Lieut. Colonel. ^-^ -. 
 
 First Lieutenant. 
 
 ' «=» Saddler. 
 Z> ^* Farrier. 
 
 Junior Captain. 
 
 > Second Lieutenant. 
 
 . Saddler. 
 ' Farrier. 
 
 Quarter-Master Sergeant. 
 
 First Lieutenant. 
 
 Chief of Squadron. 
 Colonel, ^-> .- c 
 
 First Lieutenant. 
 
 • Second Lieutenant 
 
 <0 Veterinary Surjaon. 
 Second Lieutenant. 
 
 Saddler. 
 Farrier. 
 
 First Lieutenant. 
 
 •Second Lieutenant. 
 
 Chief of Squadron. 
 Major. <^> <^ 
 
 O Saddler 
 CT> •*=> Furrier. 
 
 Junior Captain. 
 
 First Lieutenant. . 
 
 : <Ts Second Lieutenant. 
 
 Sergeant Major. 
 
 Murker. 
 
 Saddler. 
 Farrier. 
 
 174 
 
 
PART II. CAVALRY. 
 
 Fia 1& Fia. 16. 
 
 //, 
 
 ■/■//l 
 
 <yr 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Fia. 21. 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
 i I I 
 
 JJJ 
 
 Fig. 18. 
 
 Fia. 19. 
 
 Fig. 20. 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 ji \ 
 
 
 LLL 
 
 175 
 
Fia. 25. 
 
 t 
 
 piHIW».)UBilll3 
 
 PART II. CAVALBY. 
 
 Fia. 26. 
 
 Fia. 27. 
 
 
 
 Fig. 28. 
 
 I JwiilWMiMH 1 atjiMlff miilW | yitamffEJiW 
 
 Fia. 35. 
 
 I H r.wHnr In ■'■■;■■ Si^gi 1 
 
 e=K«. 
 
 no 
 
PART III. 
 
 ARTILLERY TACTICS. 
 
CONTENTS OF PART THIRD. 
 
 OF THE PIECE. 
 
 Position of the men at the gun 5 
 
 To unlimbcr the gun 6 
 
 Position of the men in battery ? 
 
 To load and fire 7 
 
 To limber the gun to move to the rear 10 
 
 To limber the gun to move to the front 10 
 
 To manoeuvre with bricolos. ..- 10 
 
 To manoeuvre with horses -.13 
 
 OP THE BATTERY. 
 
 In line 13 
 
 In battery 19 
 
 Parade 19 
 
 In column of pieces 19 
 
 In column of sections ». .30 
 
 Movements 20 
 
 Movements from line ....._ . 31 
 
 No. 1. To break into column to the front _... 31 
 
 2. To break into column to the right ««r— <v 21 
 
 3. To break from the right to march to the left .,,... 23 
 
 4. To break into column in retreat 32 
 
 5. Marching in line to close intervals .-...23 
 
 6. Marching in line to open intervals .... 23 
 
 7. Being in line at closed intervals, to march in retreat «... 33 
 
 8. Marching in line to pass obstacles - .. 23 
 
 9. Passing a defile . 24 
 
 10. To march by a flank ^.. 24 
 
 11. To change front forward on first section , .'24 
 
 12. To change front to the rear on first section S3 
 
 13. To change front on centre section 26 
 
 Movements from column , 26 
 
 No. 1. To march in column, change direction and to halt 26 
 
 2. To form line to the front 27 
 
 3. To form line to the left 27 
 
 4. To form line on the right 28 
 
 5. To form line faced to the rear 23 
 
 Increase and diminution of front 29 
 
 To increase from column of pieces to column of sections .— 29 
 
 To increase from column of sections to line 29 
 
 To diminish from line to column of sections 30 
 
 To diminish from column of sections, to column of pieces „_. . . 30 
 
 Exercise of casemate guns -.-..... 30 
 
 179 
 
PRELIMINARY REMARK. 
 
 Officers of Artillery ought to be well acquainted with 
 the Infantry Tactics as well as those of the Cavalry, 
 in order that they may be capable of manoeuvring their 
 batteries in the field so as to conform thereto without 
 embarrassing the movements of the other arms. 
 
part in. 
 
 ARTILLERY. 
 
 OF THE PIECE. 
 
 The right and left of the piece, as relates to the station of 
 the men, is determined by the position of the man placed in 
 rear of the gun, and looking towards the muzzle. The re- 
 verse is the case with the limber, the right and left of which 
 is always determined by the right and left of the driver. 
 
 The squad for the service of a field-piece, is formed ii\ 
 two ranks in close order, from right to left, as follows :— 
 Chief of the piece, covered by the non-commissioned officer ; 
 No. 5, covered by No. 6 ; the gunner of the right, covered 
 by the gunner of the left ; No. 3, covered by No. 4 ; No. 
 1 , covered by No. 2. 
 
 If the squad, marching in line, halt in rear of the gun, it 
 will take post in the following manner : 
 
 SQUAD— BY LEFT FLANK, BY FILE RIGHT- 
 POSTS-MARCH. — At the word march, the squad faces to 
 the left and wheels by file to the right; when within ten 
 paces of the gun, the ranks oblique to the right and left on 
 each side of the gun, and the men post themselves as fol- 
 lows : (Fig. 1.) 
 
 The chief of the piece, on a line with the end of the pole, 
 one pace to the right, and facing the piece ; the non-com- 
 missioned officer on the left, opposite the swing-tree bar. If 
 there be a caisson, he places himself near it; No.'s 5 & 6, 
 abreast the naves of the small wheels ; the gunners abreast 
 the cascable ; No.'s 3 & 4 abreast the naves of the large 
 wheels, and No.'s 1 & 2 abreast the muzzle. The whole 
 facing the gun, on lines eighteen inches from the ends of the 
 axletrees, and dressing on No.'s 1 & 2. 
 
 Q 181 
 
6 PART III. OF THE TIECE. 
 
 No.'s 1 & 2 distribute the implements thus : — To No. 1, 
 Hie rammer, which he places in the sponge-hooks. To No. 
 2, an ammunition pouch. To No. 3, the lint-stock, port- 
 fire-stock, and portfire-case. To No. 4, the priming-wire, 
 tube-box, and ammunition-pouch. To the gunner of the 
 left, the finger-stall. To No.'s 5 & 6, each an ammunition- 
 pouch. The matrosses attached to the piece have also long 
 bricoles, which are hung from right to left over the ammu- 
 nition-pouch-belt. 
 
 If the squad arrive in front of the gun, the men take their 
 posts by inverse means, at the command, squad, by bight 
 
 FLANK, BY FILE LEFT— POSTS-MARCH. 
 
 To Unlimbcr. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 ATTENTION-UNLIMBER.— No. 5 moves to the mid- 
 dle of the pole and raises it ; the gunner of the right unhooks 
 the lashing-chain, and aided by the gunner of the left, raises 
 the trail. With twelve pounders, No.'s 3 & 4 assist the 
 gunners. 
 
 When the trail is disengaged from the limber, No.'s 5 & 6 
 advance the limber three paces, and the trail is letdown; 
 the gunners place the ammunition-box on the limber between 
 the hounds ; the gunner of the right then gives the word 
 march, at which No.'s 5 & 6 move the limber twelve paces 
 to the rear, inclining to the right, and then wheel it left- 
 about, the pole towards the gun and covering it. No. 4 
 unhooks the handspikes, gives one to No. 3, and they fix 
 tin in in the pointing-rings. No. 3 fixes the portfire to the 
 stock, and No. 1 takes the sponge from its hook. 
 
 If the piece arrive on the ground in rear of the lino which 
 it is to occupy in battery, the word is given in battery, 
 immediately after the word unlimheu. The limber is with- 
 drawn as above, and as soon as the ammunition-box is placed 
 on it, it is wheeled left-about, and passing through the inter- 
 val on the right of its piece, is moved twelve paces to the 
 rear, and again wheeled left about. As soon as the limber 
 has passed the piece the gunners go to the pointing hand- 
 spikes, and No.'s 1, 2, 3 and 4, to the wheels. The trail is 
 then turned right-about, and the men take their posts as be 
 'ore. 
 
 182 
 
PAKT III. OP THE PIECE. 
 
 Position of the Gunners and Matrosses in Battery 
 (Fig. 2.) 
 On the Left. 
 No. 2. On a line with the 
 muzzle eighteen inches, with- 
 out the rim of the wheels, fac- 
 ing the piece, with an ammu- 
 nition-pouch slung from right 
 to left. 
 
 No. 4. On a line with the 
 cascable, dressing on No. 2, 
 holding the priming- wire in 
 the right hand, the thumb 
 through the ring; the tube- 
 box buckled round the waist, 
 and an ammunition-pouch 
 hanging on the left side. 
 
 The gunner on a line with 
 the middle of the trail hand- 
 spikes, dressing by the left, 
 and wearing the finger-stall 
 on the middle finger of the 
 left hand. 
 
 No. 6, carrying an ammu- 
 nition-pouch, is with the am- 
 munition-box, and supplies 
 No. 2 with ammunition. 
 
 The non-commissioned offi- 
 cer is with the caisson, forty- 
 five paces in rear of the lim- 
 ber ; or at, and in rear of, the 
 ammunition-box, if there be 
 no caisson. 
 
 On the Right. 
 
 No. 1. On a line with tho 
 muzzle, eighteen inches with- 
 out the rim. of the wheel, fac- 
 ing the piece, holding the 
 sponge-staff horizontally with 
 both hands ; the right hand, 
 nails downwards, near the 
 rammer head; the left hand, 
 nails upwards, about two feet 
 from the sponge. 
 
 No. 3. On a line with the 
 cascable, dressing on No. 1, 
 holding the lint-stock in his 
 left hand, and the portfire- 
 stock in his right ; the port- 
 fire-case hanging on the left 
 side. 
 
 The gunner on a line with 
 the middle of the trail-hand- 
 spikes, dressing by the right. 
 
 No. 5, carrying an ammu- 
 nition-pouch, is with the cais- 
 son, near the non-commission- 
 ed officer, or with the ammu- 
 nition-box, if there be no cais- 
 son. 
 
 The chief of the piece is 
 midway between the limber 
 and the trail-handspikes, ob- 
 serving all that passes at the 
 gun, the limber and the cais- 
 son. 
 
 To Load and Fire. 
 
 ATTENTION-TO ACTION.— No. 1 steps to the left 
 
 183 
 
8 PAET III. OF THE PIECE. 
 
 with the left foot eighteen inches, throwing the weight of the 
 body on the left leg ; left -knee bent ; right leg extended ; 
 heels on a line parallel to the piece ; feet equally turned out 
 and forming something less than a right angle; sponge- 
 staff held horizontally in both hands, the right above, the 
 left below the staff; the body steady; the arms hanging 
 without contraint. 
 
 No. 2 makes a similar movement to the right, throwing 
 the weight of the body on the right foot. 
 
 No. 3 unhooks the water-bucket, places it under the end 
 of the axletree ; half faces to the left: plants his lint-stock 
 in the ground ; lights his portfire, holding the stock in the 
 right hand, fire downwards, and about four inches from the 
 ground ; arms without constraint. 
 
 No. 4 takes off the apron. 
 
 The gunner of the right steps off with the right foot, 
 places himself between the trail-handspikes, directs the piece 
 and resumes his position, stepping off with the left foot. 
 
 The gunner of the left stands fast. 
 
 No. 5 advances briskly with ammunition from the cais- 
 son, to replace No. 6. 
 
 No. 6 moves quickly with ammunition in rear of No. 2 ; 
 hands him a cartridge, and returns to the caisson to replace 
 No. 5. 
 
 LOAD. — The gunner of the left, stepping off with the 
 right foot, advances to the breech of the gun, placing the 
 left foot opposite the vent, inside the wheel, throwing the 
 weight of the body forward on the left leg, the knee bent ; 
 the right leg extended to the rear of the piece. He stops tho 
 vent with the middle finger of the left hand, at the moment 
 the sponge reaches the bottom of the bore ; presses hard 
 upon the vent till the sponge is withdrawn, and removes his 
 finger when the cartridge is inserted ; seizes the elevating 
 screw with the right hand, and gives the proper elevation ; 
 then raises himself erect on the right foot, steps back with 
 the left, and resumes his position. 
 
 No. 1 rises erect on his right leg ; raises the sponge-staff 
 horizontally as high as the chin, extending the right arm the 
 whole length, to pass the sponge over the wheel ; makes a 
 long step with the left foot, which ho places on a line with 
 the swell of the muzzle ; throws out the right foot eighteen 
 Inches to the right of the left heel, and on a line with it, the 
 
 184 
 
PART III. OP THE PIECE. 9 
 
 feet equally turned out, the body inclined to the right ; in- 
 troduces the sponge, with the left hand, into the bore of the 
 gun, pushes it to the bottom with the right, the left hand 
 sliding along the staff, raising the body erect on the left leg, 
 parallel with the piece ; casts his eye on the vent, to see that 
 it is stopped; turns the sponge two or three times at the bot- 
 tom of the bore, and then withdraws it by a uniform motion 
 with the right hand, the body again inclined to the right, 
 keeping his eye on the range of the sights of the piece ; re- 
 ceives the staff near the sponge, on the palm of the left hand, 
 with which he throws the sponge end over his right, letting 
 the staff slide through his right hand, until it comes near 
 the sponge-head, and while it is thus sliding, drops the staff 
 near the rammer-head, into the hollow of the left hand, be- 
 tween the thumb and fingers, ready to enter the rammer- 
 head into the bore. The cartridge being placed in the bore 
 by No. 2, No. 1 pushes it home with one stroke, throwing 
 the weight of his body on his right arm, to force the car- 
 tridge to the bottom of the bore, and dropping the left arm. 
 He withdraws the rammer by a smart impulse of the right 
 hand, seizing the staff with the same hand, near the ram- 
 mer-head, throwing over the sponge-head, and letting that 
 end of the staff fall into his left hand in a horizontal posi- 
 tion, at the same time resuming the position of to action, by 
 stepping back with the right foot, and bringing the left on a 
 line with the axle. 
 
 No. 2 rises on the left leg, advances the right foot even 
 with the swell of the muzzle, brings up the left, places the 
 cartridge in the bore with the left hand, and resumes the 
 position of to action, by stepping back with the left foot. 
 
 No. 4 advances with the left foot, bringing up the right, 
 pricks with the right hand, places the tube with the left, re- 
 sumes his position by stepping back with the right foot, and 
 makes the signal to No. 3, to fire, by raising his right hand 
 above his head ; at which 
 
 No. 3 raises the right arm, without bending the wrist, and 
 applies the flame of the portfire to the tube, taking care not 
 to hold it directly over the vent. 
 
 The piece being fired, is again loaded in the same man- 
 ner, by the command load. 
 
 The fire ceases by a roll of the drum, or by the command 
 to posts, at which No. 3 extinguishes the portfire, and al 
 resume the position in battery. 
 
 Q3 185 
 
10 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 
 
 To limber the piece to move to the rear, 
 ATTENTION-ADVANCE LIMBER-MARCH. — No. 
 1 places the sponge in the sponge-hooks. No. 3 hooks the 
 water-bucket. The gunners unfix the handspikes, and pass 
 them to No. 4, who, with the aid of No. 2, secures them in 
 the square ring and upon the hooks. No.'s 5 & 6 advance 
 with the limber, obliquing to the right, so that in wheeling 
 left-about, the limber may be three paces in rear of the trail. 
 The gunners take the ammunition-box from the limber and 
 place it between the flasks of the carriage, and then raise the 
 trail so that the carriage can be placed on the pintle. No.'s 
 5 & 6 back the limber, to bring the pintle under the lunette. 
 The gunner of the right hooks the lashing-chain, and all re- 
 sume their posts. 
 
 To limber the piece to move to the front. 
 
 ATTENTION-LIMBER TO THE FRONT-MARCH.- 
 No.'s 5 & 6 advance the limber three paces in front of the 
 muzzle, in such manner as that the left wheel of the limber 
 shall be on a line with the right wheel of the piece, passing 
 on the right, the gunners and matrosses stepping near the 
 flasks, to let the limber pass. As soon as it has passed, the 
 gunners step to the trail-handspikes ; the matrosses to the 
 wheels. The muzzle is then turned right-about on the right 
 wheel, No. 2 placing his feet on the lower felloes of the right 
 wheel, and supporting himself by the upper spokes. The 
 trail is fixed upon the limber as before. 
 
 To manoeuvre with Bricoles. 
 
 In manoeuvring with bricoles, it is necessary to increase 
 the number of men for each piece. Two are therefore ad- 
 ded to a six-pounder, four to a howitzer, and six to a twelve- 
 pounder. These auxiliaries arc numbered 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 
 12. 
 
 The piece being on its limber, the auxiliaries are stationed 
 on each side of it, after the matrosses and towards the pole, 
 one pace distant from each other, and provided with short- 
 ened bricoles. The matrosses have their bricoles at full 
 length. 
 
 FORWARD.— (Fig. 3.)— The gunner of the left detach- 
 es a handspike, and takes it to the end of the pole, where, 
 
 166 
 
PART III. OF THE PIECE. 11 
 
 assisted by the gunner of the right, he forms two loops with 
 the breast-chains, through which he introduces the hand- 
 spike across the pole horizontally. Both gunners place them- 
 selves behind this handspike, and are assisted by No.'s 5 & 
 6, who are stationed outside of them, to propel the piece. 
 No.'s 1 & 2 hook their bricoles to the washer-hooks, 3 & 4 
 to the retreat-hooks. The non-commissioned officer, when 
 there is no caisson, is on the left of the chase. The auxil- 
 iaries, No.'s 7 & 8, form on, and in rear of 1 & 2 — 9 & 10 
 on 3 & 4. No.'s 11 & 12 are on each side of the chase. 
 Those on the right, hook with the right hand — those on the 
 left, with the left hand. 
 
 MARCH. — All press forward, holding the bricole in the 
 hand next the piece. 
 
 HALT. — All stand fast, keeping the bricoles stretched. 
 
 TO POSTS.— The men on the right turn to the left, and 
 unhook with the left hand ; those on the left perform the 
 same movement in an inverse manner ; the gunner of the 
 left replaces the handspike, and all resume their posts. 
 
 The commands unlimber and in battery, are executed 
 in the manner already prescribed. The auxiliaries follow 
 the limber, and take post on each side of the pole, one pace 
 from each other. 
 
 Being in battery, to advance and retreat. 
 
 FORWARD.— (Fig. 4.)— The gunners seize the trail- 
 handspikes with both hands : they are assisted by the non- 
 commissioned officer, who is between them. No.'s 1 & 2 
 hook their bricoles to the advancing hooks — 3 & 4 to the 
 washer-hooks : those on the right, with the left hand — those 
 on the left, with the right hand. No. 1 carries the sponge- 
 staff horizontally in the right hand, the sponge-head forward. 
 No.'s 5 & 6 are posted at the end of the pole of the limber, 
 and with it follow the movements of the piece. No.'s 7 & 
 8 double on 1 & 2, and 9 & 10 on 3 6c 4. No.'s 11 & 12 
 are at the supporting handspikes. 
 
 MARCH. — The men at the handspikes raise the trail ; 
 those with bricoles draw with spirit, holding the trace with 
 the hand next the piece. No.'s 5 & 6 conduct the limber, 
 preserving the prescribed distance from the piece. 
 
 HALT. — The trail is lowered to the ground, and the bri- 
 coles extended. 
 
 187 
 
12 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 
 
 TO POSTS. — The men face outward from the piece, and 
 unhook bricoles ; those on the right, with the right hand — 
 those on the left, with the left hand, and all resume their 
 posts. 
 
 RETREAT.— (Fig. 5.)— The gunners seize the trail- 
 handspikes with one hand, facing to the rear. The non- 
 commissioned officer is on the left of the muzzle. No.'s 1 
 & 2 hook to the washer-hooks, 3 & 4 to the retreat-hooks, 
 those on the right, with the right hand — those on the left 
 with the left hand. No.'s 5 & 6 wheel the limber left-about, 
 to precede the piece. No.'s 7 & 8 double on 1 & 2, and 9 
 & 10 on 3 & 4. No.'s 11 & 12 are at the supporting hand- 
 spikes. 
 
 TO POSTS.— The men face outwards: those on the 
 right unhook with the left hand — those on the left, with the 
 right hand. No.'s 5 & G wheel the limber left-about, the 
 pole towards the piece, and all resume their posts. 
 
 FRONT-FACE.— All face to the front, No.'s 1 & 2 
 abreast the muzzle, 3 & 4 abreast the naves, the gunners 
 abreast the cascable, 5 & 6 abreast the end of the pole, the 
 auxiliaries in their rear, one pace from each other; the non- 
 commissioned officer in rear of the ammunition-box. No. 1 
 carries the sponge horizontally in the right hand. 
 
 If the piece be on the limber, the word rear-face is sub- 
 stituted for FRONT-FACE. 
 
 In descending a hill, it may be necessary to support the 
 piece in retreat, to prevent a too rapid descent ; in such case 
 the chief of the piece gives the words, No.'s 1 and 2, (or as 
 many as necessary) surroRT-iN retreat. Those desig- 
 nated take the bricolc from the shoulder. No.'s 1 & 2 hook 
 to the advance-hooks, the others at the washer-hooks, hold- 
 ing the straps of the bricoles in the hand. 
 
 To ?nanceuvre with Horses. 
 
 Four horses arc required for the piece, and the same num- 
 ber for the caisson. In the movement of the piece with horses, 
 the right and left implies that side as relates to the drivers. 
 
 The piece is supposed to be on its limber, with its caisson 
 in rear, and to be served by a squad either on horse or foot. 
 
 The men on foot take post in the manner already pre- 
 scribed, except the chief of the piece and the non-commission- 
 od officer, tho former is on the left of the drivers of th« 
 
 188 
 
PART III. OF THE PIECE. 13 
 
 leading horses of the gun, the latter in a corresponding po- 
 sition at the caisson. 
 
 If the squad be mounted, it is formed in two ranks in rear 
 of the piece. At the word to posts-marcii it moves up to 
 within one pace of the muzzle ; the chief of the piece takes 
 post on the left of the driver of the leaders and the non- 
 -commissioned officer at the caisson, as above. Two auxili- 
 aries are added to the squad in horse artillery, to hold the 
 horses ; their position is in the centre of each rank of the 
 
 FORWARD-MARCH.— The drivers urge their horses, 
 and the piece advances followed by its caisson, the leading 
 horses of which are one pace from the muzzle- of the piece; 
 or, in horse artillery, one pace from the rear-rank of the 
 squad. 
 
 To prepare for manoeuvring. (Fig. 6.) 
 
 HALT-UNLIMBER-F1X-PROLONGE.— The limber 
 being withdrawn the gunners uncoil the prolonge : the gun- 
 ner of the left passes the pointed end downwards through the 
 right staple-ring of the limber, then under the guides, and 
 upwards through the left staple-ring, drawing it so that the 
 ring of the prolonge, twenty-four feet from the key, may be 
 under the centre of the sweep-bar, and securing it under the 
 guides with the prolonge knot. The gunner of the right 
 passes the key (or T) through the lashing ring in the trail- 
 transom, draws it up, and secures it in the prolonge ring 
 under the sweep-bar. The prolonge is then double, or twelve 
 feet long, which is the proper length for firing in retreat or 
 advance. 
 
 In horse artillery, at the word t/nlmber, the gunner of 
 the right gives the word dismount, when all, except the two 
 auxiliaries, dismount ; each man draws the curb>-reins through 
 the loop of the martingale, passing the end under the cloak- 
 strap near the left knee, gives the snaffle-reins to the auxili- 
 aries, and takes his post as in foot artillery. When the chief 
 of the piece and the non-commissioned officer dismount, the 
 former gives his horse to one of the drivers of the piece and 
 the latter to one of the drivers of the caisson. 
 
 The prolonge being fixed, the gunner of the right gives 
 fhe word mount, when all mount and take post in rear of 
 he piece. 
 
 1S9 
 
14 FART III. OF THE PIECE. 
 
 If the prolonge is to be fixed for crossing a ditch, the com- 
 mand is given-Fix prolonge for passing a ditch — The 
 key is secured in the lashing-ring, and the prolonge is at its 
 full length, twenty-four feet. 
 
 To coil the prolonge, the command is given-uNFix and 
 coil pkolonge-ad vance limber. — The gunner of the right 
 disengages the key from the lashing-ring; the gunner of the 
 left coils the prolonge round the end of the hounds ; the 
 drivers rein back their horses, the chief of the piece directing 
 so that the trail may pass over the pintle, and the piece is 
 limbered. 
 
 The prolonge must be always uncoiled and fixed before 
 the piece arrives in line. 
 
 To change direction. 
 
 A piece manoeuvring with the prolonge may be wheel- 
 ed on either a moveable or fixed pivot. In the first case, the 
 prolonge is stretched and the piece is turned advancing. In 
 the second, the prolonge is slackened by backing the wheel 
 horses, which are then turned short to enter the new direction. 
 
 PIECE-LEFT WHEEL-MARCH.— The driver of the 
 hading horses takes the new direction, and when the wheel 
 is completed, the chief gives the word forward-march. 
 
 The caisson wheels at the same point where its piece had 
 wheeled, the non-commissioned officer giving the words 
 co isson-left wheel-march. 
 
 Wheeling to the right is performed on the same principle. 
 
 All wheels of the half circle are made to the left when 
 practicable* 
 
 PIECE-LEFT-ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH.— The lead. 
 in:,' horses arc wheeled loft-about. The wheel-horses back 
 the limber, and wheel left-about, the wheel of the limber 
 passing over the prolonge. At the word wheel, the men 
 on the right of the piece, face to the right, and passing the 
 muzzle, move round and form in rear of the men on the 
 left. — The wheel being completed, the men on the left, face 
 to the left, pass the muzzle, and resume their posts on the 
 left of the piece. 
 
 To wheel the caisson left-about, it is first wheeled to the 
 left, advances twelve paces, then wheels again to the left and 
 obliques in the new direction. A piece on its limber wheels 
 in the same manner. 
 
 190 
 
TART III. OF THE riECE. 15 
 
 In Line and in Battery. 
 
 A piece is in line, when the horses' heads are towards the 
 enemy, and the leading horses of the caisson are forty-five 
 paces from the muzzle of the gun. A piece is in battery 
 when its muzzle is towards the enemy, the horses' heads to 
 the rear, the leading horses of the piece forty-five paces from 
 the caisson. 
 
 Being in Line, to form in Battery. 
 
 PIECE-LEFT- ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH.— The piece 
 is wheeled left-about on a fixed pivot, and the men take their 
 posts as in to action. 
 
 In horse-artillery, at the word wheel, the gunner of the 
 right gives the word dismount, and the horses are led six 
 paces in rear of the leaders of the piece, facing the enemy. 
 
 If, when marching in column of route, it become necessary 
 to form battery, the caisson immediately wheels left-about, 
 and moves to its proper distance in rear, where it again wheels 
 left-about. 
 
 If the piece were on its limber, it would oblique to the 
 right before wheeling, so as not to lose its direction. 
 
 To advance, from Battery. 
 
 FORWARD-PIECE, LEFT- \ The piece wheels left. 
 
 ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH. $ about ; the caisson closes 
 on its piece and both move forward. 
 
 In horse-artillery the words trot-march are given, and if 
 the distance to advance be considerable, the gunner of the 
 right gives the word mount. 
 
 Being in Battery to fire to the Bear. 
 
 FIRE TO THE REAR— PIECE, LEFT-ABOUT 
 WHEEL-MARCH.— The piece is wheeled rapidly left- 
 about ; the caisson advances at a trot, passes the piece four 
 paces to the right, obliques to the left, and takes its position. 
 As soon as it has passed the firing commences. 
 
 In horse-artillery, the men having charge of the horses 
 move round with them, rapidly, in front of the horses of the 
 piece. 
 
 Being in March, to fire to the Rear. 
 
 FIRE TO THE REAR— PIECE HALT-TO ACTION. 
 —The piece halts, and the men take their posts as in to ac- 
 
 191 
 
1ft PART III. OF THE PIECE. 
 
 Hon. The caisson, passing four paces on the right of the 
 piece, advances at a trot to its proper distance. 
 
 In horse-artillery, at the word halt, the gunner of tho 
 right gives the words-squad, foi'ward, trot-march. — The 
 squad moves six paces in front of the leaders of the piece, 
 and the gunner adds halt-dismount, when the men take their 
 posts at the gun. 
 
 Being in March to form line to the Left. 
 
 LEFT INTO LINE— PIECE, LEFT-CAISSON RIGHT 
 — "WHEEL-MARCH. — At tho word march, the piece 
 wheels to the left on a fixed pivot ; the caisson wheels to the 
 right, moves sixty paces in rear of the piece, then wheels to 
 the left, moves on until on a line with the piece, and wheels 
 again to the left, covering the piece at forty-five paces. 
 
 The formation to the right is made hy inverse means. 
 
 Being in March, to form Battery to the Left. 
 BY INVERSION-LEFT INTO BATTERY. ) Thepirce 
 PIECE, RIGHT WHEEL-jCAISSON, Vwheelsto 
 
 RIGHT OBLIQUE-MA 1UH— Vhe right 
 
 on a fixed pivot ; the caisson obliques to the right, and moves 
 forty-five paces in rear of the piece. 
 
 In horse-artillery, the gunner of the right gives the words 
 squad, left-half wheel, followed hy right-half wheel, and 
 when clear of the piece, forward, right-wheel, to take post 
 in front of the lenders ; when there he adds, right about 
 ■wheel, halt, dismount. 
 
 If there l>c not sufficient space on the right for this move- 
 ment, or if manoeuvring with a corps, twenty paces in rear 
 of the line on which the piece is to form battery, the com- 
 mand is given-LEFT into hattery-pieck, i.eft-caisso.v, 
 RIQHT wiiki:i.-maiuh. — The pice- wheels to the left, nnd 
 advances in that direction until it has passed ten paces beyond 
 the line, when the chief gives the words-])/ re r-h ft -about 
 wheel-march — the piece wheels left-about and halts when 
 the middle of the prolongc is on the line of formation. The 
 caisson after wheeling to the right, moves to its proper dis- 
 tance in rear, obliquing to the right and wheeling left-about. 
 
 In horse-artillery, the squad halts and dismounts when the 
 piece wheels to the left. 
 
 Bnttery may bo formed to the right by similar movement. 
 
 192 
 
TART III. OF THE BATTERY. 17 
 
 To March in Retreat. 
 
 This differs from the march to the front only by the caisson 
 preceding, instead of following the piece. If it be necessary 
 to fire while retreating, the command is given, halt-to ac- 
 tion, and the fire commences. In horse-artillery, the squad 
 dismounts, and the horses are led round in front of the leaders. 
 
 OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 Six pieces, each with its caisson, are here supposed to con 
 stitute a battery. The pieces may be six or twelve-pounders, 
 or twenty- four-pounder howitzers ; or they may be mixed. 
 The pieces and caissons are numbered from right to left, and 
 they should not, except in extraordinary cases, be inverted. 
 Each chief, in giving the word for a movement, designates 
 his piece by its number. 
 
 The battery is divided into three sections, each section 
 consisting of two pieees with their caissons, numbered from 
 right to left. 
 
 The battery is served by a company consisting of a cap- 
 tain, four subalterns, and a certain number of non-commis- 
 sioned officers and privates. The captain commands the bat- 
 tery. Three subalterns (or in case of deficiency, senior 
 sergeants) command sections — the senior the first section, 
 the next the third section, and the next the second section. 
 The junior subaltern commands the line of caissons, and is 
 called officer of the train. 
 
 A non-commissioned officer has charge of each pieee and 
 of each caisson, and directs their movements ; the senior 
 non-commissioned officer of each section of caissons, is the 
 chief of that section. Two non-commissioned officers act 
 as guides or markers. 
 
 The .right and left of the battery, whether in line or in 
 
 battery, as always the same, and is determined by standing 
 
 in front of the battery, with the back towards the pieces ; in 
 
 manoeuvring the right and left is determined by the position 
 
 R 193 
 
18 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 of the drivers. Wlieeling-abovt is always to the left, by 
 pieces. 
 
 Alignments are made on the drivers of the wheel-horses ; 
 for parade, on the axletrees of the pieces. 
 
 In line, the horses of the caissons front, as those of the 
 pieces ; in battery, the reverse, except when formed in retreat 
 or firing to the rear. 
 
 In advancing, each piece precedes its caisson ; in retreat, 
 each caisson precedes its piece ; and what is executed by the 
 piece in the first case, applies to the caisson in the second. 
 In either case, the right or left may be in front. 
 
 The movements of the caissons are regulated by those of 
 the piece, and by the orders of the officer of the train. 
 
 For manoeuvring, the battery is formed either in line or 
 in column of sections. Column of pieces is never used, but 
 in passing a defile, or on a march, or moving into or out of 
 park. 
 
 A piece, or caisson, passing another, always moves to the 
 right of the one passed. 
 
 The prolonge is always used when manoeuvring m the 
 presence of an enemy, and in the firings ; but when it is not 
 necessary to form in batter;/, the pieces should be limbered. 
 The words of command are the same in both cases. 
 
 A piece with four horses, and its prolonge extended, occu- 
 pies forty-lour feet, and this interval must be preserved be- 
 tween the pieces in line. 
 
 When the right is in front, the guide is on the left ; the 
 reverse is the case wli«n the left is in front. 
 
 In Line. (Fig. 7.) 
 
 The pieces arc aligned with intervals between them equal 
 to the length of the piece, which vary according to the cali- 
 bers, the number of horses, and as the pieces are limbered, 
 or have their prolongcs fixed. 
 
 The caissons are aligned in rear of their pieces, the horses' 
 heads towards the pieces ; the distance between the two lines 
 being twice the length of the piece, reckoning from the heads 
 of the leaders of the caissons to ihe muzzles of the pieces. 
 
 The captain is in the centre, twelve paces in front of the 
 leading horses ; the chiefs of sections between the pieces of 
 their sections, six paces in front of the leading horses ; tho 
 ihiefs of pieces one pace in front of the leaders of their 
 
 194 
 
PART III. OF TIIE BATTERY. 19 
 
 pieces ; the gunners and matrosses at their posts on the right 
 and left of their pieces ; — in horse-artillery they are mount- 
 ed and formed in two ranks, four paces in rear of the muz- 
 zles of their pieces : the officer of the train, in the centre of the 
 line of caissons, twelve paces in front of the leading horses ; 
 the chiefs of caissons, one pace in front of their caissons ; 
 the music four paces on the right, and in rear of, the muzzle 
 of the first piece. 
 
 The formation in line in retreat, is the same as in line to 
 the front, except that, in horse-artillery, the mounted squads 
 are four paces in front of the chiefs of their pieces. 
 
 In Battery. (Fig. 8.) 
 
 The heads of the horses of the pieces are to the rear, the 
 -leaders forty-five paces from the caissons. 
 
 The captain is in centre of the battery, eight paces in front 
 of the leading horses ; the chiefs of sections, in centre of 
 their sections, on a line with the limbers ; the chiefs of pieces, 
 midway between the limbers and the trails of their pieces ; 
 the gunners and matrosses, (foot and horse,) at their posts, 
 on the right and left of their pieces ; the horses of the squads, 
 opposite their pieces, midway between the pieces and the 
 caissons ; the officer of the train, opposite the centre of the 
 caissons, eight paces in front of the leading horses ; the 
 chiefs of caissons, at their caissons ; the music, four paces 
 beyond the right flank of the battery, and midway between 
 ihe pieces and caissons. 
 
 Parade. 
 
 The battery is drawn up in line, generally with the pieces 
 on their limbers. 
 
 The captain and chiefs of sections are at their posts in line. 
 The gunners and matrosses, whether foot or horse, are form- 
 ed in squads twelve paces in rear of the muzzles of the 
 guns ; the chief of each piece on the right of his squad. The 
 music are on a line with the squads, four paces beyond the 
 right flank of the battery. 
 
 In Column (right in front.) 
 Column of pieces. 
 Each caisson follows its piece, the leaders of the former, 
 Dne pace from the muzzle of the latter. In horse-artillery, 
 
 195 
 
20 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 the mounted squads are one pace from the muzzles of 
 their pieces, and the leaders of the caissons one pace in their 
 rear. 
 
 The captain is on the left, abreast the centre of the co- 
 lumn ; the officer of the train on the right of the column, 
 abreast the captain ; the chief of the first section, at the 
 head of the column, cne pace in front of the leaders ; the 
 chiefs of other sections, four paces from the left of the cen- 
 tre of their sections ; the chiefs of pieces, by the side of the 
 drivers of the leading horses of their pieces ; the chiefs of 
 caissons, on the right of the column, by the side of their 
 caissons; the guides, one by the side of the driver of the 
 leaders of the first piece, the other in rear of the last caisson; 
 the music six paces in front of the head of the column. 
 
 Column of Sections. 
 
 In foot-artillery, each carriage is six paces from the one 
 which precedes it, measuring from the leaders to the muzzle 
 of the gun, or rear of the caisson ; in horse-artillery, the 
 same distance as in column of pieces. 
 
 The chief of the first section, is two paces in advance of 
 the centre of his section ; the chiefs of the other sections, in 
 the centre of their sections, abreast the drivers of the leaders 
 of their pieces; the chiefs of pieces of the first section, in 
 front of their leaders; the chiefs of caissons on the right of 
 the drivers of their leaders ; the guides abreast of the chiefs 
 of the leading pieces, two paces outside the horses ; the one 
 on the left is charged with the direction of the column, the 
 other preserves the proper distance between the files of pieces. 
 All the other officers, non-commissioned officers, matrosscs, 
 and music, are placed as in column of pieres. 
 
 In marching in retreat, the chiefs of sections and the 
 guides take the same positions relatively to the caissons, 
 which they occupy in regard to the pieces advancing. 
 
 Movements. 
 
 The following movements an- laid down as performed from 
 the right; but they may be performed from the left, accord 
 ing to the same principles. 
 
 190 
 
TABT III. OF THE BATTER'S 21 
 
 Movements from Line. No. 1. 
 
 To break into column to the front. (Fig. 9.) 
 
 rjUY , m ,..„ -• S ON FIRST SECTION, FRONT 
 Commanding officer, j INTQ COLUM fc. 
 
 C Caissons forward, trot, march, the 
 
 Officer of train, < caissons, and in horse-artillery, the 
 ( squads, close on their pieces.* 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section forward, guide left. 
 
 Chiefs of other sections — Section right oblique. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- ) ju arch 
 peated by chiefs of sections, $ 
 
 On the word march, the first section, followed by its 
 caissons, moves to the front ; the other sections oblique to 
 the right and enter the column, each in rear of the one which 
 precedes it; as soon as they are in column, each chief gives 
 the words forward, guide left. 
 
 To break into column of pieces, the same means and com- 
 mands are observed, substituting the word piece for section. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Line (Fio. 10.) 
 
 To break into column to the right. 
 
 n ,. ~ < BY SECTIONS, RIGHT INTO 
 
 Commanding officer, ^ C0LUM N. 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons, forward, trot, march 
 
 Chiefs of sections — Section, right wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- ) MARCIL 
 peated by chiefs of sections, ^ 
 
 On the word march, the sections wheel to the right on 
 fixed pivots, and move forward, receiving from the command- 
 ing officer the words forward, guide left ; the caissons 
 wheel a little before arrriving at the points where the pieces 
 wheeled, and arrange themselves in column. 
 
 To break into column of pieces, the same commands are 
 used, substituting pieces for sections ; the pieces wheel on 
 moveable pivots, in succession, as each has its distance from 
 the one which precedes it. 
 
 * This movement for caissons and squads is the same for all formations in 
 column. 
 
 R2 197 
 
22 
 
 OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Line. 
 To break from the right to march to the left. (Fig. 11.) 
 
 ) BY SECTIONS, BREAK FROM 
 
 Commanding officer, V THE RIGHT TO MARCH TO 
 S THE LEFT. 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons forward, trot, march. 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section forward, guide left. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- ) MARCH . 
 cd by chief of 1st section, $ 
 
 On the word march, the first section, followed by its 
 caissons, moves forward thirty paces, then wheels to the left 
 and prolongs its direction : the other sections execute the 
 same movement in succession, as each has its distance from 
 the one which precedes it. 
 
 The movement is executed by pieces, in the same manner 
 and by the same commands, substituting the word pieces 
 
 for SECTIONS. 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Line. 
 To break into column in retreat. (Fig. 12.) 
 
 Commanding officer-PIECES AND CAISSONS, LEFT 
 ABOUT WHEEL, MARCH. The pieces and caissons, and 
 in horse-artillery, the squads, wheel left-about. 
 
 n .;' - ( ON THIRD SECTION, IN 
 
 Commanding officer, j RETREAT INT0 COLUMN. 
 
 Chiefs of sections — Pieces, forward, trot, inarch. The 
 pieces, and in horse-artillery, the squads, close on the caissons. 
 
 Chief of .*iil section — Third section, in re/rc at, guide right. 
 
 Chief of other sections — Section, right oblique. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- ) ,. .,,,,,, 
 peated by chiefs of sections, } 
 
 On the word march, the caissons of, the third section 
 followed by their pieces, move forward ; the caissons of the 
 other sections, followed by their pieces, form into column by 
 commands and movements similar to those used in forming 
 to the front into column. 
 
 This movement is executed by pieces in the same manner 
 and by the same commands, substituting the words on sixth 
 
 PIECE, for ON THIRD SECTION. 
 
 198 
 
TART III. OP THE BATTERY. 23 
 
 Movement No. 5, from Line. 
 Marching in line, to close intervals. 
 
 t ON ( ) PIECE, TO ( ) 
 
 Commanding officer, 1 PACES CLOSE INTER VALS- 
 
 ( MARCH. 
 On the word march, the pieces oblique towards the one 
 named, to the distance ordered, when they resume the direct 
 march, by commands of their chiefs. 
 
 Movement No. 6, from Line. 
 
 To open intervals. 
 
 n ,. „ S °N (— ) PIECE-OPEN IN- 
 
 Commanding officer, j TERVA LS-MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, each piece obliques from the one 
 named, to resume its proper interval : the caissons execute 
 the same movement, when they arrive at the same place. 
 
 Movement No. 7, from Line. 
 
 Being in line at closed intervals, to march in retreat. 
 
 r™™,^;™ nffl^, S IN RETREAT, EVEN PIECES 
 Commanding officer, J Am) CAISS0 NS, FORWARD. 
 
 The even pieces and caissons move forward until they 
 have unmasked the odd pieces and caissons ; the command- 
 ing officer then gives the words-PiECEs and caissons, left 
 -about wheel-march, when the whole wheel left-about, 
 and the even numbers resume their places in line. 
 
 Movement No. 8, from Line. 
 Marching in line, to pass obstacles. (Fig. 1 3.) 
 
 Commaodingofficer,^^),™ 013 <» SEC ™*> 
 
 If it be a piece, the chief of the section of the piece named, 
 halts the piece, and its caisson closes on it ; when the line 
 of caissons arrives abreast of the piece, the chief of the sec- 
 tion gives the words — (such) pi.ece, right (or left) oblique- 
 march, and the piece, followed by its caisson, obliques in 
 rear of the other piece of its section. 
 
 If the obstacle present itself before a section, the chief of 
 the named section causes his section to halt until the line of 
 caissons is abreast with his pieces ; he then obliques his see- 
 
 199 
 
24 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 tion in rear of the centre section, if it be one of the wings ; 
 or in rear of the right section, if it be the centre one. 
 
 The obstacle being passed, the commanding officer orders, 
 (such) piece (or section) into line ; on which the chief 
 of the section gives the words — (such) piece (or section) left 
 (or right) oblique-march, and the piece or section, quicken- 
 ing its pace, moves into line. 
 
 Movement No. 9, from Line. 
 Passing a defile. 
 This is done in either advancing or retreating, by a co- 
 lumn of sections or pieces, according to the width of the 
 defile, and either by the right or left flank ; tho command 
 being given — by sections (or tieces) from the right (or 
 left) flank, pass the defile-march. 
 
 The defile being passed, the battery or line is reformed by 
 one of the means prescribed in movements from column. 
 
 Movement No. 10, from Line. 
 To march by a funk. 
 
 C PIECES AND CAISSONS, 
 Commanding ofiicer, 2 RIGHT (or LEFT) WHEEL- 
 
 ( MARCH-FORWARD. 
 On the word march, each piece and caisson wheels to the 
 light, (or left,) on a fixed pivot ; in horse-artillery, the squads 
 also wheel to the right, (or left,) and form a third column be- 
 tween the pieces and caissons, abreast of the muzzles of their 
 pieces. On the word forward, the whole move forward to- 
 gether, the pieces close on each other, and the caissons march 
 abreast of their pieces. The chiefs of sections and of caissons 
 march on the flank of the column, except the chief of the 
 leading section, who is at its head ; the chief of the leading 
 piece in front of the leading horses of his piece. 
 
 To resume the line, the command is given — pieces and 
 caissons left (or right) wheel-march. 
 
 Movement No. 1 ] , from Line. 
 
 To change front forward on first section. (Fio. 14.) 
 
 n Aint .^„„ S CHANGE FRONT FORWARD 
 
 Command.ngofficer,J ON piRST SECTIONi 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section, right-wheel. 
 Chief* of other sections — Pieces, right-oblique. 
 
 200 
 
PART III. OP THE BATTERY. 25 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons, left-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
 -officer of train — MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the first section wheels to the right 
 on a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new 
 line; the other pieces arrive in succession on the line, and 
 are dressed by the chiefs of sections on the first section. 
 The caissons, except the sixth, wheel to the left; the sixth 
 moves to the front, and the others wheel to the right, in suc- 
 cession, as they arrive on the ground which the sixth occu- 
 pied ; when each arrives opposite its piece, the officer of the 
 train gives the words, caissons, right-wheel-march, for- 
 ward, guide-right halt, right-dress. 
 
 The change of front forward on the third section is exe- 
 cuted in the same manner, substituting in the commands — 
 left for right, and reciprocally. 
 
 Movement No. 12, from Line. 
 
 To change front to the rear on first section. (Fig. 15.) 
 
 n ,. « S CHANGE FRONT TO THE 
 
 Commanding officer, | REAR QN FIRgT SECTION . 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section, left-wheel. 
 
 Chiefs of other sections— Pieces, left-about-wheel. 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons, left-about-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
 officer of train— MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the first section wheels to the left on 
 a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new align- 
 ment ; • the other pieces having wheeled about, oblique to the 
 left, pass the new line a few paces, wheel left-about, and are 
 aligned on the first section, by commands of their chiefs of 
 sections. The caissons having wheeled about, march to the 
 rear twice the length of a piece, when the officer of train 
 gives the words — caissons, left wheel— march; when the head 
 of the column has marched the length of a piece, he adds, 
 head of column-left ; and when each caisson is opposite its 
 piece, caissons, left wheel-march, followed by halt, right- 
 dress. 
 
 The change of front to the rear on the third section, is 
 executed according to the same principles. 
 
 201 
 
26 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 
 
 Movement No. 13, from Line. 
 To change front on centre section. (Fig. 16.) 
 
 ( CHANGE FRONT ON SECOND 
 
 Commanding officer, 2 SECTION— RIGHT W1NG- 
 ( FORWARD. 
 
 Chief of 2d section — Section, left-wheel. 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Pieces, left— oblique. 
 
 Chief of 3d section — Pieces, left-about-wheel. 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons, right-wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
 officer of train— MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the second section wheels to the left 
 on a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new 
 alignment ; the first section arranges itself on the line of the 
 second ; the pieces of the third section having wheeled about, 
 oblique to the left, pass the new line a few paces, wheel left- 
 about, and are aligned on the second section, by command 
 of their chief of section. All the caissons, except the first 
 wheel to the right ; the first moves forward, the others wheei 
 to the left in succession, as they arrive on the ground which 
 the first occupied, and as each arrives opposite its piece, the 
 officer of the train gives the words, caissons, left wheel- 
 march, followed by halt, right-dress. 
 
 The change of front to the right on the second section, is 
 executed by similar means and commands. 
 
 Movements from Column. No. 1. 
 
 To march in column, change direction in marching, and 
 to halt the column. 
 
 To put the column in march, the commanding officer gives 
 the words — COLUMN, forward, ouidb left (or right)- 
 m \u< u. On the word MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
 tions, the column moves forward. In column of pieces, tho 
 guide is not mentioned in the command. 
 
 If while in march, the column is to change direction by 
 the head, the commanding officer gives the words — head of 
 i <>T imn, incur (or li:kt), and the chief of the leading sec- 
 tion adds, section, right (or lefty-wheel. The section wheels 
 to the right (or left) on a moveable pivot, the pivot-piece de- 
 scribing an arc of a circle in such manner as to clear tho 
 wheeling point. In foot-artillery, the pivot-piece slackens 
 
 202 
 
PART III. OF TIIE BATTERY. 27 
 
 its pace ; in horse-artillery, the wheeling flank trots. The 
 wheel being completed, the chief of the leading section gives 
 the word forward, and the section resumes the direct march. 
 The following sections wheel on the same ground at which 
 the first wheeled, by command of their chiefs. A column 
 by pieces is wheeled in the same manner. 
 
 To halt the column, the commanding officer gives the 
 words, column-halt, the word halt being repeated by the 
 chiefs of sections. 
 
 Movement No. 2, from Column. 
 To form line to the front. (Fig. 17 
 
 Commanding officer— FRONT INTO LINE. 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section-forward. 
 
 Chiefs of other sections — Section, left-oblique. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated by same chiefs — MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the first section moves forward and 
 is established on the line. The other sections oblique to the 
 left, until they have gained their respective intervals, when 
 they move to the front and are aligned on the first section. 
 
 A column by pieces forms line to the front by similar 
 commands and means. 
 
 Movement No. 3, from Column. 
 To form line to the left. (Fig. 18.) 
 
 Commanding officer— LEFT INTO LINE. 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons, right wheel. 
 
 Chiefs of sections — Section, left wheel. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeated by > ivf arph 
 chiefs of sections and officer of train, \ 
 
 On the word march, each section wheels to the left on a 
 fixed pivot, and, when the wheel is completed, each chief 
 gives the words, section, halt, right dress; the caissons 
 wheel to the right by caissons, and march in separate and 
 parallel columns; when the head of each has marched twenty 
 paces, the officer of the train gives the words, heads of 
 columns, left, and when each caisson is opposite its piece, 
 he adds, caissons, left wheel, halt, right dress. 
 
 A column by pieces forms line to the left by similar com- 
 mands and means : the pieces wheeling in succession, as 
 each arrives opposite the place it is to occupy in line. 
 
 203 
 
28 PART III. OF THE BATTERY^ 
 
 Movement No. 4, from Column. 
 To form line on the right. (Fig. 19.) 
 
 Commanding officer— ON RIGHT INTO LINE, GUIDE 
 RIGHT-MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the chief of first section gives the 
 words- section, right wheel, followed by forward, guide 
 right, and when his section has marched twenty paces, he 
 a&ds-section, halt, right dress. The chief of first section 
 of caissons, gives the words, caissons, left wheel, trot, march ; 
 and each caisson wheels to the left ; when the leading one 
 has marched twenty paces, the chief gives the words, head 
 of column— right, and when the caissons are opposite their 
 pieces, caissons, right wheel, march, followed by halt, right- 
 dress. 
 
 The second section continues to move forward until 
 abreast of the point it is to occupy in line, when it wheels 
 to the right in the manner prescribed for the first section, and 
 is aligned on that section ; the caissons perform the same 
 movement prescribed for fne caissons of the first section. 
 The third section executes what is prescribed for the second. 
 
 In column by pieces, this movement is executed by simi- 
 lar commands and means. 
 
 Movement No. 5 from Column. 
 To form line, faced to the rear. (Fio. 20.) 
 
 Commanding officer— INTO LINE, FACED TO THE 
 REAR-ODD PIECES FORWARD. Each odd piece moves 
 up abreast of the even piece of the section immediately be- 
 fore it. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- } PIECES RIGHT OBLIQUE 
 peated by chiefs of sections, \ -MARCH. 
 
 On the word march, the first piece followed by its caisson, 
 moves forward to the line ; the piece then wheels left-about, 
 and its caisson, passing to the right, marches to the prescribed 
 distance in rear, where it wheels left-about and covers its 
 piece. Each of the other pieces obliquing to the right, 
 marches direct to the point it is to occupy in line, and when 
 there, wheels left-about, and is aligned on those already es- 
 tablished. The caissons follow their pieces, pass them on the 
 right, move to their places in line, and then wheel left-about. 
 
 204 
 
PAKT III. OF THE BATTERY. 29 
 
 In column by pieces this movement is executed by similar 
 means and commands. 
 
 INCREASE AND DIMINUTION OF FRONT. 
 
 TO INCREASE. 
 
 From column of pieces, to column of sections. 
 
 Commanding officer, repeat- i FORM > MiDf , u 
 ed by chief of 1st section, \ SECTIONS- \ MAK <- H - 
 
 On the word march, the second piece, followed by its 
 caisson, moves up abreast of the first piece, the length of a 
 piece on its left ; when the third piece arrives on the ground 
 where the first section was formed, the chief of the second 
 section, forms his section in the same manner, and by the 
 same commands ; and so with the third section. In foot- 
 artillery the even pieces lengthen the step, and the head of 
 the column slackens the pace : in horse-artillery, the chiefs 
 of the second and third sections give the word trot, and the 
 Head of the column does not alter its pace. 
 
 The sections being formed, the commanding officer gives 
 Ihe words guide left, and the whole resume the ordinarv 
 pace. 
 
 From Column of Sections to Line. 
 
 Commanding officer— FRONT INTO LINE. 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section, forward, guide right. 
 
 Chiefs of other sections — Section-left oblique. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- > ,, ARCH 
 peated by chiefs of sections, $ 
 
 On the word march, the first section continues to move 
 forward, the other sections obliquo to the left until opposite 
 their intervals, when their chiefs give the word forward, and 
 they move up abreast of the first section ; the caissons follow 
 their pieces ; those of the first section slacken the pace, until 
 at the proper distance : the caissons of the other sections 
 align themselves on those o£ the first. The line being form- 
 ed, the commanding officer gives the words guide left (or 
 right), and the whole resume the ordinary pace. 
 
 If a column by pieees, or by sections, be at a halt, it will 
 form line to the front, by the same commands and means ; 
 the leading piece, or section, moves forward on the word 
 S 205 
 
30 PART III. CASEMATE GPIfS. 
 
 march, and is established on the lines ; the others oblique 
 until opposite their intervals, then move forward, and are 
 aligned on those already established. 
 
 TO DIMINISH. 
 
 From line, to column of sections. 
 
 Commanding officer— BY SECTIONS-BREAK OFF. 
 
 Chief of 1st section — Section forward, gvide left. 
 
 Chiefs of other sections — Section, right oblique* 
 
 Officer of train — Caissons forward, trot, march. 
 
 Commanding officer, re- > MARCH> 
 peated by chiefs of sections, ^ 
 
 On the word march, the first section continues to move 
 forward ; in foot-artillery, it quickens its pace : in horse- 
 artillery, it moves at a trot: the other sections oblique to the 
 right, each entering the column in rear of the one which pre- 
 cedes it. The column being formed, the commanding officer 
 gives the words guide left, and all resume the ordinary pace. 
 
 From column of sections, to column of pieces. 
 
 Commanding officer— PIECES-BREAK OFF. 
 
 Chief of 1st section, j Jm^**"™***- ^ Ce ***. 
 
 Commanding ^ officer .repeat- ) MARCH . 
 ed by chief of 1st section, $ 
 
 On the word march, the first piece continues to move for- 
 ward, the second piece obliques to the right and enters the 
 column ; the other sections break off on the same ground 
 where the first had broke. 
 
 EXERCISE OF CASEMATE GUNS. 
 Implements. 
 
 The rammer and sponge (on different staves) in a rack 
 over the embrazure. 
 
 The ladle in a rack on the left of the gun, over the arch. 
 
 The worm in a rack on the right of the gun and opposite 
 the ladle. 
 
 The lantern on a hook immediately over the worm. 
 
 The trail-handspikes on the elevating transom. 
 
 The crowbars (two) on each side of the gun, leaning 
 against the front wall, and four foot from the carriage, 
 
 206 
 
TART III. CASEMATE GUNS. 81 
 
 A water-bucket on the right of the gun in the front angle 
 of the casemate. 
 
 A pouch for priming caps hung on the cascable, a priming 
 wire attached to it. 
 
 The shot and wads on the left of the gun in the front 
 angle of the casemate. 
 
 Position of the men at the gun. 
 
 One nbn-commissioned officer and six privates are neces- 
 sary for the service of each gun. They should be told off 
 before marched to the battery, where they are posted as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 No.'s 1 and 3 on the right of, and three feet from the car- 
 riage, facing the gun, No. 1 opposite the chase, and No. 3 
 opposite the elevating screw. 
 
 No.'s 2 and 4 on the left of, and three feet from the car- 
 riage, facing the gun, No. 2 opposite No. 1, and No. 4 op- 
 posite No. 3. 
 
 No.'s 5 and 6 in the room in rear of the gun, and near 
 the left door, provided with a budge-barrel and pass-box. 
 
 The non-commissioned officer is on either side of the gun, 
 according to the position of the lock, and near to the cas- 
 cable. He tends vent, points, fires, and commands at the gun. 
 
 When the gun is not loaded, it should be run " from bat- 
 tery," that is, run as far back as the counter-hurter, and 
 secured by quoins at each wheel. 
 
 To load and fire. 
 
 PREPARE BATTERY.— The non-commissioned officer 
 straps the pouch round his waist. No. 1 takes the rammer 
 and sponge from the rack and places them against the wall, 
 in the angle of the casemate on his right, the sponge up, the 
 rammer-head downwards. No. 2 takes out the tompion and 
 places it by the pile of shot, and loosens the wads. No. 3 
 uncoils the lanyard of the lock and throws it loosely over the 
 cascable. No. 4 enters the trail-handspikes in the rings. 
 Nos. 5 and 6 prepare the budge-barrels ; and all resume their 
 posts. 
 
 LOAD. — The non-commissioned officer steps on the car- 
 riage to tend vent. No. 1 seizes the sponge-staff, steps on 
 the carriage, enters the sponge, and sponges the gun : he is 
 assisted by No. 2, who also steps on the carriage. No. 3 
 
 207 
 
32 PART III. CASEMATE GUNS. 
 
 seizes the rammer-staff, and passes the small end through 
 the embrazure — No. 1 receives the staff in his left hand and 
 passes the sponge-staff behind him with his right hand, to 
 No. 3, who places it in its position against the wall. No. 5 
 hands a cartridge to No. 4, who hands it to No. 2. No. 4 
 also hands the shot and wads to No. 2, who enters them and 
 assists No. 1 in ramming down. As soon as the shot is 
 rammed home, No.'s 1 and 2 step down from the carriage, 
 and the former places- the rammer-staff against the wall. 
 
 TO BATTERY.— No.'s 3 and 4 take out the checking 
 quoins, and all, except 5 and 6, assist in running the gun 
 out. Care should be taken in running the gun " to battery," 
 not to let the carriage strike the hurter too hard, lest the jar 
 should throw the charge forward and prevent its ignition. 
 The gun should also be run out as far as the carriage will 
 permit, to prevent injury being done to the embrazure from 
 the discharge. 
 
 As soon as the gun is run out, the non-commissioned officar 
 steps on the chasses, cocks the lock, and places the percus* 
 sion cap, keeping his left hand over it to prevent the concus- 
 sion of other guns from jarring it out of place. Nos. 3 
 and 4 at the trail-handspikes, and No. 1 at the elevating 
 screw, give the proper direction and elevation by a motion 
 of the hand from the non-commissioned officer. As soon 
 as these are obtained, the non-commissioned officer steps 
 down quickly from the chasses on either side (according to 
 the position of the lock) and by a smart pull of the lanyard, 
 fires the piece. 
 
 No.'s 1 and 2 should be ready with checking quoins, to 
 prevent the gun running " to battery." If the gun should 
 not sufficiently recoil, No.'s 1 and 2 enter the crowbars in 
 the truck wheels, and assisted by the other men, heave the 
 gun back at the command heave. The same would be the 
 case if the gun were " to battery." 
 
 When practicable, a commissioned officer should be placed 
 in charge of four guns, to see that all the duties are properly 
 performed, and silence observed. 
 
 The foregoing exercise will answer with trifling alteration^ 
 for barbette guns. 
 
 206 
 
PART III. OP THE ARTILLERY. 
 
 209 
 
FART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 
 Fig. 7. Fig. a 
 
 t^t- -M- 4fV M- ^m m 
 ****** 
 
 Bg.9 Jft+H 
 
 i i j ; j 
 
 ft MM ft 
 
 Fig. 11. 
 
 Jjt- !jf $ J$ \ 
 
 # # # # # # 
 
 i++ -m- tV? +F»- +t+ H+ 
 
 *A***lft 
 
 3%. 10 
 
 ' I "1--% & 
 
 i„ 
 
 ■ v&. to ;'Iii 
 
 iii/ 
 *#' 
 
 If 
 
 HI 
 
 iw 
 
 Jfy.12 
 
 210 
 
PART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 B 4 3 
 
 iLlj lLJj iLib lUli 
 
 
 m 1 iJj uj d It fc£s SSS 80S ScH Sli S3S 
 
 H Pt Pj H Pt PI h p* n n m r*. 
 
 i- ^//s- 
 
 H Jfj y Jj n, jfj 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 as jTl' 
 
 ■^fEE--^ -ic-! 
 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Nab *H 
 
 211 
 
PART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 $ $ # $ $ $ 
 
 vl 1 
 
 Fio. 18. 
 
 s 
 
 $ P5 
 
 Fig. 19. 
 
 
 -4-y--.; 
 
 -33-' 
 
 JU Jfflj 
 
 $1$ 
 
 ^*i! 
 
 
 ...jftl'tt,... 
 
 1 |ib2/ 3/4/5 / 6 , 
 
 W / / / / 
 
 % %''/ / 
 
 % %/ 
 
 rH 
 
 % 
 
 312 
 
PART IV. 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
CONTENTS OF PART FOURTH 
 
 Precedence of regiments and corps «... »-....-. ... «*. .. ... 5 
 
 Duties in garrison and camp, comprising — 
 
 Beats and signals ..^ 5, 6 
 
 The Roster .. ...._ 30 
 
 Roll calls .31 
 
 Daily details and duties *», 31 
 
 Dress parade ..«.. 34 
 
 Guard mounting 36 
 
 ! Believing guards and sentinels 38 
 
 ; Method of going and receiving the grand rounds 40 
 
 Guards, their use and duty ,... 42 
 
 Order of encampment for Infantry 50 
 
 Cavalry 52 
 
 Artillery 53 
 
 Honours to be paid by the troops **■ 56 
 
 • Salutes 58 
 
 . Escorts of Honour 58 
 
 ■ Funeral Honours i ...... 59 
 
 Colour escort 60 
 
 Review - 61 
 
 Inspection ■•• ... 65 
 
 Calling out the Militia for the service of the U. S 68 
 
 Manner of issuing and distributing orders 69 
 
 Arrests and Confinements ~ 71 
 
 Courts Martial 71 
 
 Duties of Quartermasters «. - 81 
 
 Duties of Commissaries of Subsistence -..- 82 
 
 Form of Morning Report 85 
 
 Muster Roll - 86 
 
 Pay Roll 88 
 
 Requisition for Ordnance and Ordnance Stores 89 
 
 Provision Return 90 
 
 Estimate of Clothing 91 
 
 815 
 
PART IV. 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 PRECEDENCE OF REGIMENTS AND CORPS. 
 
 The precedence of regiments and corps is as follows :— 
 1st. The Light Artillery— 2d. The Light Dragoons— 3d 
 Other Regular Cavalry — 4th- The Artillery — 5th. The In- 
 fantry — 6th. The Marine Corps — 7th. The Riflemen — 8th 
 Volunteer Corps — 9th. The Militia. 
 
 Regiments of the regular army will take precedence in 
 their particular arm, according to numerical order — in the 
 volunteers and militia, by lot. 
 
 This order of precedence refers to parades. On all othci 
 occasions, the several regiments and corps are to be distri- 
 buted and drawn up as the commanding officer may judge 
 best adapted to the purposes of the service. 
 
 DUTIES IN GARRISON AND CAMP. 
 
 The duties in garrison and camp are to be conducted, as 
 far as practicable, in the same manner, and on the same prin- 
 ciples. 
 
 The Reveille is to sound or beat at day-break, and is the 
 signal for the men to rise, and the sentinels to leave off chal- 
 lenging. 
 
 The Troop is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the morn- 
 ing, for the purpose of assembling the men for duty and in- 
 spection at guard-mounting. 
 
 The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the purpose 
 of warning the officers and men for duty, and reading the 
 orders of the day. 
 
 The Tattoo is to be beat at — o'clock, after which no sol- 
 dier is to be out of his tent or quarters. 
 
 Peas-upon-a-trencher, the signal for breakfast, is to sound 
 or beat at — o'clock in the morning. 
 
 Roast-beef, the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat at — 
 o'clock ; at other times, it is the signal to draw provisions. 
 T 217 
 
8 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 The Surgeon's Call is to sound or beat at — o'clock, 
 when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the hos- 
 pital by the First Sergeants of companies, who will hand to 
 the Surgeon a report of all the sick in the company, other 
 than those in hospital. 
 
 The General is to beat only when the whole army is to 
 march, and is the signal to strike the tents, and prepare for 
 the march. 
 
 The Assembly is the signal to form by company. 
 
 To the Colour is the signal to form by battalion. 
 
 The March, for the whole to move. 
 
 The Long-roll is the signal for getting under arms, in case 
 of alarm, or the sudden approach of the enemy. 
 
 The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy. 
 
 The Stable-call, in cavalry corps, will be sounded imme 
 diately after reveille, forty minutes before noon ; and again, 
 immediately after retreat, for watering, feeding, and attend- 
 ing to tne horses. 
 
 Signals. 
 
 To go for fuel — poing stroke and ten stroke roll. 
 
 To go for water — two strokes and a flam. 
 
 For fatigue party — pioneer's march. 
 
 Adjutant's call — -first part of the troop. 
 
 First Sergeant's cab — one roll and four taps 
 
 Sergeant's call — one roll and three taps. 
 
 Corporal's call — one roll and ttoo taps. 
 
 For the drummers — the drummer's call 
 
 The different daily beats shall be given on the right, and 
 be immediately followed by the whole army ; to facilitate 
 which, the drummer's call shall be beat by the drums of the 
 police a quarter of an hour before the time of beating, when 
 the drummers will assemble before the colours of their re- 
 spective regiments ; and as soon as the beat begins on the 
 right, it will be immediately taken up by the whole army, 
 the drummers beating along the front of their respective re- 
 giments, from the centre to the right, thence to the left, and 
 back again to the centre, where they finish. Where the 
 hours for the different beats and signals ahn not fixed, the 
 commanding officer will establish them, hav*- g regard to cli- 
 mate and circumstances. 
 
 218 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 BEATS OF THE DRUM 
 
 EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS. 
 
 A Tap 
 
 \ Flam 
 
 A Drag 
 
 r r r r r 
 
 JJJJJ 
 
 o e> p e 
 
 \£ or 90 steps I 
 
 ~j^ minute. 
 
 Time for the Retreat. 
 110=© ffa& or 110 steps to a minute. 
 
 Quick Step. 
 110=>» f&Q- or HO ste P s to a minute. 
 
 Double Quick Step. 
 U0=o fe or 1<i0 ste P 3 t0 a m i nuta - 
 
 Time for the Troop. 
 SO=0 /?£%&. or SO bars to a minute. 
 
 219 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 LENGTH AND PROPORTION OF NOTES AND RESTS. 
 
 Sernibrevo 
 equal 
 
 Common Time. 
 
 to 2 Minims, 
 
 I 
 
 2 steps to a bar, 
 and 90 to a minute. 
 
 or 4 Crotchets, 
 
 z=t=±=±==Z=\ - 3=fc±=± 
 
 £j3££S^p " 
 
 or 16 Semi- 
 quavers. 
 
 gP^ gg g ff P - 
 
 A Dotted Minim 
 eoual 
 
 S^EE 
 
 • Time fur the Retreat 
 
 to 3.Crotcbcts, 
 
 -r — "- 
 
 ^=F 
 
 . j? l 3 steps to a bar, and 
 
 IeS3£ 
 
 110 to a minute. 
 
 220 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 A Dotted Crotchet 
 equal 
 
 Time for the Troop, $■& 
 
 > 3 Quavers, 
 
 £e£ 
 
 One step to a bar, and 
 
 or 6 Semiquavers. 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 V P 
 
 
 Dotted Crotchets 
 
 \A v »• »• 
 
 
 niR r " r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VI i 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 3 Quavers. 
 
 f-f-f-f-f+ — 
 
 
 
 1 1 i i|| 
 
 
 
 
 r\ 
 
 
 
 \j 
 
 
 
 A i > r-i 
 
 • Double Quick Tim*. 
 
 
 f()\j. p 
 
 
 
 
 
 •f • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ * r r 
 
 
 
 1 ! ' 1 
 
 
 
 ^ u ^ * 
 
 221 
 
 *_2 
 
10 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 Ml. The General. 
 
 t d t t t t r t r t r t r t 
 
 T^T 
 
 M. 2. The Assembly. 
 
 f\ f f f 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 f f 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 f\'t * "* (* 
 
 * 
 
 
 * 
 
 » » 
 
 
 
 1 i 1 
 
 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 •T > 1/ p < 
 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 1/ 
 
 * 
 
 •^■-* » # # 
 
 ■ ■■* ■ 
 
 r f 
 
 "1 * ' > 
 
 f f f f 
 
 * * * * 
 
 r 
 
 SE-l-g b s ^ 
 
 - * 
 
 ^ 
 
 $£££ 
 
 -F^-F 
 
 M. 3. To Me Colour. 
 
 tefefe^l^P^glPi 
 
 Drum, f t 1 1 t t f t t f f 
 
 o l »vw r — I . r^ — i I i — ' ' ' ' I — L ' l i -■ i 
 
 *WSV~P ^— — > — ? ^1 — S» >V 1* 
 
 JVb. 4. TAe -Lorcg /tofl. 
 
 PI 
 
REGULATIONS 
 
 90=J 
 
 fes 
 
 No. 5. Common Time. 
 it r f t j*t 
 
 S± 
 
 jCZEZJK 
 
 zfa*-l^ 
 
 PP£ 
 
 =E=: 
 
 f±4=^±t 
 
 f f r f f 
 
 ^SS3 
 
 No. 6. QwtcA; Time. 
 
 fff fffr r f fffr 
 
 2Vo. 7. The Reveille. 
 
 140=*. Fife. 
 
 jgE^g^g^g ^!^ 
 
 nunim. t r rrrr tr rr 
 
 223 
 
12 
 
 SI 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 f=M 
 
 m u m 
 
 ■ # r»t 
 
 
 p ^ch t ^ te^ 
 
 ,-J 
 
 te E^s - ^^nr r^ 
 
 
 lipHfeH^n 
 
 d d d d d d d d d d d d r 
 
 ^3E 
 
 teffi 
 
 224 
 
 1H 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 13 
 
 140 =• Hessian. 
 
 E^p^ilBP^Pi 
 
 3-± 
 
 I 
 
 d d d d 
 
 1 
 
 *—?- 
 
 £ 
 
 T^F 
 
 -f=3= 
 
 1111111111 
 
 
 i^^^l 
 
 3^E 
 
 **&£ 
 
 ^^_^^^^P^ 
 
 Arum. 
 
 r t 1- t 
 
 r r r 
 
 HP 
 
 e;s=e 
 
 ^s=| 
 
 »^^^=S 
 
 ^^r^ 
 
 ^=m^^=i 
 
 D. C. The first part of the Reveille. 
 
 B 
 
 225 
 
14 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 JSTo. 8. The Troop. 
 
 ~9 + * \ 
 
 =£= 
 
 ^m 
 
 & 
 
 f#w 
 
 fefefem 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 L§E3 
 
 ^=f^f? 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ■W^ ?-K 
 
 2to. 9. 7%e itarart. 
 
 t=*-f- 
 
 I 
 
 :££==P 
 
 *=?=f=Ff= 
 
 !lE^3EEg 
 
 3b 
 
 i 
 
 226 
 
 
 ^E 
 
 d t t Volt i. 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 15 
 
 ^m^^mmmm^ 
 
 S3=E3=JiCJ 
 
 d t d t t d t t d t t d d 
 
 H^^^ I#S 
 
 ^=te^ter rr^CT^ ^ ^Tto!Lt 
 
 li 
 
 SP IJ- 
 
 LS 
 
 d t t d t t d t t 
 
 r\ at i a i i a i i a i 
 
 t d t t 
 
 ^^^^g^i 
 
 d t t d t t d 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 P^§ 
 
 E 
 
 227 
 
iG 
 
 REGULATIONS 
 
 No. 10. The Tattoo. 
 
 SO=* Fife. 
 
 pEr^Tt ^^mm^m 
 
 Drum, dftdt d rf t d 
 
 ^t ffrf z ^^ ^^F^ 
 
 » 
 
 !3 
 
 ^B^^i 
 
 W 
 
 H=^d=^ 
 
 RH=£*=e E * E ^^^i 
 
 • Quick Tin 
 
 110=* Quick Time 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 After the quick time begin the doubling. 
 
 228 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 17 
 
 90=<3 Common Time. 
 
 $EE:i 
 
 JH 
 
 After this repeat the doubling. 
 
 co=J. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 
 
 
 
 'V *> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A-4- P- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ffflH ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UJii2 1 
 
 
 ^■-B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .fffi... . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Double Quick Time. 
 
 Zr3± 
 
 ^ pe^ fj 
 
 P 
 
 r r 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ■ the three rolls repeat doubling to the fine. 
 
 U 229 
 
19 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 No. 11. To Recall Detachments. 
 
 No. 12. Drummer's Call. 
 
 ffrff rffrtrt 
 
 /■} r I i r i i i i i i t i i 
 
 $6. 13. Come for Orders. 
 
 t t , t .t 3 tjmos over. 
 
 Firet Sergeants. 
 
 Sergeants. felf^]^^ = f = ^"ft 
 
 t t 3 times over. 
 
 Corporals. 
 230 
 
 mm 
 
 3. times ov er. 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 19 
 
 No. 14. The Roll. 
 
 q r_ r_ r r_ 
 
 No. 15. Double Quick Time. 
 
 140=j 
 
 f f _f_ f f f _£ f_ f f_ f 
 
 paE^fEE^; 
 
 JV&. 16. ifwn. 
 
 160=* 
 
 p E f E r E f£3$^ ^^g$M 
 
 R^^e^B 
 
 231 
 
20 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 M. 17. Halt. 
 
 f f f f f f . f f f f 
 
 f f f r f f 
 
 §iii r i i 
 
 No. 18. March in Retreat. 
 '-* f f f r f f f f 
 
 1 
 
 f f f f r f 
 
 m^np-fj^m^tf^ 
 
 JM>. 19. Commence Firing. 
 
 Q f f f f f f f f f f f f f f 
 
 232 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 21 
 
 SOUNDS FOR THE BUGLE, 
 
 APPLICABLE TO INFANTRY'S MARCH. 
 
 No. 1. The General. 
 
 140-0 Presto. 
 
 W 
 
 mmmi 
 
 gj==§ 
 
 mmmmm m 
 
 ^SPBHP 
 
 No. 2. 7%e Assembly. 
 
 PP^ 
 
 =^B 
 
 ±-4 
 
 "-Si 
 
 p=fqsz*z« 
 
 S 
 
 f 
 
 :sz^a_-^zs_4_i_^ 
 
 g^-SSP 
 
 U2 
 
 233 
 
22 
 
 REGULATIONS 
 
 Wo. 3. To the Colour, 
 
 m ^m^^ 
 
 gg^lpl^i^S] 
 
 No. 4. Common Time, 
 
 &mm& $£^^ 
 
 ^=f!^ i * f-p ^u==^^=N- r ^^-^f- 
 
 m 
 
 mm 
 
 PBSS 
 
 1^=^ 
 
 ^- L; Id ] • ll Ta-frfFFFg 
 
 834 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 23 
 
 No. 5. Quick Time. 
 
 ijj prerr^ 
 
 g^gPl^^S 
 
 ^p^^^ 
 
 2Vo. 6 f The Reveille, 
 
 
 
 i^f ^^ TOl^^P 
 
 235 
 
24 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 No. 7. The Retreat. 
 
 pn^spn^S 
 
 No. 8. 77* ratfoo. 
 
 S^IPSft 
 
 pin^f^tep 
 
 ^Si§^*^ii 
 
 g ^ -j- gj — f! 
 
 
 jj#jj^pgff 
 
 236 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 M. 9. To Recall Detachments. 
 
 w w^f^ ^mm^& 
 
 ferfj^i 
 
 iVb. 10. Buglers' Call. 
 
 No. 11. Come for Orders. 
 
 First Sergeants. 
 
 im* 
 
 SI 
 
 Sergeants. 
 
 fpg^Tf^H 
 
 Corporals. 
 
 ^^^i^^H 
 
 237 
 
26 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 No. 12. Double Quick March. 
 
 i ^EzSz fdjJEf 
 
 p^mlmmmmltgm 
 
 No. 13. Run. 
 
 — p— i — p- 
 
 IPlg 
 
 fe 
 
 P ^ff^^^ 
 
 S 
 
 T-T' * ' » 
 
 S 
 
 238 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 27 
 
 No. 14. Forward March. 
 
 l^F 
 
 mmm 
 
 giU^^n^^n: 
 
 ieo=# _, 
 
 No. 15. Halt 
 
 pUl^i 
 
 No. 1G. March in Retreat. 
 
 ^^mr^^ a 
 
 ^B^Bamfflg ^^i 
 
 >-j. 
 
 iVb. 17. Commence Firing. 
 
 ^^^i^H 
 
 iVo. IS. Cease Firing 
 
 fi^P#Pgi 
 
 239 
 
28 
 
 REGULATIONS. 
 
 J. 
 
 No. 19. March by the Right Flank. 
 
 
 No. 20. March hy the Left Flan*. 
 
 1G0=#- 
 
 l^^^^esm 
 
 p^g 
 
 ipzzre: 
 
 ^^1 
 
 2Vo. 21. Rally on the Reserve. 
 
 mm^m 
 
 : P=3=F 
 
 :B 
 
 te 
 
 : F 
 
 li 
 
 No. 22. ifa/fy on Mfi Battalion. 
 
 SEKES: 
 
 JEI=rpi g ==g= g zE[^^f'-£HF^F z prj-i 
 
 10O=» 
 
 iPHPB=ll^iP 
 
 240 
 
REGULATIONS. 
 
 No. 23. Boots and Saddles. 
 
 Alleg ro. 
 
 No. 24. To Horse. 
 
 r\ rr ognssimo. | ■ i , i 
 
 iVfc. 25. The Charge. 
 
 No. 26. Stable Call. 
 
 f 3 » 
 
 r 3 t 
 
 i^^^lip 
 
 241 
 
30 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 The Roster. 
 
 In all duties, whether with or without arms, the tour of 
 duty shall be from the eldest downwards. 
 
 Of duties — 
 
 The first is, detachments of the army or outposts. 
 
 The second, general officers' guards, according to rank. 
 
 The third, the ordinary guards, in camp or garrison. 
 
 The fourth, the pickets. 
 
 The fifth, general courts martial, and duty without arms 
 or of fatigue. 
 
 Officers on the inlying picket are to be considered as lia 
 ble to be relieved and employed upon other duties. If an 
 officer's tour of duty happen when he is on the inlying picket, 
 he shall immediately be relieved and go upon that duty, and 
 his tour upon the picket credited to him. 
 
 If an officer's tour of duty for the picket, general court 
 martial, or fatigue, happen when he is upon any other duty, 
 he shall not make good that picket, court martial, or duty of 
 fatigue, when he comes off, but his tour shall pass ; and, in 
 like manner, if he should be upon a general court martial, 
 or duty of fatigue, and his tour of guard or detachment hap- 
 pen, such tour shall be passed to his credit. 
 
 After the adjournment sine die, of a court martial, the 
 members will return to their respective corps and duties, un- 
 less otherwise ordered. 
 
 The session of a general court martial, the members of 
 which have been sworn, shall be reckoned a tour of duty 
 though it shall have been adjourned without trying any per- 
 son. The same rule will apply to courts of inquiry. 
 
 When an officer is designated in orders from head quar- 
 ters for one duty, he is not to be put on any other duty with- 
 out previous permission from head quarters. 
 
 An officer is not to exchange duties with another, without 
 leave of the commanding officer of his regiment or post. 
 
 A regiment is not to receive credit for a tour of duty, un- 
 less it has marched off the place of parade. 
 
 In like manner a guard or detachment which has not 
 marched off the place of parade or rendezvous, is not to ba 
 reckoned as having performed a tour of duty; but if it shal. 
 have marched off, it shall have credit for a tour, though dis 
 missed immediately afterwards. 
 
 242 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 3i 
 
 When a picket is ordered to march to any parade, It is 
 not to be accounted as having performed a tour of duty, un- 
 less it shall have marched off that parade. 
 
 Roll Calls. 
 
 There shall be daily at least five stated roll calls. 
 
 The first, immediately after ^reveille. 
 
 The second, immediately before breakfast. 
 
 The third, immediately before dinner. 
 
 The fourth, immediately before retreat. 
 
 The fifth, immediately after tattoo. 
 
 The first, fourth, and fifth roll calls will be made on the 
 company parades by the First Sergeants, superintended by 
 an officer ; the second and third roll calls will be made by 
 the First Sergeant, or by the non-commissioned officers of 
 squads, at their respective messes, and reported by them to 
 the First Sergeants, who will immediately report the result 
 to the Captains, and if at any of the roll calls men are ab- 
 sent without leave, or cannot be found, the Captains will re- 
 port the names of the absentees to the Adjutant, for the in- 
 formation of the Colonel or commanding officer. 
 
 Immediately after reveille roll call, the tents or quarters - 
 and the space around them, will be put in complete order by 
 the men of the companies, superintended by the chiefs of 
 squads. The same rule will be observed at the guard-house 
 or guard-tent, by the guard or prisoners. 
 
 The morning reports of companies, signed by the Captains 
 and First Sergeants, will be handed to the Adjutant before 
 eight o'clock in the morning, and will be consolidated by the 
 Adjutant within the next hour, for the information of the 
 Colonel ; and if the consolidation is to be sent to higher au- 
 thority, it will be signed by the Colonel and the Adjutant. 
 
 Daily Details and Duties. 
 
 The daily duty must be announced in orders, and the offi- 
 cers to perform it are to be detailed according to the rules of 
 the roster. 
 
 The number and rank of the officers for daily duty, are 
 to be regulated by the strength and circumstances of the 
 camp or garrison. 
 
 Independently of the officers detailed for guard duty, the 
 officers for daily duty will be as follows : 
 
 243 
 
32 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 In large camps there will be a general officer of the day 
 for each division ; a field officer of the day for each brigade ; 
 a captain of the day for each regiment ; and such general 
 and regimental staff officers of the day as may be necessary 
 to attend to the various details, and to receive and execute 
 orders according to their respective stations. In every regi- 
 ment and garrison, besides the officer of the day, there will 
 be detailed daily, if the strength of the garrison will permit, 
 a subaltern, four non-commissioned officers, a drummer, and 
 such fatigue parties as circumstances may require, for the 
 police of the regiment or garrison. In small commands, 
 subalterns may be detailed for duty as officers of the day, 
 and they will also discharge the duties of officers of police. 
 The officers thus detailed are to remain in camp or garrison 
 during their tours of duty. 
 
 The General of the day is to superintend the regularity 
 and discipline of the camp in every particular ; he is to visit 
 the guards of the camp and the outposts ; he is to call out 
 and inspect the inlying pickets as often and at such times as 
 lie thinks proper ; he is to receive all reports in camp, and 
 make immediate communication of any extraordinary cir- 
 cumstance to the General-in-Chief. 
 
 The field officer of the day has the immediate superin- 
 tendence of the camp of the brigade ; he is to be present at 
 the mounting and dismounting of all the brigade guards, 
 particularly of the inlying pickets, which are always con- 
 sidered under his command ; he is to call them out to inspect 
 them, to order such patroles from them as he may judge ne- 
 cessary to insure the regularity and order of the camp, and 
 in the event of the inlying pickets being ordered to march, 
 he is to march with them. 
 
 The Captain or subaltern of the day of each regiment, 
 superintends the cleanliness and regularity of the camp or 
 quarters of the regiment; he attends the parading of all re- 
 gimental guards, and orders the roll to be called frequently 
 and at unexpected periods, and reports every thing extraor- 
 dinary to the commanding officer; he is to visit the hospital 
 at various hours, and make a report of its state to the com- 
 manding officer of the regiment or garrison. 
 
 The Adjutant of the day of the brigade, is to assist the 
 general staff officer of the day, in the various details of it, 
 
 244 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 33 
 
 and, in his absence, to perform his duty as such, and attend 
 for orders at head quarters. 
 
 The officer of police, under the direction of the officer of 
 tne day, is to make a general inspection into the cleanliness 
 of the camp or garrison ; to suffer no fires to be made in 
 camp, except in the kitchens; to cause all dirt or filth to be 
 immediately removed, and either burnt or buried ; to be pre- 
 sent at all distributions of the regiment, and to form and 
 send off all detachments for necessaries. In case the Adju- 
 tant is obliged to be absent, the officer of police is to do his 
 duty until his return ; for which purpose he must attend at 
 the Adjutant's tent or office, to be ready to receive and dis- 
 tribute any orders that may come for the regiment. The 
 drummer of the police must attend constantly at the Adju- 
 tant's tent or office, to be ready at all times to communicate 
 the necessary signals ; nor must he absent himself on any 
 account, during the twenty-four hours, without leaving an- 
 other drummer to supply his place until his return ; nor then 
 without leave from the Adjutant. In camp, when water is 
 required by the men, application must be made to the officer 
 of police, who will order the drummer to beat the necessary 
 signal, on which, all who want water, must immediately pa- 
 rade with their canteens before the colours, where the officer 
 of police will form and send them off under the cai'e of two 
 non-commissioned officers of the police, who are to be an- 
 swerable that the whole party is brought back, and that no 
 excesses are committed while it is out. Wood and other ne- 
 cessaries must be sent for and brought to camp in the same 
 manner. Except in cases of necessity, not more than one 
 detachment is to be absent at a time. 
 
 Every such party not conducted by a non-commissioned 
 officer shall have a written permission from a field officer, or 
 officer commanding a regiment, or the officer of police, with- 
 out which it is not to be permitted to pass the chain. 
 
 No non-commissioned officer or soldier is to quit camp 01 
 garrison without a pass signed by the commanding officer of 
 the regiment or garrison, or by the Adjutant, under the au- 
 thority of the commanding officer. 
 
 No officer is on any account to sleep out of camp or gar- 
 rison, without permission. 
 
 V2 245 
 
34 PART IV. BEGULATIONS. 
 
 Dress Parade. 
 
 There shall be daily at least one dress parade, which may 
 be at troop or retreat, as the commanding officer may direct ; 
 or at both beats, should he think proper so to order. The 
 parade at troop will be termed the morning parade, and that 
 at retreat the evening parade. In either case it will be con- 
 ducted as follows : 
 
 A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before troop 
 or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regimental pa- 
 rade. At the same time each company will turn out under 
 arms, on its own parade, for roll call and inspection by its 
 own officers. 
 
 Ten minutes after that signal, the Adjutant's call will be 
 given, when the companies will be marched (the band play- 
 ing) to the regimental parade, where they will be formed in 
 their relative positions in the order of battle, arms ordered 
 and at rest : the officers at their post with swords drawn, the 
 Adjutant on the right of the line. The music will be form- 
 ed in two ranks on the right of the Adjutant, and from the 
 Adjutant's call to troop or retreat, the band will play. The 
 senior officer present will take the command of the parade, 
 and will take post at a suitable distance in front opposite the 
 centre, facing the line. 
 
 Ten minutes after the Adjutant's call, the Adjutant will 
 order the music to beat off, when it will commence on the 
 right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back to its place 
 on the right. 
 
 When the music has ceased, the Adjutant will step two 
 paces to the front, face the line, and command — Attention. 
 Shoulder— arms. Prepare to open ranks. To the rear, 
 open order. March. Right-dress. 
 
 The ranks will be opened according to the system laid 
 down in the Infantry Tactics, the commissioned officers 
 marching to the front, the company officers four paces, field 
 officers six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of 
 battle, where they will halt and dress. The Adjutant seeing 
 the ranks aligned, will commandyronJ, and march along the 
 front to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line of 
 company officers eight or ten paces, where he will come to 
 the right-about and give the words, present-arms, when 
 armg will be presented, officers saluting. 
 
 246 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 35 
 
 Seeing this executed, he will face about to the command- 
 ing officer, salute, and report " the parade is formed.'''' The 
 Adjutant will then, on intimation to that effect, take his sta- 
 tion on the left of the commanding officer, one pace retired, 
 passing round his rear. 
 
 The commanding officer having acknowledged the salute 
 of the line, by touching his hat, will, after the Adjutant has 
 taken his post, draw his sword and command — shoulder- 
 arms ; and add such exercises as he may think proper, con 
 eluding with — order-arms. 
 
 The Adjutant will now pass round the right of the com- 
 manding officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between 
 him and the line of company officers, and command — First 
 Sergeants, to the front and centre. March. At the words 
 front and centre, the sergeants named will shoulder arms as 
 sergeants, march two paces to the front, and face inwards. 
 At the word march, they will march to the centre and hall. 
 The Adjutant will then order — Front-face. .Report. At 
 the last word, each in succession, beginning on the right, 
 will report the result of the roll call previously made on the 
 company parade. 
 
 The Adjutant again commands — First Sergea?its, out- 
 ward-face. To your posts-march ; when they will resume 
 their places and order arms. The Adjutant will now face 
 to the commanding officer, salute, and give the result of the 
 first sergeants' reports. The commanding officer then di- 
 rects the orders to be read, when the Adjutant will face about, 
 give the words, attention to orders — and then read the orders. 
 
 The orders having been read, the Adjutant will face to the 
 commanding officer, salute, and report, when, on an intima- 
 tion from the commander, he will face again to the line, and 
 announce, the parade is dismissed. All the officers will 
 now return their swords, face inwards, and close on the Ad- 
 jutant, the field officers on the flanks. The Adjutant gives 
 the words — Front-face. Forward-march ; when they will 
 march forward, the music playing, and when within six 
 paces of the commander, the Adjutant will give the word 
 halt. The officers will then salute the commanding officer, - 
 by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he 
 shall have communicated to them such instructions as he 
 may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is finished 
 As the officers disperse, the First Sergeants will close the 
 
 247 
 
36 FART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 ranks of their respective companies, and march them to the 
 company parades, where they will be dismissed, the band 
 continuing to play until the companies clear the regimental 
 parade. 
 
 All company officers and men will be present at dress 
 parades, unless especially excused, or on some duty incom 
 patible with such attendance. 
 
 Guard Mounting. 
 
 Thirty minutes before guard mounting, a call will be 
 sounded for the men warned for duty, to turn out on their 
 company parades for inspection by the First Sergeants, su- 
 perintended by an officer of each company. Ten minutes 
 after, a second call will be sounded for the duty men to re- 
 pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by the 
 First Sergeants. Each detachment as it arrives, will take 
 post on the left of the one that preceded it, under the direc- 
 tion of the Adjutant, in open order, arms shouldered, and 
 bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the rear 
 of the men of their respective companies. If the guards are 
 intended for the grand parade, they will be marched thithei 
 by the senior officer of the details, where they will take post 
 in the order prescribed above, under the direction of the 
 general staff officer, or his assistant, the Adjutant of the 
 day. 
 
 The following regulations respecting mounting guards, 
 are drawn up with reference to the grand parade ; with a 
 few obvious variations, they will equally apply to regimental 
 or garrison parade. 
 
 The ranks being opened, the officers of guards will take 
 post twelve paces in front of the centre, in one line, accord- 
 ing to rank, and with swords drawn : the Sergeants in one 
 rank, four paces in the rear of the officers, and the Corpo- 
 rals in one rank, four paces in the rear of the Sergeants ; 
 the whole facing to the front. 
 
 The Adjutant of the day wiU dress the lines, count the 
 files, verify the details by reference to the written orders, 
 and tell off the guards, whilst the general staff officer ap- 
 points the officers and non-commissioned officers to the seve- 
 ral guards, and designates the posts which they are to 
 occupy. 
 
 The staff officer will then command— ^-officers and non 
 
 248 
 
I>ART IV. REGULATIONS. 37 
 
 commissioned officers. About-face. Inspect your guards. 
 March. The commander of each guard then commands — 
 Order-arms. Inspection of arms. The two highest in the 
 rank of each guard will divide the ranks between them, ac- 
 companied by the other officers, and inspect accordingly. 
 During the inspection the band will play. 
 
 The inspection ended, the officers and non-commissioned 
 officers will take post in their respective guards, as though 
 each guard were a company of a battalion, in open order, 
 under review ; at which time, also, the officers of the day 
 will take post in front of the centre of the guards : the old 
 officer of the day on the right of the new officer of the day, 
 one pace retired. 
 
 The staff officer will now command — rest, troop-beat off: 
 when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the 
 line in front of the officers of the guards to the left, and back 
 to its place on the right, where it will cease to play. 
 
 The staff officer continues, — -Attention. Shoulder-arms. 
 Close order-march. Present-arms : at which he will face 
 to the new officer of the day, salute, and report " the guards 
 are formed.'''' The new officer of the day, after acknow- 
 ledging the salute, will give the necessary instructions to the 
 staff officer, who will cause the same to be executed, the staff 
 officer giving the word of command. 
 
 The guard having shouldered arms and performed such 
 exercises as may be required by the officer of the day, the 
 staff officer will again command, — By guards (or platoon.) 
 Right wheel — march. Pass in review. Column-forward, 
 guide right-march : when the whole will march past the 
 officer of the day, according to the order of review, conducted 
 by the staff officer, marching on the left of the first division ; 
 the Adjutant of the~day on the left of the last division. 
 
 When the column has passed the officer of the day, the 
 guards will break off under their respective commanders, and 
 take the route to the several posts assigned them, the staff 
 officers breaking off at the same time ; the music will cease, 
 and the old officer of the day salute, and give the old or 
 standing orders to the new officer of the day. The super- 
 numeraries at the same time, will be marched by the First 
 Sergeants to their respective company parades and dismissed. 
 
 Guards which are assigned to new posts will be conduct- 
 
 249 
 
38 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 ed to, and established in them by the officer of the day and 
 the staff officer detached from head quarters for the purpose. 
 
 The officer of the day will always be present at guard 
 mounting. No other officer, except a general officer, will 
 interfere with, or give any order on the parade to the staff 
 officer on duty there. The commander of the troops or gar- 
 rison, though under the rank of General, is of course an 
 exception to this rule. 
 
 The regiment that furnishes the Adjutant of the day will 
 also furnish the music for the grand parade. 
 
 Officers on all duties under arms are to have their swords 
 drawn, without waiting for any words of command for that 
 purpose. 
 
 Relieving Guards and Sentinels. 
 
 The guards in camp and garrison will be relieved every 
 twenty-four hours. The guards at the outposts will ordinarily 
 be relieved in the same manner ; but this must depend on 
 their distances from camp, or other circumstances which may 
 sometimes require their continuing on duty several days. In 
 such cases they must be previously notified to provide them- 
 selves accordingly. 
 
 The guards are to move in the greatest order to their 
 respective posts, marching by platoon when the roads will 
 permit. 
 
 The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, 
 on the approach of the new guard, commands — 'present-' 
 arms. 
 
 The new guard will march past the old guard, at shoul- 
 dered arms, officers saluting, and take post three or four 
 paces on its right, and in a line with it, where its officer will 
 command — present-arms. The two officers will then ap- 
 proach each other, and the relieving officer take his orders 
 from the relieved. Both officers will then return to their re- 
 spective guards, and command — shoulder— arms. 
 
 The officer of the new guard will now direct his Sergeant 
 to make a list of the guard, dividing them into three reliefs, 
 and proceed himself to take possession of the guard-house, 
 or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge of the 
 guard ; he will note every new injury which may have been 
 committed, and, on his report, the relieved officer will be held 
 responsible. 
 
 250 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 39 
 
 The officer of the old guard will have prepared for the 
 signature of the officer who relieves him, an inventory of 
 the property or articles in charge of the guard, and also a 
 roll of the prisoners with their offences annexed. 
 
 The first relief having been designated, the officer of the 
 new guard will order it two paces to the front, when the Cor- 
 poral of the new guard will take charge of it and go to re- 
 lieve the sentinels, accompanied by the Corporal of the old 
 guard, who will take command of the old sentinels when the 
 whole are relieved. 
 
 If the sentinels are numerous, the Sergeants are to be em- 
 ployed as well as the Corporals, in relieving them. 
 
 During the time of relieving the sentinels, and of calling 
 in the small posts, the commanders of the two guards, will, 
 when near the enemy, visit the avenues leading to the post ; 
 the old commander giving to the new, all the information 
 which he may possess relative'to the position of the enemy. 
 A relief, with arms supported and formed in two ranks, 
 will march by a flank, conducted by the Corporal on the side 
 of the leading front-rank man. 
 
 The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the 
 first relieved and left behind ; the one most distant will be 
 next relieved, and the others in succession, as the relief re- 
 turns to the guard. 
 
 When a sentinel sees the relief approach, he will face to it 
 and halt. At six paces the Corporal will command — relief- 
 halt : when the relief will halt and carry arms. The Cor- 
 poral will then add " No. 1," or "No. 2," or "No. 3," ac- 
 cording to the designation of the sentinel — arms-port. At 
 this word the two sentinels will arms port, and approach 
 each other, when the old sentinel, under the direction of the 
 Corporal, and- in his hearing, will whisper the instructions 
 to the new sentinel. 
 
 This done, the two sentinels will shoulder arms, and the 
 old sentinel will pass in quick time to his place in rear of the 
 relief, the new sentinel facing the relief. The Corporal will 
 then command — relief, support-arms. Forward— march : 
 and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole 
 are relieved. 
 
 A relief is always to be marched in the greatest order 
 at support-arms ; and if an officer approach, the Corporal is 
 to order his men to carry-arms, supporting them again whea 
 
 251 
 
40 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 the officer has passed. The Corporals are to be answerable 
 that the sentinels, when relieving, perform their motions in 
 the greatest spirit and exactness. 
 
 The detachments and sentinels from the old guard having 
 rejoined it, it will take up its march, the music of both guards 
 beating a march, except at the out-posts, where the music is 
 prohibited. The old guard will march along the front of the 
 new guard with shouldered arms: the new guard at present- 
 ed arms ; officers of both guards saluting. 
 
 On arriving at the camp or post, the commander of the 
 old guard will, if it consist of detachments of different regi- 
 ments, send each detachment to its own regiment, under an 
 officer or non-commissioned officer ; unless the officer of the 
 day. should be present to inspect the old guard, when he will 
 order the men to their several regiments, under their re- 
 spective officers. In either case, the pieces of the men will 
 be drawn or discharged at a target, before the men are dis- 
 missed. 
 
 When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the officei 
 of the new guard will order his guard to stack their arms, 
 or to place them in the arm- racks. 
 
 The commanding officer of the guard will then make him- 
 self acquainted with the written, general, and particular in- 
 structions for his post ; next visit his sentinels, to ascertain 
 if the instructions they have received be correct ; and ques- 
 tion the officers and non-commissioned officers under him 
 relative to the instructions they may respectively have re- 
 ceived from the corresponding persons of the old guard. 
 
 Method of going and receiving the Grand Rounds. 
 
 The General and other officers of the day, will visit the 
 several guards during the day, as often and at such hours 
 as they judge proper. 
 
 When the sentry before the guard perceives the officer 
 of the day approach, he will call the guard to turn out, when 
 it will parade, and at the proper time salute him with pre- 
 sented arms. 
 
 The officer of the day will examine the guard ; see that 
 none are absent ; that their arms and accoutrements are in 
 order ; that the officers and non-commissioned officers are 
 acquainted with their duty ; and that the sentinels are pro- 
 perly posted and have received proper orders. 
 
 252 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 41 
 
 The officer of the guard shall give the parole to the officer 
 of the day if demanded. 
 
 The officers of the day will go the grand rounds after 12 
 o'clock at night. 
 
 When the officer of the day arrives at the guard whence 
 he intends to begin his rounds, he will make himself known 
 as such, by giving the officer of the guard the parole. He 
 will then order the guard under arms, and having examined 
 it, demand an escort of a Sergeant and two men to proceed 
 to the next post. 
 
 When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the Ser- 
 geant will answer, grand rounds; and the sentinel will reply, 
 stand grand rounds ; advance, Sergeant, with the counter- 
 sign. Upon which the sergeant advances and gives the 
 countersign. The sentinel will then cry, advance, rounds ; 
 and present arms till they have passed. 
 
 When the sentinel before the guard challenges and is an- 
 swered, grand rounds; he will reply, stand, grand rounds; 
 turn out the guard, grand rounds. Upon which the guard 
 will be turned out and drawn up in good order, with shoul- 
 dered arms, the officers taking their posts. The officer com- 
 manding the guard, will then order a sergeant and two men 
 to advance towards the rounds and challenge. When the 
 Sergeant of the guard comes within ten paces of the rounds, 
 he will halt and challenge briskly. The Sergeant of the 
 rounds is to ahswef, grand rounds. The Sergeant of the 
 guard replies, stand, grand rounds; advance Sergeant, with 
 the countersign ; and orders his men to present arms. The 
 Sergeant of the rounds advances alone arid giving the coun- 
 tersign returns to his rounds ; and the Sergeant of the guard 
 calls to his officer, the countersign is right ; on which the 
 fcfficer of the guard calls, advance, rounds. The officer of 
 the rounds then advances alone* and on his approach, the 
 guard presents arms. The officer of the rounds passes along 
 the front of the guard immediately to the officer, who keeps 
 his post on the right, and gives him the parole. He then 
 examines the guard, orders back his escort, and demanding 
 a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards* 
 
 All general officers, as well as the commander of the post 
 or garrison, may visit the guards and go the grand rounds, 
 and be received in the same manner as prescribed for the 
 officer of the dav. 
 
 W 253 
 
42 PART IV. REGUiAflONS. 
 
 Guards — their Use and Duty. 
 
 The principal guards are, 
 
 1. Outposts and picket guards. 
 
 2. Camp and garrison guards. 
 
 3. General officers' guards. 
 
 The outposts and picket-guards are formed from the line, 
 and composed of cavalry or infantry, or both, according to 
 circumstances. They are posted on the avenues leading to 
 the camp, and in such positions as are most eligible for its 
 security. Their strength is regulated by a variety of con- 
 siderations, such as proximity to the enemy, and the nature 
 of the position to be guarded. 
 
 The duties of the outposts are so various that they will 
 usually require detailed instructions according to circum- 
 stances ; the following directions will, however, apply gene- 
 rally, and are most strictly to be observed. 
 
 AH out-guards march off without trumpets sounding or 
 drums beating. They pay no compliment of any kind, 
 neither do their sentries take any complimentary notice of 
 officers passing near their posts. 
 
 The men on advanced pickets are to carry their provisions 
 with them, ready cooked, when circumstances permit. The 
 cavalry to carry sufficient forage for the time they are to be 
 out. 
 
 Officers commanding out-guards are to send guides or 
 orderly men to the field officer of the day, or to the staff 
 officer of their own brigades, as circumstances may require, 
 in order to conduct the new guards and to carry such com- 
 munications as may be necessary. When the army is on a 
 march, they must apprise the staff officer of the brigade of 
 the situation of their posts, as soon as they arrive at them. 
 
 Whenever detachments are composed of 200 men or up- 
 wards, a Surgeon or Assistant Surgeon is to be sent with 
 them. On particular duties the attendance of a Surgeon or 
 Assistant Surgeon may be requisite with smaller detach- 
 ments. Detachments of cavalry of fifty or upwards must 
 be attended by a Farrier. 
 
 As soon as an officer commanding an outpost or advanced 
 picket arrives on his ground, he must, by a careful recon- 
 noisance, make himself acquainted with not only the space 
 lie actually occupies, but the heights within rnusket shot; 
 
 254 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 43 
 
 the roads and paths leading to or near the post, ascertaining 
 their breadth and practicability for cavalry and cannon, and 
 ensure a ready and constant communication with the adjoin- 
 ing posts and videttes, by signals during the day — by patrols 
 during the night. He should examine all ravines that might 
 cover the approach of an enemy, and all the points from 
 which he is most likely to be attacked. This will prevent 
 all surprises, and should he be assailed during the night, en- 
 able him to act with promptness and decision. 
 
 An intelligent officer upon an outpost, even without in- 
 trenching tools, may materially strengthen his post. A tree 
 felled with judgment, brushwood cut to a certain distance, 
 pointed stakes, about breast high, placed on the point most 
 assailable, may be attended with the greatest advantages, 
 and can be effected with the common hatchet, or axe, with 
 which the soldiers are provided for the purpose of cutting 
 fire-wood. 
 
 Unexpected obstacles, within point-blank musket shot of 
 the place attacked, embarrass and discourage an enemy ; and 
 an officer who is on the defensive, should multiply them with- 
 in that distance as much as possible. 
 
 Guards are not to presume to molest any persons coming 
 to camp with provisions, and are, on no account, to exact or 
 receive any thing for their free passage. 
 
 When a deserter comes in from the enemy, he is imme- 
 diately to be sent, under a proper escort, to the officer com- 
 manding the outposts, who, after ascertaining from him such 
 facts as relate to his own post, will immediately forward him 
 to head quarters. 
 
 The videttes or sentinels on outposts are to be placed so 
 as to best observe the approach of the enemy, and at toe 
 same time, communicate by signal with each other and with 
 their respective posts. At night, or in thick weather, they 
 will be doubled. 
 
 Officers, soldiers, and followers of the camp, are not, on 
 any account, to be suffered to pass the outposts, unless they 
 are on duty, or present a regular permit from head quarters. 
 
 Persons bearing a flag of truce from the enemy, are to 
 be treated with attention and civility ; but, as communica- 
 tions of that nature are frequently designed to gain intelli- 
 gence, and for reconnoisance, the most strict and efficacious 
 means must be adopted to frustrate such consequences. 
 
 255 
 
44 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 The camp and quarter guards are for the better security 
 of the camp, as well as for preserving good order and dis- 
 cipline. 
 
 Every regiment will furnish a camp and quarter guard. 
 The camp guard to consist of one Lieutenant, one Sergeant, 
 one Corporal, one drummer, and twenty-Seven privates; 
 and the quarter guard, of one Corporal and nine privates. 
 
 The camp guard of the front line will be posted four hun- 
 dred and twelve feet in front of it, and that of the second 
 line, the same distance in the rear of the second line, each 
 opposite to the centre of the regiment. 
 
 Each camp guard will post nine sentinels, viz. two before 
 the guard, two on the right, and two on the left. These six 
 sentinels, with those from the other regiments in the line, 
 form a chain in the front and rear of the camp ; two sen- 
 tinels before the colours and arms, and one before the mar- 
 quee of the commanding officer of the regiment. 
 
 To complete the chain of sentinels around the camp, the 
 Adjutant General or staff officer at head quarters, will order 
 two flank guards to be detailed from the line, to consist of a 
 commissioned officer and as many men as may be necessary 
 for that purpose. 
 
 The intention of the camp guards being to form a chain 
 of sentinels around the camp, in order to prevent improper 
 persons entering, or soldiers going out of camp, the com- 
 manding officers of brigades will add to, or diminish them, 
 so as to answer this purpose. 
 
 The quarter guard is to be posted twelve feet in the rear 
 of the line of wagons, and will furnish three sentinels, viz. 
 one at the guard, and one behind the centre of each wing 
 of the regiment. 
 
 General officers' guards are to be furnished by their re- 
 spective commands ; that is, for the General commanding-in- 
 chief, by the line, each brigade furnishing it by turns ; and 
 will consist of such number and description of troops as shall 
 be determined at head quarter's. 
 
 The guard of a Major General, is one subaltern, one Ser- 
 geantj one Corpora^ and twenty privates, to be furnished by 
 his own division, each brigade furnishing it by turns. . 
 
 The guard of a Brigadier General, is one Sergeant, 
 one Corporal, and twelve privates, to be furnished by his 
 own brigade. 
 
 256 
 
TART IV. REGULATIONS. 45 
 
 Besides these guards, there shall be such others as may 
 be found necessary for the protection of supplies in the Com- 
 missariat's and Quartermaster's department, and also for 
 the preservation of order at the hospitals. 
 
 All guards are to mount at the same hour, which will be 
 regulated by the commanding officer. 
 
 The camp and quarter guards, are to parade before the 
 centre of the regiment, where they will be formed by the 
 Adjutant ; or, in his absence, by the officer of police, and 
 sent off immediately to their respective posts. 
 
 The guards of a Major General and a Brigadier General, 
 are to be formed by the staff officer attached to the brigade, 
 and sent from the brigade parade. 
 
 The other guards, including that of the General-in-Chief, 
 being composed of detachments from the line, by brigades, 
 each detachment is formed on the brigade parade by the 
 staff officer attached to the brigade, and sent with an Adju- 
 tant or other commissioned officer, to the grand parade. 
 
 All guards, except those which are honorary, should or- 
 dinarily be of force proportioned to the number of sentinels 
 reepjired, allowing three reliefs to each post. 
 
 In garrison, the number of guards depends on the extent 
 of the fortress or post to be defended, and the strength of 
 the garrison. 
 
 The principal guard will be denominated the main guard ; 
 and the lesser guards will take the names of the points to 
 be guarded, as the arsenal guard, port guard, barrier guard. 
 
 Officers commanding guards at the ports, are to cause the 
 bridges to be~drawn up or the barriers to be shut, on the ap- 
 proach of any body of armed men, of which they are to 
 give notice to the main guard, and are not to suffer any of 
 them to enter the garrison without leave from the com- 
 mandant. 
 
 It is the duty of officers on all guards, to inspect all re- 
 liefs of sentinels, both when they go on, and come off, their 
 posts ; to call the rolls frequently, and, by every means in 
 their power, to keep the men under their command in the 
 most perfect state of vigilance and preparation. They will 
 be responsible for the security of the prisoners and pioperty 
 committed to their charge ; and it will be their duty to sup- 
 press all riots and disorders, and, in case of fire, to give the 
 alarm and be instrumental in extinguishing it. They are 
 W2 357 
 
46 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 also watchfully to superintend the conduct of the non-com- 
 missioned officers, taking care that they are correct in flie 
 performance of their duty : that they maintain a proper autho- 
 rity, and prevent any species of irregularity among the men. 
 They must particularly ascertain that the Corporals them- 
 selves are well informed with respect to the orders they are 
 to deliver to the several sentinels, whom they must frequently 
 visit, to be assured that they know their duty, and have re- 
 ceived the proper instructions. 
 
 Officers commanding guards, when going to visit their 
 sentinels, are to mention their intention, and the probable 
 time of their absence, to the next officer in command. 
 
 The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, ex- 
 cept while visiting their sentinels ; nor are they to enter any 
 house or place of public amusement. 
 
 Neither officers nor soldiers are, on any account, to take 
 off their clothing or accoutrements while they are on guard ; 
 but are always to be in their uniform, fully equipped for the 
 service. 
 
 No non-commissioned officer or soldier is to quit his guard 
 without leave, which is to be granted only upon particular 
 occasions, and to very few at a time. If water or other 
 necessaries are wanted for the guard, they must be sent for 
 at a time when the sentinels are not relieving, by a non- 
 commissioned officer and some men, with their arms, if at 
 an outpost. 
 
 At every relief, the guard must parade for roll call and 
 inspection, and remain formed until the relief returns. 
 
 A patrol, consisting of an officer, (if there be more than 
 one on guard,) a non-commissioned officer, and a file of men, 
 will be sent out as often as may be deemed necessary, to see 
 that the sentinels understand their orders, to make observa- 
 tions, gain information, and apprehend suspected persons. 
 
 All reliefs and patrols will be conducted with the strictest 
 silence, and on their return the non-commissioned officer will 
 report to the officer of the guard every thing material that 
 has transpired during their absence. 
 
 During the day the men may be permitted to rest them- 
 selves so much as is consistent with the safety of the guard , 
 but, in the night, no man must be suffered" to lie down &. 
 sleep, on any account, but have his arms constantly in hie 
 hands, and be ready to fall in on the least alarm. 
 
 258 
 
TART IV. REGULATIONS. 47 
 
 The officer who mounts the camp guard, must give orders 
 to the sentinels not to sutler any person to pass in or out of 
 eamp, except by one of the guards ; nor then, till the officer 
 of the guard lias examined him. 
 
 During the day the sentinels on the outposts must stop 
 every party of men, whether armed or not, until they have 
 been examined by the officer of the guard. 
 
 No sentinel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by 
 the guard, either directly or through other sentinels. 
 
 A sentinel must take the greatest care not to be surprised. 
 He must keep himself on the alert, observing every thing 
 that takes place within his sight or hearing. He must never 
 quit his arms, but move about briskly and without speaking. 
 He must not suffer himself to be relieved, except by the Cor- 
 poral of the guard, or some superior of his guard. If a dis- 
 order take place, he must call out, the guard ; and if a fire 
 break out, he must cry, fire. If, in either case, the danger 
 be great, he must discharge his firelock before calling out. 
 
 A sentinel, placed over the colours or arms, must suffer no 
 person to touch them, except by order of some officer, or a 
 non-commissioned officer of the guard. If placed over pri- 
 soners, he must suffer no person, except an officer, or a non- 
 commissioned officer of his guard, to converse with them J 
 nor must he permit the prisoners to leave their places of con- 
 finement. 
 
 The sentinel at the guard-house or guard-tent, when he 
 sees any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, 
 approach, must call, turn out the guard. 
 
 The officer of the guard must see that the countersign is 
 duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twilight ; 
 to enable him to do which, he must be furnished, by the 
 officer of the day, with the parole and countersign before 
 retreat. 
 
 Immediately after receiving the countersign, and until re- 
 veille, the sentinels must challenge all who approach them 
 No sentinel must suffer any person to advance nearer than 
 the point of his bayonet until he has received the counter- 
 sign, placing himself in the position of arms port for that 
 purpose. 
 
 A sentinel in challenging, will call out — who comes there? 
 If answered— -friend, with the countersign, he will reply — 
 advance Sriend, with the countersign. If answered — relief, 
 
 259 
 
48 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 pqtrQ*, or grand rounds, he will reply — halt, advance, 
 Sergtant, (or Corporal) and give the countersign, and 
 satisfy himself that the party is what it represents itself to 
 be. If he have no authority to pass persons with the counter- 
 sign, or if the persons have not the countersign, he will call 
 — Corporal of the guard. 
 
 In case one of the guard desert, the officer must imme- 
 diately change the countersign, and send notice thereof to 
 the officer of the day, who is to communicate the same tc 
 the other guards and to head quarters. 
 
 Though the regulations dispense with guards turning out 
 as a matter of compliment, after sunset, this is by no means 
 to prevent sentinels, when officers in uniform approach their 
 post, paying them a proper attention, by standing steady, 
 with carried arms, facing to their proper front ; nor is this 
 to be discontinued until the evening is so far advanced that 
 the sentinels begin challenging. 
 
 When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a gar- 
 rison, all guards are to be immediately under arms ; the 
 barriers aFe to be shut, draw-bridges drawn up, and so con- 
 tinue until the fire is extinguished, or the alarm ceases. 
 
 The officer of the guard will send to the officer of the day , 
 at guard-mounting, by a non-commissioned officer, a report 
 pf his tour of service, according to the form on the opposite 
 page. 
 
 2&X 
 
PAUT IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 49 
 
 Report of a Guard, mounted at , on the , 
 
 and relieved on the . 
 
 Parole. 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 to 
 
 ■a 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 Articles in Charge. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Countersign. 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 bJD 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 Bl 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 6D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 VJ 
 
 u 
 
 CLJ 
 
 b 
 
 <3 
 
 -- 
 
 
 
 -- 
 
 -- 
 
 
 
 
 Detail - - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 1 
 
 List of the Guard. 
 
 
 Reliefs, and when posted. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Where 
 Posted. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 UtUetiefr 
 
 2d Relief, 
 
 "3d Relief, 
 
 £ 
 
 from 10 to 18, 
 
 "rom 12 to 2, 
 
 from 2 Jo 4 
 
 
 
 and 4 to 6. 
 
 and 6 to 8. 
 
 & 8 to 10. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 This column will con- 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 tain the remarks of the 
 officer of the guard ; such 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 as— the time the guard 
 was visited by the officer 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 of the day ; and an ac- 
 count of every material 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 circumstance that has 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 transpired during the tour. 
 
 List of Prisoners. 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Names 
 
 N 
 
 i=D 
 
 
 - ( 
 
 3harges. ' 
 
 Sentences. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 rt 
 
 When. 
 
 By whom. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 8 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. B. 
 
 Lieut, of Regiment of 
 
 
 
 
 
 Commanding the Guard. 
 
 2G1 
 
50 I>ART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 The officer of the day, immediately after being relieved, 
 will add to the guard report such remarks as circumstances 
 require, and present the same at head quarters. 
 
 An officer is not to be placed in charge of a guard, till 
 he is sufficiently acquainted with his duty. For the purpose 
 of instruction, young officers are to be put on duty as super- 
 numeraries, with senior officers, from whose advice and ex- 
 ample they may be expected to obtain a knowledge of their 
 dul;-. 
 
 ORDER OF ENCAMPMENT. 
 Infantry. — (See Plate 1.) 
 
 The troops are on all occasions to be encamped in the or- 
 der of battle. 
 
 The front of the camp will occupy the same extent of 
 ground, as the troops when drawn up in line, according to 
 their established formation. The intervals between the bat- 
 talions will be forty-four feet. 
 
 The companies will encamp in streets, perpendicularly to 
 the line ; one-half of the tents on each side of the streets, 
 facing inwards. The width of the streets wiil depend on 
 the strength of the companies. The distance between each 
 tent will be two feet; the distance between the tents of one 
 company and those of another, four feet. 
 
 Thus, a regiment of six hundred men will occupy a front 
 of six hundred feet each, allowing for each file two feet 
 This front will be divided as follows: — First, deduct forty 
 feet for the main street leading through the centre of the 
 camp to the Colonel's or commanding officer's marquee , 
 there will then remain five hundred and sixty feet, to be di- 
 vided among the companies on either side of the main street ; 
 and if there be ten of them, each company will be allowed 
 a front of fifty-six feet. 
 
 The following will be the dimensions of a camp for a re 
 giment of six hundred men : 
 
 Front, 600 feet. 
 
 Depth, 810 feet. 
 
 Feet. 
 From the front of the line of company-tents to the 
 
 chain-sentinels of the first line, 500 
 
 262 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 61 
 
 This space to be subdivided as follows : Feet. 
 From the front line of company-tents to the stacks 
 
 of arms, drums, and colours, 20 
 
 Thence to the regimental parade, 60 
 
 Thence to the sinks of the men, 320 
 
 Thence to the front of the officer of guard's tent, . . 60 
 
 Thence to the chain of sentinels, 40 
 
 From the first line of company-tents to the front of 
 
 the company officers' tents, 140 
 
 This space to be subdivided as follows : 
 From the front of the company officers' tents to the 
 
 company kitchens, 30 
 
 Thence to the front of the company-tents, 110 
 
 From the front of the company officers' tents to the 
 
 front of the tents of the field and stafF, 40 
 
 Thence to the kitchens of the officers and tents of 
 
 sutlers, 40 
 
 Thence to batmans' tents, , 16 
 
 Thence to horses and baggage- wagons, 20 
 
 Thence to officers' sinks, 30 
 
 Thence to the quarter-guard,. 12 
 
 Thence to the chain of sentinels, 12 
 
 The tents of all the officers will face towards the front ; 
 those of the Captains will be placed on a prolongation of the 
 line of the right flanks of the companies, and those of the 
 subalterns on a prolongation of the line of the left flanks ; 
 the Colonel's or commanding officer's marquee in the centre 
 of the main street ; the Lieutenant-Colonel's opposite to the 
 centre of the right wing ; the Major's opposite to the centre 
 of the left wing ; the Adjutant half-way between the Colonel 
 and Lieutenant- Colonel ; the Surgeon half-way between the 
 Colonel and Major ; the Quartermaster on the right of the 
 Lieutenant-Colonel, half-way between his position and the 
 flank ; the Assistant-Surgeon on the left of the Major, half- 
 way between his position and the flank. 
 
 The non-commissioned staff to be encamped on the pro- 
 .ongation of the lines of tents, and in a line with the compa- 
 
 263 
 
S2 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 ny kitchens, on each side of the main street, facing from the 
 street. 
 
 The Sergeants of companies to occupy a tent on the right 
 of their companies, in the front line. The Corporals to be 
 distributed among their respective squads. 
 
 The company kitchens will be placed, those of the right 
 wing, on a line with the right of the companies j those of 
 the left wing, on a line with the left of the companies. 
 
 The sinks will always be hid from public view, by encir- 
 cling them with bushes or other blinds ; a portion of the 
 earth dug out of them ought every day be thrown in to co- 
 ver the filth, should the troops remain encamped on the same 
 ground any length of time. 
 
 When the army encamps in two lines, the second line will 
 be formed eight hundred feet in rear of the first. 
 
 The camp-guards of the second line will be the same dis- 
 tance in the rear that they are in. front, in the first line ; and 
 also the sinks of the men. 
 
 Cavalry. — (See Plate 2.) 
 
 The cavalry will encamp by squadrons, each squadron 
 occupying the same front that it does when drawn up in the 
 order of battle, with the same intervals being preserved be- 
 tween the squadrons. 
 
 Two companies constitute a squadron. Each company of 
 a squadron pitches its tents in one row perpendicularly to the 
 front, facing inwards. The horses of each company are 
 picketed in a line parallel to the tents, with their heads to- 
 wards them. Each horse, so picketed, will require about 
 five feet ; the depth of the row will depend or the number 
 of horses in the company. The tents will be pitched at 
 equal distances from each other, so as to allow space between 
 them respectively, for the forage of the horses belonging to 
 the men of the respective tents. The tents of the Sergeants 
 will always be pitched at the head of the row, and on the 
 line of encampment. The distance between the Sergeant's 
 tent and the adjacent tent, will be double the distance be- 
 tween the other tents, so as to allow for the forage for the 
 Sergeants' horses, and those of the men in the next tent, 
 and thus rendering it unnecessary to place the forage of the 
 last tent in the row, on the side of the kitchens, where it 
 might be exposed to fire. 
 ' " 264 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 53 
 
 Each company of sixty mounted dragoons, will occupy a 
 front of ninety feet, which will be divided as follows : 
 
 Feet. 
 
 For pitching a horseman's tent, 9 
 
 From front poll of tents to pickets, 12 
 
 From pickets to the edge of the dung, 18 
 
 Breadth of the dung, .................... 6 
 
 A squadron of two companies will occupy a front of 180 
 feet, so that there will bo between the dung of each compa- 
 ny, a street of 90 feet. 
 
 If a company encamp by itself, it will observe the same 
 rule, except that it will be formed in two rows of tents, in- 
 stead of one. 
 
 If there be an odd company in a squadron, or with the 
 regiment, it will encamp in the same manner as is directed 
 for the other companies of the squadron ; that is, in one row, 
 and facing towards the company next to it, whether it be on 
 the right or the left, preserving a distance equal to its front 
 when in line. 
 
 The horses of the rearrrank are always to be picketed 
 next to their file-leaders,. 
 
 The horses of company officers are to be picketed in a 
 line with the company horses, on the flank towards the offi- 
 cers' tents. 
 
 The non-commissioned staff will encamp in a line with 
 the field and staff. 
 
 The horses of the field and staff are to be picketed in the 
 rear of their respective tents. 
 
 The remainder of the encampment, including guards, bag- 
 gage, sutlers, kitchens, batmen, and sinks, will conform to 
 that of the infantry. 
 
 Artillery. — (See Plates 1 and 2.) 
 
 The artillery will encamp in such positions as may be se- 
 lected by the commander of the troops to which it may be 
 attached, who will always take into consideration the pro- 
 tection proper to be afforded from the line, as well -as the 
 facility with which it may get into position, in case of an at? 
 tack: but batteries which form a part of the order of battle, 
 will encamp upon the same line with the troops. Mounted 
 artillery will encamp according to the order for the cavalry, 
 aqd foot-artillery according to the order for the infantry. 
 X 265 
 
PI 1. 
 
 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 ORDER OF ENCAMPMENT FOR A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY 
 
 #>-■>- ...... — .... _.-. Chain of Sentinels. ,- 
 
 • : I ? 
 
 * «"r ID fer Fect 9 
 
 1 Camp Gua<il. 
 
 its: e 
 
 !00 O O Men'. Slnlw. o O « i 
 
 Regimental Parade Ground. - 
 
 | ; 
 
 Ml. 
 
 r 
 
 B 
 
 ..J*- -Line of Colour, and *.L3bi»«..- ril.» of Arms -. J 
 
 Front Liu. of Company Tents. 8 
 
 B *» gg « gg «• gg " | 40 | 50 gg 56 gg 56 |1 56 g 
 
 ^s ee s e gg gg gg 
 
 Is 
 
 I li II il 1 I II 
 
 ss 
 
 Compiny ' i Kitche 
 
 „, 
 
 s 
 
 p CD a D. " , b D 
 
 NcnCoinralMloneu Staff. 
 
 
 
 a i 
 
 Company Omcur. 
 
 
 
 B3 610 BE EQ sa 
 
 Ufl 
 
 m & 
 
 Field I md ! EUK 
 
 
 
 • D B io: il 
 
 ID 
 
 Bf 
 
 OBcen' Kitchen. : 
 
 
 
 Q Q 13 (3 Bs»l)«D 
 
 
 
 Eilm.n'i ,' TenU 
 
 
 
 
 
 i « b 8-"« hi imt 
 
 8 
 
 * j 
 
 
 
 
 Quarter ^ KJ • On.rd. 
 
 
 i 
 
 266 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 ORDER OP ENCAMPMENT FOR TWO SOUADRONS 
 
 PI. 2 
 
 OP CAVALRY 
 
 >•• •>-— «•-• "O -o- 
 
 ■fl V 
 
 i Camp Guard. • 
 
 ! n i 
 
 -+- Men'aaUnka.4 O- O- 
 
 8 
 
 j 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 i i 
 
 : 1 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 ! i 
 
 Parade j 
 
 i 
 
 • Ground. .a 
 
 t 4 
 
 j i 
 
 
 si 
 
 Front Line of I 
 
 piTT"]T so ■>r« 5 Er" 
 
 • Companj 
 
 IBO »•* 
 
 '4 
 
 jsi | 
 
 Ej 
 
 hi 
 
 !! 
 H 
 
 g' 
 
 PI 1 il 
 
 *. 
 
 E! !i 
 
 
 I 
 
 ti 
 
 HI KM 
 
 W8 lilN 
 
 bt-J 
 
 
 Nil! 
 
 :! 
 
 ■i 
 
 j] 
 
 J 
 
 Ml liM 
 
 Nil 
 
 1! 
 
 si 
 
 P-Ujf U»UE| 
 
 j.ij] ILL; 
 
 ifcL& 
 
 i i jj 
 
 IL 
 
 4 
 
 — i 
 
 
 fl i^cit. ID 
 
 a 
 
 .~....ji 
 
 ID"" U" ""company" " ID ~ "IJJ " 
 
 kr-ir 
 
 ■;i.-i--B-e( 
 
 r"""u m iff- 
 
 "13— -rm 
 
 Staff. . 3 
 
 j Q"""3L' : «™.'"I1^EI" 
 
 •TQ" """"Batmen'a 
 
 J L Horsea and 
 
 j.nl..o o o 
 
 £." """" ""'Qial 
 
 -Q-- 
 
 _"_Bnt!M. 
 3fflcera.8inla. 
 
 .'.VS.'." '.'. 
 
 a"-"LT 
 a-— 
 
 xTlcnVn»T"~EI" 
 "Tenia. 
 Wajona. 
 
 o o— 
 
 3 
 
00 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 HONOURS TO BE PAID BY THE TROOPS. 
 
 The President is to be saluted with the highest hqrours — 
 all standards and colours dropping, officers saluting, drums 
 beating, and trumpets sounding. 
 
 The same compliments will be paid to the Vice President. 
 
 A Major-General commanding in chief, is to be received 
 — by cavalry, with swords drawn, trumpets sounding the 
 march, and all the officers saluting, standards dropping — by 
 infantry, with drums beating the march, colours dropping, - 
 officers saluting, and arms presented. 
 
 A Major-General is to be received — by cavalry, with 
 swords drawn, trumpets sounding twice the trumpet flourish, 
 and officers saluting — by infantry, with three ruffles, colours 
 dropping, officers saluting, and arms presented. 
 
 A Brigadier-General is to be received — by cavalry, with 
 swords drawn, trumpets sounding once the trumpet flourish, 
 and officers saluting — by infantry, with two ruffles, colours 
 dropping, officers saluting, and arms presented. 
 
 An Adjutant-General or Inspector-General, if under the 
 rank of a general officer, is to be received at a review, or 
 inspection of the troops under arms — by cavalry, with swords 
 drawn, officers saluting— by infantry, officers saluting and 
 arms presented. The same honours to be paid to any field 
 officer, authorized to review and inspect the troops. When 
 the inspecting officer is junior in rank to the officer on the 
 parade, and in the command of the troops to be inspected, 
 no compliments will be paid ; he will be received with only 
 swords drawn and arms shouldered. 
 
 All guards are to turn out and present arms to general 
 officers as often as they pass them, except the personal guards 
 of general officers, which turn out pnly to the General? 
 whose guards they are, and to officers of superior rank. 
 
 To Colonels, the guards of their own regiments turn out, 
 and present arms once a day ; after which they turn out 
 with shouldered arms. 
 
 To Lieutenant-Colonels and Majors, their own guards 
 turn out with shouldered arms, once a day ; at other times, 
 with ordered arms. 
 
 When the command of a regiment devolves on a Lieuten 
 ant-Colonel or Major, the regimental guards will pay him 
 the same compliment as is ordered for the Colonel. 
 
 268 
 
TART IV. REGULATIONS. 67 
 
 To the Secretary of State, Treasury, War, and Navy 
 Departments, and other members of the Cabinet ; to the 
 Chief Justice, the President pro tempore if the Senate, and 
 Speaker of the House of Representatives of the Unitea 
 States, and to Governors, within their respective States and 
 Territories — the same honours will be paid as are specified 
 for a Major-General commanding in chief. 
 
 The colours of a regiment passing a guard, are to be sa- 
 luted with the utmost respect, the trumpets sounding, and the 
 drums beating a march. 
 
 When two regiments meet on their march, the regiment 
 inferior in rank is to halt, and form in parade order, and sa- 
 lute the other regiment, which proceeds on its march, with 
 swords drawn and bayonets fixed, trumpets sounding or 
 drums beating, standards or colours flying, until it has clear- 
 ed the front of the regiment which has halted. 
 
 When guards present their arms, the officers, on all occa- 
 sions, salute with their swords. 
 
 When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass 
 in the rear of a guard, the officer is oply to make his men 
 stand shouldered, and not to face his guard about, or beat 
 his drum. 
 
 When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass 
 guards while in the act of relieving, both guards are to sa- 
 lute, receiving the word of command from the senior officer 
 of the whole. 
 
 All guards are to be under arms when armed parties ap- 
 proach their posts ; and to parties commanded by commis- 
 sioned officers, they are to present their arms, drums beating 
 a march, and officers saluting. 
 
 Sentinels will present arms to all general and field officers, 
 and to the officer of the day ; to all other officers they will 
 carry arms. 
 
 No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid be- 
 tween retreat and reveille, except as prescribed for grand 
 rounds. 
 
 Sergeants, with swords drawn, will salute by bringing 
 them to a recover — with muskets, by bringing the left hand 
 across the body, so as to strike the musket near the right 
 shoulder. Corporals out of the ranks will carry their mus- 
 kets at a shoulder, as Secgeantts, and salute in like manner 
 
 When a soldier without arms, or with side arms only 
 X 2 2fi9 
 
58 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 meets an officer, he will continue to move on, but he is to 
 raise his hand to his cap, looking at the same time in a re- 
 spectful and soldier-like manner at the officer, who will make 
 a suitable acknowledgment to the compliment thus received. 
 
 Salutes. 
 
 The President of the United States alone is to receive 
 the national salute. 
 
 The national salute is determined by the number of States 
 composing the Union, at the rate of one gun for each State. 
 
 The Vice President is to receive a salute of twenty-one 
 guns. 
 
 The Heads of the great Executive Departments of the 
 National Government; the Major -General commanding the 
 army; the Governors of States and Territories, within 
 their respective jurisdictions — seventeen guns. 
 
 A Major-General, fifteen guns. 
 
 A Brigadier-General, thirteen guns. 
 
 A general officer will be saluted but once in a year at each 
 post, and only when notice of his intention to visit the post 
 has been given. 
 
 Salutes to individuals are to be fired on their arrival only. 
 
 A national salute will be fired at meridian, on the anniver- 
 sary of the Independence of the United States, at each mili- 
 tary post and camp. 
 
 Escorts of Honour. 
 
 Escorts of honour may be composed of cavalry or infan- 
 try, or both, according to circumstances. They are guards 
 of honour, for the purpose of receiving and escorting per- 
 sonages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for this 
 purpose will be selected for their soldierly appearance and 
 superior discipline, and the duty must always be considered 
 as one of high distinction. 
 
 The manner of receiving and escorting the personage is 
 as follows : 
 
 The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre opposite to 
 the place where the personage presents himself, with an in- 
 terval between the wings to receive the personage and his 
 retinue. On his appearance, he will be received with the 
 honours due to his rank. When he has taken his place in 
 the line, the whole will be wheeled into platoons or compa- 
 
 270 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 59 
 
 nies, as the case may be, and take up the march. The same 
 ceremony will be observed, and the same honours paid, on 
 his leaving the escort. 
 
 When the position of the escort is at a considerable dis- 
 tance from the point where the personage is expected to be 
 received, as for instance, where a court-yard or wharf inter- 
 venes, a double line of sentinels will be posted from that 
 point to the escort, facing inwards, and the sentinels will suc- 
 cessively salute as the personage passes. 
 
 An officer will be appointed to attend the personage escort- 
 ed, to bear such communications as he may have to make to 
 the commander of the escort. 
 
 Funeral Honours. 
 
 On the receipt of official intelligence of the death of the 
 President of the United States, at any post or camp, the 
 commanding officer shall, on the following day, cause a gun 
 to be fired at every half-hour, beginning at sunrise and end- 
 ing at sunset. When posts are contiguous, the firing will 
 take place at the post only commanded by the superior 
 officer. 
 
 On the day of the interment of a Major-General com- 
 manding in chief, a gun will be fired at every half-hour, 
 until the procession moves, beginning at sunrise. 
 
 The funeral escort of a Major-General commanding in 
 chief, shall consist of a regiment of infantry, a squadron of 
 cavalry, and six pieces of artillery. 
 
 That of a Major -General, a regiment of infantry, a squad- 
 ron of cavalry, and four pieces of artillery. 
 
 That of a Brigadier- General, a regiment of infantry, one 
 company of cavalry, and two pieces of artillery. 
 
 That of a Colonel, a regiment. 
 
 That of a Lieutenant-Colonel, six companies. 
 
 That of a Major, four companies. 
 
 That of a Captain, one company. 
 
 That of a Subaltern, half a company. 
 
 The funeral escort shall always be commanded by an of- 
 ficer of the same rank with the deceased ; or if none such be 
 present, by one of the next inferior grade. 
 
 The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer 
 shall consist of sixteen rank and fiie, commanded nv a Ser- 
 geant. 
 
 271 
 
60 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 That of a Sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded 
 by a Sergeant. 
 
 That of a Corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded 
 by a Corporal ; and 
 
 That of a Private, of eight rank and file, commanded by 
 a Corporal. 
 
 The escort wjll be formed in two ranks, opposite to the 
 quarters or tent of the deceased, with shouldered arms and 
 bayonets fixed; the artillery and cavalry on the right of the 
 infantry. 
 
 On the appearance of the corpse, the officer commanding 
 the escort will command — present-arms,' when the honours 
 due to the deceased will be paid by the drums and trumpets. 
 The music will then play an appropriate air, and the coffin 
 will be taken to the right, where it will be halted. The com- 
 mander will next order— Shoulder-arms. By company (or 
 platoon)-left wheel-march. Column-forward, guide right- 
 march. 
 
 The column will be marched, in common time, to appro? 
 priate music ; and, on reaching the grave, will take a direc- 
 tion so as that the guides shall be next to the grave. When 
 the centre of the column is opposite the grave, the com- 
 mander will order — Column-halt. Right into line-wheel — 
 march. 
 
 The coffin is then brought along the front, and the com- 
 mander then orders — Present-arms ; and when the coffin 
 reaches th« grave, he adds — Shoulder-arms. Order— arms. 
 Rest. 
 
 After th« funeral service is performed, and the coffin is 
 lowered into the grave, the commander will orderr-T-j&tten- 
 tion. Shoulder- arms. Load in quickest time. Load;—?? 
 when three rounds of small arms will be fired by the escort, 
 taking care to elevate the pieces. 
 
 This being done, the commander will order — By company 
 (or platoon), right wheel-march. Column forward, guide 
 left, quick— march. 
 
 The music will not begin to play until the escort is clear 
 of the enclosure or burying-ground. 
 
 COLOUR ESCORT. 
 
 When a battalion turns out under arms, and the colour is 
 wanted, one of the flank companies in its turn, or if both b* 
 
 27a 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 61 
 
 absent, a battalion company, other than that of the colour, 
 will be put in march to receive and escort the colour. 
 
 The march will be in the following order, in quick time, 
 and without music : — the drum-major and field-music, fol- 
 lowed by the band ; the escort in column, by platoon, right 
 in front, with arms shifted to the right shoulder, and the co- 
 lour-bearer between the platoons. 
 
 Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the Colonel, 
 the escort will form line, the field-music and band on the 
 right, and arms will be carried. 
 
 The moment the escort shall be in line, this colour-bearer, 
 preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a sergeant 
 of the escort, will go to receive the colour. 
 
 When the colour-bearer shall come out,- followed by the 
 lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the entrance ; 
 the escort will present arms, and the drums will beat to the 
 colour for half a minute^ when arms will be shouldered and 
 the escort will break into column by platoon ; the colour- 
 bearer will place himself between the platoons, and the lieu- 
 tenant and sergeant will resume their posts. 
 
 The escort will march back to the battalion to the sound 
 of music, in quick time, and in the same order as above. 
 
 Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the battal- 
 ion, the escort will hah% and the music cease ; the Colonel 
 will place himself six paces before the centre of the battalion, 
 the colour-bearer will approach the Colonel, by the front, in 
 quick time ; when at the distance of ten paces, ho will halt ; 
 the Colonel will cause arms to be presented, and to the co- 
 lour to be played, which being executed, the colour-bearer 
 will take his place in the front-rank of the colour-guard, and 
 the battalion, by command, will shoulder arms. 
 
 The escort, field-music, and band, will return in quick 
 time to their several places in the line of battle, marching by 
 the rear of the battalion; 
 
 The colour will be escorted back to the Colonel's tent or 
 quarters, in the above order. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 A battalion being in the order of battle, the Colonel will 
 command — Battalion, prepare for review. To the 
 
 REAR OPEN ORDER-MARCH 
 
 273 
 
62 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 At the word march, the field and staff' officers dismount , 
 the company officers and the colour- rank advance four paces 
 in front of the first rank, and place themselves opposite to 
 their respective places in the order of battle ; the staff officers 
 place themselves on the right of the rank of company offi- 
 cers, according to their relative rank, one pace from each 
 other ; the music advances through the centre, and forms in 
 two ranks — the band, if there be one, in front, between the 
 colours and the line ; the colour-guard replace the colour- 
 rank ; the Quartermaster-Sergeant and the Sergeant- Major 
 on the right of the front-rank of the battalion. 
 
 When the ranks are aligned, the Colonel will command — 
 front, and place himself eight paces, the Lieutenant-Colonel 
 and Major two paces, in front of the rank of company offi- 
 cers, and opposite to their respective places in the order of 
 battle. 
 
 A camp colour is to be originally placed eighty or one hun- 
 dred paces in front of the centre of the battalion, where the re- 
 viewing officer is supposed to take his station ; and although 
 he may choose to quit that position, still the colour is to be 
 considered as the point to which all movements and forma- 
 tions are relative. 
 
 When the reviewing officer presents himself before the 
 centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the Colonel will 
 command — present— arms. The men present arms, and 
 the officers salute, so as to drop their swords with the last 
 motion of presented arms ; the music will play, and all the 
 drums will beat, according to the rank of the reviewing of- 
 ficer. The colours only salute such persons as, from their 
 rank and by regulation, are entitled to that honour. 
 
 The Colonel will next command — shoulder-arms, when 
 the men will shoulder, and the officers recover their swords 
 with the last motion. 
 
 The reviewing officer will then go towards the right, the 
 whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying any fur- 
 ther compliment, while he passes along the front of the bat- 
 talion and proceeds round the left flank and along the rear 
 to the right. W hen the reviewing officer is going round the 
 battalion, the band will play, and will cease when he has 
 returned to the right flank of the battalion. 
 
 While the reviewing officer is proceeding to place him- 
 self in the front, the Colonel will command — close order— 
 
 274 
 
TART IV. REGULATIONS. 63 
 
 march, when all persons, except the Colonel, will resume 
 their places in the order of battle ; the field and staff officers 
 mounted. 
 
 The reviewing officer having taken his position near the 
 camp colour, the Colonel will command — by company, 
 
 RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH. PASS IN REVIEW. COLUMN, FOR- 
 
 ward, guide right-march. The battalion will break into 
 column of companies, right in front, and the column will be 
 put in motion ; the Colonel four paces in front of the Captain 
 of the leading company ; the Lieutenant-Colonel on a line 
 with the leading company ; the Major on a line with the rear 
 company ; the Adjutant on a line with the second company ; 
 the Sergeant-Major on a line with the company next to the 
 rear ; each six paces from the flank opposite to the review- 
 ing officer ; the staff officers in one rank, according to the 
 order of precedency, four paces in rear of the column ; the 
 music, preceded by the principal musician, six paces before 
 the Colonel ; the pioneers, preceded by a Corporal, four 
 paces before the principal musician ; and the Quartermaster- 
 Sergeant two paces from the side opposite to the guides, and 
 in a line with the pioneers. 
 
 All other officers and non-commissioned officers will march 
 past in the places prescribed for them in the march of an 
 open column. 
 
 The guides and soldiers will keep their heads well to the 
 front in passing in review. 
 
 The colour-bearer will remain in the ranks while passing 
 and saluting. 
 
 Points will be fixed by the Adjutant for the several wheel- 
 ings of the divisions ; so that their right flanks, in marching 
 past, shall be only four paces distant from the camp colour, 
 where it is supposed the reviewing officer places himself to 
 receive the salute. 
 
 The column will march past in common time, with closed 
 ranks. 
 
 The music will begin to play just after the leading com- 
 pany has made the second wheel ; it will wheel to the left 
 out of the column, and take a position opposite to, and fac- 
 ing, the reviewing officer, and will continue to play until the 
 rear of the column shall have passed him, when it will cease 
 to play and follow in the rear of the battalion. 
 
 The officers will salute the reviewing officer when they 
 
 275 
 
64 PART IV. REGULATIONS." 
 
 arrive within six paces of him, and recover their swoid? 
 when ten paces past him, without in the least altering the 
 rate of march. All officers in saluting, will cast their eyes 
 towards the reviewing officer. The Colonel, when he has 
 saluted at the head of the battalion, will place himself neai 
 the reviewing officer, and will remain there until the rear 
 has passed, when he will join the battalion. 
 
 The colour will salute the reviewing officer when within 
 six paces of him. When the colour salutes, the drums will 
 pay the prescribed compliment. 
 
 When the rear Of the column has passed the reviewing 
 officer, the Colonel will command — guide left. 
 
 The column will proceed on the alignment until it shall 
 have arrived at the point where its head or right is to be 
 placed, when the Colonel will corrimand^coLUMN, halt, 
 left into line wheel-march. It will then be wheeled 
 into line; and placed in the order of battle. 
 
 When the line shall have been formed, the Colonel will 
 cause the battalion to perform such exercises and manoeu- 
 vres as may be required by the reviewing officer. 
 
 The review will terminate by bringing the troops into line 
 opposite t<5 the reviewing officer, ranks opened, and the whole 
 saluting as at the beginning. 
 
 When two or more battalions are to be reviewed, they 
 will be formed In parade order, with the prescribed intervals, 
 and will perform the same movements that are laid down for 
 a single battalion, observing the additional directions that are 
 given for such movements when applied to the line. The 
 Brigadier and his staff, on foot, will place themselves oppo- 
 site the centre of the brigade ; the Brigadier two paces in 
 front of the rank of Colonels ; his aid on his right, one pace 
 retired; and the other brigade staff officers, those having the 
 rank of field officers, in the rank of Lieutenant-Colonels and 
 Majors : and those below tltat rank, in the rank of company 
 officers. 
 
 In passing in revie\v, a Major-General will be four paces 
 in front of the Colonel of the leading battalion of his divi- 
 sion ; and the Brigadiers will be on the right of the Colonels 
 of the leading battalions of their brigades ; staff officers on 
 the left of their Generals. 
 
 Upon occasions when the line exceeds two battalions, the 
 reviewing officer may, at his option, cause them to march 
 
 276 
 
FART IV. RECUSATIONS. 65 
 
 past in quick time, in order to save time. Upon these occa- 
 sions the mounted officers only will salute. 
 
 A number of companies less than a battalion, will be re- 
 viewed as a battalion ; and a single company, as if it wero 
 with the battalion. In the latter case, the company will pass 
 in column of platoons, according to the order of the review- 
 ing officer. 
 
 The review of cavalry or artillery, mounted, or with 
 pieces, will be conducted on the same principles, allowing 
 for the difference of organization, and the words of com- 
 mand appropriate to the respective arms 
 
 INSPECTION. 
 
 The inspection of the troops will generally be preceded by 
 a review. The present example embraces a battalion of in- 
 fantry. The inspecting officer and the field and staff officers 
 will be on foot. 
 
 The battalion being in the order of battle, the Colonel 
 will cause it to break into open column of companies, right 
 in front. ■ He will next order the ranks to be opened, when 
 the colour-rank and colour-guard will take post ten paces in 
 front, and the band ten paces in rear of the column. 
 
 The Colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command — 
 
 OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS, TO THE FRONT 
 
 of your companies-march. The officers will form them- 
 selves in one rank, eight paces, and the non-commissioned 
 officers in one rank, six paces, in advance, along the whole 
 fronts of their respective companies, from right to left, in the 
 order of seniority ; the pioneers and music of each company 
 in one rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned officers. 
 
 The Colonel will next command — field and staff. To 
 the front-march. The commissioned officers thus desig- 
 nated, will form themselves in one rank, six paces in front 
 of the colours, from right to left, in the order of seniority ; 
 and the non-commissioned staff, in a similar manner, two 
 paces in rear of the preceding rank. The Colonel, seeing 
 the movement executed, will take post on the right of the 
 Lieutenant-Colonel, and wait the approach of the inspecting 
 officer. 
 
 The inspection will commence in front. After inspecting 
 the dress and general appearance of the field and commis- 
 sioned staff under arms, the Inspector, accompanied by these 
 Y 277 
 
66 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 officers, will pass down the open column, looking at every 
 rank in front and rear. 
 
 The Colonel will now command — order arms. Rest ; 
 when the Inspector will proceed to make a minute inspection 
 of the several ranks or divisions, in succession, commencing 
 in front. 
 
 As the Inspector approaches the non-commissioned staff, 
 colour-rank, the colour-guard, and the band, the Adjutant 
 will give the necessary orders for the inspection of arms, 
 boxes, and knapsacks. The colours will be planted firm ic 
 the ground, to enable the colour-bearers to display the con 
 tents of their knapsacks. The non-commissioned staff may 
 be dismissed as soon as inspected ; but the colour-rank anf 
 colour-guard will remain until the colours are to be escorten 
 to the place from which they were taken. 
 
 As the Inspector successively approaches the companies, 
 the Captains will command — attention, inspection of arms 
 The Inspector will go through the whole company, com. 
 mencing with the non-commissioned officers. The Captain 
 will then command — open-boxes; when they will also bo 
 inspected. 
 
 The Captain will next command — Stack-arms. To the 
 rear, open order-march. Front-rank, about-face. Tin- 
 sling-knapsacks. Open-knapsacks. The arms of the non- 
 commissioned officers will be stacked in the centre of their 
 rank. 
 
 The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men, the 
 flaps from them, with the great-coats on the flaps, and the 
 knapsacks leaning on the great-coats. In this position the 
 Inspector will examine the contents of the whole, or of as 
 many as he may think necessary, commencing with the non- 
 commissioned officers. 
 
 As the Inspector passes the companies, they will succes- 
 sively, under the orders of their respective Captains, repack 
 and resling knapsacks, resume their arms, and file off to 
 their tents or quarters ; except the company that is to re- 
 escort the colours, which will wait the further orders of the 
 Colonel. 
 
 In an extensive column, some of the rearmost companies 
 may, after the inspection of dress and general appearance, 
 be permitted to stack arms, until just before the Inspector 
 
 278 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 67 
 
 approaches them, when they will be directed to take arms, 
 and resume their positions. 
 
 The inspection of the troops being ended, the field and 
 staff will next accompany the inspector to the hospital, ma- 
 gazine, arsenal, quarters, sutler's shop, guard-house, and 
 such other places as ho may think proper to inspect. The 
 Captains and subalterns will precede him in his visits to their 
 companies and sections respectively. 
 
 The men will be formed in the company quarters in front 
 of their respective bunks, and on the entrance of the In- 
 spector the word attention will be given by the senior non- 
 commissioned officer present, when the whole will salute 
 with the hand, without uncovering. 
 
 The Inspector will examine the general arrangement of 
 the interior of the quarters, the bunks and bedding, cooking 
 and table utensils, and such other objects as may present 
 themselves ; and afterwards the exterior. 
 
 The Adjutant will exhibit to the Inspector the regimental 
 books and papers, including those relating to the transactions 
 of the council of administration. The company books and 
 papers will also be exhibited, the whole together, generally 
 at the Adjutant's office, and in presence of all the officers 
 not otherwise particularly employed. 
 
 Inspections, similar to those embraced jn this article, will 
 be made monthly, and as much oftener as may be deemed 
 necessary by the commanders of regiments and posts. Cap- 
 tains will do the like on every Saturday morning, and Lieu- 
 tenants of sections on every Wednesday morning, each in 
 regard to his company or section respectively. Surgeons 
 will also make a thorough inspection of their hospitals every 
 Saturday morning. 
 
 Besides these inspections, frequent visits will be made daily 
 to the quarters of their men or patients, by company officers 
 and Surgeons; and the Colonel or other commander will 
 make frequent general visits in the course of the month, to 
 the men's quarters, the hospital, guard-house, and the like. 
 
 The muster of the troops for payment, will be preceded 
 by an inspection. 
 
 The inspection of cavalry and artillery will conform to the 
 principles laid down for the infantry, regard being had to the 
 words of command appropriate to the respective arms. 
 
 279 
 
68 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 CALLING OUT THE MILITIA FOR THE SERVICE 
 OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 Whenever detachments of militia are called into the ser- 
 vice of the United States, by any officer authorized to make 
 such call, the number of officers, non-commissioned officers, 
 and privates, will be stated in the requisition, and the pro- 
 portions between them will be the same as is prescribed by 
 the act of Congress. Requisitions will never be made for 
 companies, regiments, or brigades. 
 
 Such detachments as are called or received into the ser- 
 vice of the United States, will be mustered before they shall 
 be considered in service, by an Inspector- General, or some 
 other officer of the regular army, to be designated by the of- 
 ficer requiring such militia aid. 
 
 It shall be the duty of the officer designated, to muster and 
 inspect militia detachments, to organize them into companies, 
 battalions, and regiments, and to forward muster jolls of 
 each company, and of the field and staff of each organized 
 regiment, direct to the Adjutant-General of the army, Wash- 
 ington ; and he will also immediately forward a consolidated 
 return, by regiments and corps, of the force so received into 
 service, for the information of the War Department. 
 
 Officers charged with the duty of mustering militia, pro- 
 perly ordered into the service of the United States, prepara- 
 tory to payment, will take care that the muster rolls contain 
 all the information that may in any way affect their pay : 
 the distance from the places of residence to the place of ren- 
 dezvous or organization, and the date of arrival, must be 
 stated in each case ; the date and place of discharge, and the 
 distance thence to the place of residence ; all stoppages for 
 articles furnished by the government, must be noted on the 
 rolls, and in cases of absence at the time of discharge of the 
 company, the cause of absence must be stated. When the 
 necessary information cannot be obtained, the mustering of- 
 ficer will state the cause, otherwise he will be held accounta 
 ble for the defect. 
 
 No general staff officers will be mustered or received into 
 service, except such general officers, with their aides-de- 
 camp, as may be required to complete the organization of 
 brigades or divisions, where the strength of the detachments 
 renders such organization necessary. 
 
 280 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 69 
 
 All supernumerary officers will be rejected, and the or- 
 ganization of each detachment will correspond with the acts 
 of Congress regulating the militia. 
 
 Payments will, in all cases, be made by "the Paymasters 
 of the regular army, and only upon rolls which shall have 
 previously been submitted to the Paymaster-General, and 
 found by him to be in conformity with law, and the regula 
 tions of the department. 
 
 MANNER OF ISSUING AND DISTRIBUTING 
 ORDERS. 
 
 Orders are either general or special. General orders, is- 
 sued from the head quarters of the army, are styled General 
 Orders — from other head quarters, they are simply styled 
 Orders. They are the orders of the day, and are published 
 as often as circumstances may render it necessary. They 
 announce the orderly hours at head quarters ; the time and 
 places of the distribution of supplies ; the time and order of 
 march ; the hours of the different beats and signals, of guard 
 mounting, and the assembling of detachments ; the regula- 
 tions of police ; the strength and composition of guards, and 
 the periods of their relief; the number and grades of Order- 
 lies ; the appointing of general courts martial, courts of in- 
 quiry, boards of officers, and their sentences and opinions ; 
 the commendations, or animadversions which the conduct of 
 the troops may elicit, as well as exhortations suitable to par- 
 ticular occasions ; and in general, every occurrence proper 
 to be communicated to the troops or others interested. 
 
 Special orders, are such orders as" do not relate to the 
 service in general. They have reference to particular ob- 
 jects and individuals only. They need not, therefore, be 
 published to the whole army, or to the whole command of 
 the officer who issues them. Besides the particular indivi- 
 dual to whom such orders may be sent direct, they are, how- 
 ever, to be communicated, as a matter of course, to Colonels, 
 or other commanders whom they intex-est. 
 
 Orders are to be numbered — general orders, in one se- 
 ries — -special orders, in another. Each series for an army, 
 army corps, division, or brigade, in the field, will commence 
 and terminate with a campaign. In departments, regiments, 
 Y 2 281 
 
70 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 companies, and garrisons, they will commence and terminate 
 with the year. 
 
 The parole, and countersign, or watchword, are issued 
 from the head quarters of the highest in command. They 
 are in the nature of orders, but are neither general nor 
 special. 
 
 The parole is imparted to such officers only, as have a 
 right to visit the guards, and to make the grand rounds ; and 
 to the officers commanding guards, by which they are ena- 
 bled, at night, to recognise the grand rounds. No person 
 under the rank of commissioned officer, is entitled to re- 
 ceive it. 
 
 The countersign, or watchword, is given to such persons 
 as are entitled to pass and repass during the night, and to 
 the officers, non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the 
 guards. The object of this word is to prevent improper per- 
 sons, or those not authorized to pass the chain of sentinels, 
 from either entering or going out of camp or garrison, and 
 to guard against surprise. 
 
 The head of the order will indicate the source from which 
 it emanates, as well as the place and date, and the foot of 
 the order will cite the name of the commander who gives 
 the order. 
 
 The orderly hour having been fixed at each head quarters, 
 the staff officers will either attend in person, or send their 
 assistants to obtain the orders of the day : the chief of the 
 staff for an army-corps, to general head quarters : the chief 
 of the staff of a division, to army-corps head quarters : the 
 chief of the staff of a brigade, to division head quarters : 
 the Adjutant of a regiment, to brigade head quarters : the 
 First Sergeants of companies, to regimental head quarters 
 
 382 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 71 
 
 ARRESTS AND CONFINEMENTS. 
 
 None but commanding officers have power to place officers 
 under arrest, except for offences designated in the 27th Arti- 
 cle of War. 
 
 It is not obligatory on the commander to place an officer 
 in arrest, on application to that effect from an officer under 
 his command. He will exercise a sound discretion on the 
 subject. 
 
 An officer in arrest may, at the discretion of his command- 
 ing officer, and on written application, have larger limits as- 
 signed him than his tent or quarters. 
 
 The arrest of an officer, or confinement of a soldier, will 
 be, as soon as practicable, reported to his immediate com- 
 mander. 
 
 Individuals placed in arrest may be released without being 
 brought before a court martial, by the authority ordering the 
 arrest, or by superior authorit)' - . 
 
 Individuals placed under guard with written charges, sign- 
 ed by an officer, will not be released except by the direction 
 of the commanding officer. 
 
 All prisoners under guard without written charges, will 
 be released by the officers of the day at guard-mounting, un- 
 less orders to the contrary should be given by the command- 
 ing officer. 
 
 An officer under arrest will not wear a sword, or make a 
 visit of etiquette to the commanding officer, or other superior 
 officer, or call on them, unless sent for ; and in case of busi- 
 ness, he will make known his object in writing. 
 
 COURTS MARTIAL. 
 
 In drawing up charges, the utmost precision must be ob- 
 served in specifying the fact to which criminality is attached, 
 and in describing the time when, and the place where, such 
 fact occurred. 
 
 A charge is not necessarily to be laid before a court mar- 
 tial in the form in which it has been drawn up by the com- 
 plainant, the officer who may order the court to assemble be- 
 ing competent to make such alterations in it as he may deem 
 requisite. But after a charge has been approved by the pro- 
 
 383 
 
78 PART IV. KEGULATIONS. 
 
 per authority, and ordered to be investigated, neither tho 
 judge advocate, nor any other person, is competent to change 
 it, without the consent of such authority. 
 ' An officer has no right to demand a court martial, either on 
 himself or on others ; the commanding-general, or officers 
 competent to order a court, being the judges of its necessity 
 or propriety. Nor has an officer who may have been placed 
 in arrest, any right to demand a trial, or to persist in con- 
 sidering himself under arrest after he shall have been re- 
 leased by proper authority. 
 
 After a prisoner has been arraigned on specific charges, it 
 is irregular for a court martial to admit any additional charge 
 against him, even though he may not have come on his de- 
 fence. The trial on the charges first preferred must be regu- 
 larly concluded, when, if necessary, the prisoner may be 
 tried on any further accusation brought against him 
 
 A prisoner eannot plead in bar of trial, that he has not 
 been furnished with a copy of the charges, or that the copy 
 furnished him differs from that on which he has been ar- 
 raigned. It is customary and proper to furnish him with a 
 correct copy, but the omission shall not void, though it may 
 postpone, the trial. 
 
 General courts martial may consist of any number of com- 
 missioned officers from Jive to thirteen inclusively : but they 
 shall not consist of less than thirteen when that number can 
 be convened without manifest injury to the service. 
 
 Any general commanding an army, or officer having at 
 least the rank of colonel, commanding a separate department, 
 may appoint general courts martial. 
 
 In ordering a general court martial it is not necessary to 
 designate the president by name, as the officer highest in 
 rank will preside. 
 
 In detailing officers to form a general court martial, it will 
 be sufficient to order as many as can be convened without 
 manifest injury to the service, within the limits mentioned in 
 the 64th Article of War, of which the ordering officers must 
 be the judge. 
 
 The greatest number of officers that can be detailed with- 
 out manifest injury to the service, will, in all cases, be or- 
 dered ; but on the appointed day of meeting the court mav 
 
 284 
 
PAHT IV. REGULATIONS. 73 
 
 consider itself authorized to organize and act, provided the 
 number does not fall short of five, unless otherwise ordered. 
 
 The court, after being duly organized, is to adjourn and meet 
 within the limits prescribed by law ; that is, between eight 
 in the morning, and three in the afternoon. 
 
 All members at a general court martial must be duly 
 sworn, vote, and give their opinions, beginning with the 
 youngest in rank. 
 
 The seat of a member of a court martial, who is absent 
 from sufficient cause, shall be considered as permanently va- 
 cated by him, and filled up accordingly. 
 
 Officers assembled to constitute a court martial may meet 
 and adjourn even when all the members are not present, but 
 no other act of theirs can be legal, without the presence of 
 the whole court, except in deciding on the validity of a chal- 
 lenge against a member. 
 
 The day and place of meeting of a general court martial 
 having been published in orders, they will not be changed 
 but by the authority ordering the same : and the officers ap- 
 pointed as members, the parties and witnesses must attend 
 accordingly. The judge advocate, at the opening, calls over 
 the names of the members, who arrange themselves on the 
 right or left of the president, according to rank. 
 
 The prisoner is then called into court, and however he 
 may have previously been confined, he must then appear 
 without bonds of any kind, unless there be danger of escape, 
 or rescue. 
 
 Before the members of a general court martial are sworn, 
 both prosecutor and prisoner shall have the right to chal- 
 lenge. 
 
 Peremptory challenges are not allowed at a court martial ; 
 the party must, therefore, assign his cause of challenge, 
 which is to be regularly entered on the proceedings. The 
 member objected to then withdraws, and the court being 
 elosed, deliberates and decides on the validity of the chal- 
 lenge. 
 
 Sufficient causes of challenge are — the expression of an 
 opinion relative to the subject to be investigated ; having been 
 a member of a court of inquiry which gave an opinion, or 
 of another court martial, in which the circumstances were 
 
 285 
 
74 PAKT XV. KEGCLATIONS. 
 
 investigated, either principally, collaterally, or incidentally, 
 — prejudice, malice, or the like. 
 
 On the arraignment of a prisoner, he must plead, simply, 
 either guilty or not guilty : but if he shall from obstinacy and 
 deliberate design stand mute, or answer foreign to the pur- 
 pose, the court will proceed to trial as if he had pleaded not 
 guilty. 
 
 It is the duty of the judge advocate to prosecute, in the 
 name of the United States, all persons who may be brought 
 before a general court martial : but as the officer who prefers 
 the charges is supposed to be the best acquainted with the 
 circumstances of the case and may have been aggrieved by 
 the prisoner to be tried, such officer will be permitted to act 
 jointly with the judge advocate. 
 
 When more prisoners than one are arraigned on different 
 charges before the same court martial, the members are liable 
 to be challenged, and the court is to be re-sworn at the com- 
 mencement of each case ; and the proceedings are to be made 
 up separately and signed, as if each prisoner had been tried 
 by a distinct court martial. 
 
 All preliminary forms having been gone through, the reg- 
 ular course of trial is as follows : The pi - osecutor calls his 
 witnesses, and produces his written evidence ; and may, if 
 he desire it, be examined as a witness in support of the 
 charges which he lias himself preferred, in which case his 
 testimony should be given before that of any other witness. 
 He must, during the prosecution, and before the prisoner 
 comes on his defence, produce all the evidence he has to sup- 
 port the charge. 
 
 The prosecution being closed, the prisoner then enters on 
 his defence, and adduces his evidence. In all cases where a 
 prisoner produces evidence on his defence, the prosecutor has 
 a right to reply ; but he cannot adduce any fresh evidence, 
 unless new matter has been introduced on the defence ; in 
 which case he is allowed to controvert it by corresponding 
 proof. 
 
 Both prosecutor and prisoner are allowed to take excep- 
 tions to the competency of a witness ; but these must be stated 
 in open court, and recorded on the proceedings, after which 
 the court decides on their validity. 
 
 Wlien no exception is made to a witness, he is to be duly 
 
 286 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 75 
 
 sworn, and then examined in chief by the parly which pro- 
 duces him ; the opposite party next cross-examines him, and, 
 in case new matter be elicited by this cross-examination, the 
 party calling him may re-examine him as to that new mat- 
 ter ; after which the court puts such questions as it may think 
 proper. 
 
 The trial being finished, the court is closed, and proceeds 
 to deliberate on its verdict and sentence. Members of courts 
 martial ought then to bear in mind, that they have two dis- 
 tinct duties to perform ; the one that of jurors, the other that 
 of judges. 
 
 In the first of these capacities, they are bound to find a 
 verdict, according to the evidence which has been produced 
 before them. But this verdict may either be general, declar- 
 ing the prisoner guilty or not guilty of the whole charge pre- 
 ferred against him, or it may be particular, finding that such 
 and such allegations have been proved, and acquitting the 
 prisoner of the others. They may also, in cases where the 
 offence admits of gradations, acquit of the degree charged, 
 and find the prisoner guilty in a lesser degree. But, they 
 must in all cases exhaust the charge, and declare their opi- 
 nion on each particular allegation which may be contained 
 in it. 
 
 In their other capacity, if the verdict be " guilty," all'the 
 members of a court-martial, though a minority may have 
 voted for the acquittal of the prisoner, are bound by their 
 oath, to duly administer justice, by awarding such a punish* 
 ment as is proportionable to the degree of guilt of which the 
 prisoner has been convicted. 
 
 In drawing up the findings and sentences of courts-martial, 
 the utmost precision is to be observed in specifying how far 
 the prisoner is guilty or not guilty of each charge or instance 
 of charge, and in specifying the exact nature and degree of 
 punishment which the court has awarded. 
 
 Whenever the proceedings of a court martial are to be 
 revised the revision is to be confined entirely to a 
 reconsideration of the matter already recorded on the pro- 
 ceedings. 
 
 Every officer commanding a regiment or corps, has autho- 
 rity to appoint, for his own regiment or corps, courts martial, 
 
 287 
 
76 
 
 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 to consist of three commissioned officers, for the trial and 
 punishment of offences, not capital, and to decide upon their 
 sentences. But such courts have power to try cases only 
 that are not capital ; nor does their jurisdiction extend to the 
 trial of commissioned officers. They cannot inflict a fine 
 exceeding one month's pay, nor imprison, nor put to hard 
 labour, any non-commissioned officer or soldier for a longer 
 term than one month. 
 
 Manner of sitting at a court martial. 
 
 Form of recording the proceedings of a court martial. 
 
 Proceedings of a general court-martial, held at Fort Mon- 
 roe, Va., by virtue of the following order : 
 
 288 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 77 
 
 Adjutant- GeneraVs Office, 
 Washington, November 1, 1888. 
 General Order, 
 
 No. 20. 
 A general court martial, to consist of seven members (a 
 greater number cannot be detailed without manifest injury to 
 the service,) will assemble at Fort Monroe, Va., on the 10th 
 instant, for the trial of such prisoners as may be brought 
 before it. The court will consist of: 
 
 1. Colonel J. B. ... 1st Regiment of Artillery. 
 
 2. Lt. Colonel W. D. . 6th Regiment of Infantry. 
 
 3. Major W. P. ... 3d Regiment Artillery. 
 
 4. Captain C. W. . . 2d Regiment Artillery. 
 
 5. Captain T. L. . . . 7th Regiment Infantry. 
 
 6. 1st Lieutenant C. S. . 2d Regiment Artillery. 
 
 7. 1st Lieutenant S. B. . 3d Regiment Infantry. 
 
 1st Lieutenant M. K. . 1st Regiment Artillery, spe- 
 cial judge advocate. 
 By order, of Major-General J. B. 
 
 R. J., Adjutant-General. 
 
 November 10th, 1838. 
 The court met pursuant to the above order. 
 Present. 
 Colonel J. B. 
 Lt. Colonel W. D. 
 Major M. P. 
 
 Captain C. W. \ Members. 
 
 Captain T. L. 
 1st Lieutenant C. S. 
 1st Lieutenant S.B. 
 1st Lieutenant M. K., judge-advocate. 
 
 The court being duly sworn* in presence of the prisoner, 
 
 * The following is the oath administered by the judge-advocate to 
 
 each member : " You A. B. do swear, that you will well and truly 
 
 try and determine, according to evidence, the matter now before you, 
 between the United States of America, and the prisoner to be tried, 
 and that you will duly administer justice, according to the provisions 
 of " an act establishing rules and articles for the government of the 
 armies of the United States," without partiality, favour, or affection ; 
 and if any doubt shall arise, not explained by said articles, according 
 Z 289 
 
78 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 proceeded to the trial of Sergeant A. B., of Captain 's 
 
 company of the regiment of who being previ- 
 ously asked if he had any objections to the members named 
 in the order, and answering in the negative, was arraigned 
 on the following charge and specification preferred against 
 him by Lieutenant M. K., of the 1st regiment of artillery. 
 
 Charge. 
 
 DESERTION. 
 
 Specification. — Jn this, that the said Sergeant A. B., of 
 
 Captain — ■ 's company, of the — : — regiment, of— , 
 
 did desert the service of the United States, at fort Columbus, 
 in the harbour of New York, on, or about, the 1st of Octo- 
 ber 1838, and did remain absent until apprehended and 
 brought back, on, or about, the 10th of the same month. 
 
 To which charge and specification the prisoner pleaded, 
 " not guilty." 
 
 Lieutenant C. D., of the 1st regiment of artillery, a wit- 
 ness for the prosecution, being duly sworn,* says, on the 
 1st of October last, Sergeant A. B. &c. &c. &c. 
 
 Question by the judge advocate. Did ? 
 
 Answer. I saw the sergeant 
 
 Question hy the prisoner ? 
 
 Answer 
 
 Question by the court. . 1 
 
 Answer 
 
 to your conscience, the best of your understanding, and the custom of 
 war in like cases ; and you do further swear, that you will not divulge 
 the sentence of the court until it shall be published by the proper 
 authority ; neither will you disclose or discover the vote or opinion of 
 any particular member of the court martial, unless required to give 
 evidence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in due course of 
 law. So help you God." 
 
 The following is the oath administered by the president to the judge- 
 advocate: "You A. B. do swear, that you will not disclose or 
 
 discover the vote or opinion of any particular member of the court- 
 martial, unless required to give evidence thereof, as a witness, by a 
 court of justice, in due course of law ; nor divulge the sentence of the 
 court to any but the proper authority, until it shall be duly disclosed 
 by the same. So help you God." 
 
 * The following is the oath administered by the judge-advocate to 
 
 the witness: "You swear (or affirm, as the case maybe) the 
 
 evidence you shall give in the cause now in hearing, shall be the truth, 
 the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. So help you God." 
 
 290 
 
PAHT IV. BEGULATIONSt 79 
 
 The court adjourned to meet to-morrow morning at ten 
 o'clock. 
 
 November 11th, 1838. 
 The court met pursuant to adjournment. 
 
 Present. 
 Colonel J. B. 
 Lt. Colonel W. D. 
 Major M. P. 
 
 Captain C. W. \ Members. 
 
 Captain T. L. 
 1st Lieutenant C. S. 
 1st Lieutenant S. B. 
 ■ 1st Lieutenant M. K., judge-advocate. 
 
 ■ Sergeant M. P., of company, regiment of , 
 
 a witness for the prosecution, being duly sworn, says : 
 
 I was sent, &c. dec 
 
 Question by judge advocate 1 
 
 Answer 
 
 Question by prisoner ? 
 
 Ansioer. . , 
 
 The evidence on the part of the prosecution being closed, 
 
 sergeant R, W., of regiment of , a witness for the 
 
 prisoner, being duly sworn, says, the prisoner, sergeant A. B. 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 Question by the prisoner 1 
 
 Answer. . . , , 
 
 Question by the judge advocate . 1 
 
 Answer 
 
 Question by the court .? 
 
 Answer 
 
 The testimony on the part of the prisoner having been 
 heard, he requested the indulgence of the court of one day 
 to prepare his final defence, which was granted. 
 
 The court adjourned, to meet again on the 13th instant, at 
 nine o'clock, A. M. 
 
 November 13th, 1838. 
 The court met pursuant to adjournment. 
 
 291 
 
80 FART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 Present. 
 Colonel J. B. ") g f Lieutenant-Colonel W.D. 
 
 Major M. P. S § j Captain C. W. 
 
 Captain T. L. f g* j 1st Lieutenant C. S. 
 
 1st Lieutenant S. B. J * I 
 
 1st Lieutenant M. K., judge advocate. 
 
 The prisoner being asked if he were ready to proceed, 
 made the following 
 
 DEFENCE. 
 
 Mr. President, and 
 
 Gentlemen of the Court-: 
 
 A. B., Sergeant. 
 
 The court being cleared, and the whole of the proceedings 
 read over to the court by the judge advocate, the following 
 finding and sentence were pronounced. 
 
 The court, after mature deliberation on the testimony ad- 
 duced, find the prisoner, Sergeant A. B., guilty of the speci- 
 fication and guilty of the charge, and sentence him to be 
 reduced to the station of a private sentinel, to serve at hard 
 labour with a ball and chain for the period of two months, 
 and to undergo a stoppage of one-half his monthly pay for 
 the remainder of his term of enlistment 
 
 The court adjourned sine die. 
 
 J. B., Col. 1st regH arfy, President. 
 
 M. K., Judge Advocate. 
 
 Usual manner of approving the proceedings of a court 
 martial. 
 
 Adjutant General's Office, 
 
 Washington, Nov. 20, 1838. 
 General Order, 
 No. 25. 
 By a general court martial, of which Colonel J. B>, of the 
 first regiment of artillery, is president, was tried Sergeant 
 
 292 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 81 
 
 A. B., of — company of the — regiment of — on tho fol- 
 lowing charge and specification : 
 
 [Here give the charge and specification.'] 
 
 To which charge and specification the prisoner pleaded 
 not guilty. 
 
 " The court, after mature deliberation," &c &c, [insert 
 the whole of the finding and sentence.] 
 
 The commanding general approves the finding and sen- 
 tence of the general court martial, and orders the sentence to 
 be carried into effect. 
 
 The general court martial, of which Colonel B. is president, 
 is hereby dissolved. 
 
 By order of Major-General J. B. 
 
 R. J., Adjutant General. 
 
 DUTIES OF QUARTERMASTERS. 
 
 It is the duty of quartermasters to provide quarters, hospi- 
 tals, and transportation for the army, and transportation for all 
 military stores, provisions, camp and garrison equipage, and 
 artillery ; to direct the survey, and superintend the opening 
 and repairing of roads, and the constructing and repairing of 
 bridges, which may be necessary to the movements of any 
 part of the army. To provide good and sufficient store- 
 houses for all military supplies and provisions. To purchase 
 all fuel, straw, forage, and stationary, required for the army, 
 and have them transported to the posts or places where they 
 may be wanted, and issued to those entitled to them. To 
 purchase all horses, oxen, mules, and harness ; and all 
 wagons, carts, and boats and other vessels, with their proper 
 equipments, for the transportation of the army, and for gar- 
 rison purposes ; to have the custody of the same, and be 
 responsible that they be not used for private purposes ; but 
 that they be employed or used exclusively in the public ser- 
 vice. To provide materials, and direct and superintend the 
 construction and repairing of quarters, barracks, hospitals, 
 storehouses, stables, and" other necessary and authorized, 
 buildings for the accommodation of the army, and the secu- 
 rity of the public property. To select, under the orders of 
 the generals, or other commanding officers, sites for encamp- 
 ment, and to assign to the different corps the ground they are 
 Z2 293 
 
82 TART IV. REGULATIONS. 
 
 to occupy. To have the general direction of foraging and 
 working parties, when the army, or detachments of it are in 
 the field. To direct the movements, and be responsible for 
 the prompt and safe transmission of all supplies required for 
 the service of any part of the army in the field ; and either 
 send them direct to the army, or place them in such con- 
 venient depots as the general commanding the troops may 
 direct. Finally, to make themselves acquainted with the 
 military resources of the country and the means and facilities 
 of transportation, particularly of the districts on the frontiers; 
 with the most eligible points for concentrating troops and 
 collecting supplies, whether in relation to offensive or defen- 
 sive operations ; and with the relative expense of concentrating 
 at particular positions, and the advantages of those positions. 
 
 DUTIES OF COMMISSARIES OF SUBSISTENCE. \ 
 
 Commissaries of subsistence are accountable for the safe- 
 keeping of all provisions entrusted to their charge ; and, to 
 this end, they will make requisitions on the quartermaster's 
 department for good and sufficient storehouses. They will 
 examine frequently into the state of the stores, to prevent 
 damage and waste, and make out and transmit to the proper 
 accounting officers, through the commissary general of sub- 
 sistence, the necessary returns and accounts. When pro- 
 visions have been inspected and delivered agreeably to the 
 terms of the contract, they will give to the contractor a re- 
 ceipt therefor, together with one of the certificates of the 
 inspector, stating, at length, the quantity and quality of the 
 articles delivered : a duplicate of the receipt and certificate 
 will be immediately forwarded to the commissary-general of 
 subsistence. 
 
 Should the failure of contractors, or other causes, render 
 it necessary that provisions should be purchased, the com- 
 missary will purchase provisions of the best quality, corres- 
 ponding as nearly as possible with those specified by contract, 
 and will forward to the commissary -general of subsistence, a 
 copy of the " bill of purchase," with a statement of the cause 
 of purchase endorsed thereon. 
 
 Should there be any surplus stores at the post, it will be 
 the duty of the commissary to report the fact to the commis- 
 sary-general of subsistence, and to state the probable price 
 
 294 
 
PART IV. REGULATIONS. 83 
 
 which can be obtained for them, with suggestions as to the 
 best means of disposing of them. 
 
 A suitable non-commissioned officer or soldier wiil be de- 
 tailed by the commanding officer, to assist the commissary in 
 the discharge of his duties. 
 
 The following are the component parts of the ration : — 
 Three-fourths of a pound of pork, or bacon ; or one and one- 
 fourth pounds of fresh or salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread 
 or flour, or twelve ounces of hard bread, or one and one- 
 fourth pounds of corn-meal ; — and at the rate of four pounds 
 of soap ; one and a half pounds of candles ;. two quarts of 
 salt ; four quarts of vinegar ; eight quarts of peas or beans, 
 (or, in lieu thereof,) ten pounds of rice ; four pounds of coffee, 
 and eight pounds of sugar, to the hundred rations. 
 
 It will be the duty of commissaries to issue to the troops 
 on consolidated returns signed by the commanding officer of 
 the post, regiment, or brigade. Issues to the hospital will be 
 made on returns signed by the surgeon, or assistant surgeon. 
 
 An extra issue of fifteen pounds of candles per month may 
 be made to the principal guard of each camp and garrison, 
 on the order of the commanding officer. 
 
 At all places where fresh beef can be procured for issue, 
 the commissary will purchase by contract, giving, if practi- 
 cable, due public notice for proposals ; the lowest responsible 
 bid will be accepted, and a written contract will be entered 
 into for the delivery of the beef at the post, at such times as 
 may be most conducive to the health and comfort of the 
 troops, not exceeding three times a week. 
 
 Should subsistence stores become damaged, or unfit for 
 issue, the commissary having them in charge will report the 
 fact to the commanding officer, who will institute a board of 
 survey, to be composed of not Jess thap two officers, or re- 
 spectable citizens may be associated with the officers for that 
 purpose, who will act under oath. All stores found damaged 
 and unfit for issue, from causes other than neglect of the 
 commissary, will be condemned and sold. Those which may 
 be found damaged by neglect of the commissary, will be 
 charged to his account. 
 
 295 
 
[ 85 ] 
 
 „ 
 
 
 pauasaa | 
 
 |» 
 
 It- 
 It 
 §1 
 
 «3 
 
 paw 1 
 
 ! 
 
 •pajjajsuBjj, 1 
 
 -paudi833 | 
 
 ■uoijJasaa uiojj ,, | 
 
 •iajsuEjj, Aq „ | 
 
 rd 
 
 •inaunsi|U3 Aq pauiof | 
 
 ftq> 
 
 •jjod^a 1SC[ div2ai3%v I 
 
 &1 
 
 •ajcSaiSav | 
 
 11 
 
 •Iejox 1 
 
 z 
 S 
 
 S3 
 < 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 50 
 
 i 
 
 •sajCAUj pus BUBiatsnjv 1 
 'sjaagjo pauotssuutuoo-uoN | 
 
 •sj33t[JO pauoissiuunoo | 
 
 >— ' 
 
 ii 
 
 •sajBAIJJ pUB SUBI3I3nj\[ j 
 
 
 'Siaatyo pauoissriniuoo | 
 
 
 Z 
 
 go 
 a 
 
 a- 
 
 •"W 
 
 •S3JEA1JJ PUB SUBI3I8 1 
 
 'sjaoiflo pan'oissiuinioo-'nojd | 
 
 
 •siaoqjo pauoissitumoo | 
 
 
 11 
 
 S3 
 
 •S3JBAUJ | 
 
 
 •SUBIDISTim | 
 
 
 ■sjsoifio pauoissitnuioo-uoM | 
 
 
 •siaoiyo pauoissiunnoo | 
 
 
 ft 
 
 53 
 
 •S3JBAUJ | 
 
 
 •SUEIDISriH | 
 
 
 •sjaoigo pauoisstuicnoo-uo^ | 
 
 
 •siaayjo pauoissiuimoo | 
 
 
 1 
 
 •SajEAIJJ | 
 
 
 •suEioisnjv | 
 
 
 •sjaoqjo pauoissituuioo-uo>i | 
 
 
 •sjaoujo panoissimuioo | 
 
 
 1" 
 
 1 
 
 •63JBAIJJ | 
 
 lh 
 
 •suEprsniv | 
 
 •siBiodjoo | 
 
 
 •siUBaSjag 1 
 
 •juBuainaiT; ps 1 
 
 •8 3** 
 
 juBuajnaiT isi | 
 
 
 
 
 •UIBjdBO 1 
 
 «0 .& 
 
 297 
 
c»|« 
 
 
 Is 
 
 'JtUCg I 
 
 298 
 
[ 87 ] 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 •3 I 
 
 ^111 
 
 "S ^ - b 
 
 S "S e a T, 
 
 2 o 
 
 PCS™ 
 o -g 
 
 SO "g J» 
 
 So ay 
 
 M £ -S° S 
 
 «. -co 5 
 
 ■g To _S © ,_ J2 .3 
 
 a 5 — "g S is "3. § I 
 
 o -w .2 o rt £ , 
 
 t! 5 S i) a ° o - .. S 
 
 a 2 S w 
 
 a S I • 8 °?° 
 
 
 all gi 
 
 g 3 u ^J g 
 
 S .3 -3 >» 
 
 ^ 3 s .3 B 
 
 bo 
 .3 
 
 1)1- . 
 
 a. a S - a -5 
 
 f * £ g 1 1 
 
 111 Ifi^s^s 
 
 g -o 
 
 •pajmb 
 -ai sjinja 
 -aji jo -on 
 
 
 
 
 •jajsnui 1 
 jsbi iejox I 
 
 •ajBSaj33v 
 
 'IBJOi 1 | 
 
 •sajcAijj 1 
 
 'suBiaisniv 1 1 1 
 
 •s[BJodaoo 1 | | 
 
 •8luBa§iag | 
 
 •jnaii ps | I I 
 
 •jnan ist 1 1 
 
 ■uiBjdc.) | 
 
 S3 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 ; 1 
 
 PS 
 
 iFor duty, 
 Extra duty, 
 In arrest or confinement, 
 C Detached service, 
 Absent, < Furlough, 
 ( In arrest or confinement, 
 
 5 
 
 P. 
 
 a 
 w 
 
 i . 
 
 j a f - - 
 = 2a SM gll 
 
 10 ** § fti. J2-UT3 
 
 h«£ Bfe o'oo 
 
 •jajsnui isbj 
 aouis saiJIEnsBo 
 pue suoijBjajiv 
 
 299 
 
[ 88 ] 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 05 •§ 
 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 rt P. 
 
 « 
 
 i 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 2" iii 
 
 a 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 «© 
 
 
 S 
 1 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 -SUU8I[U3-3J 
 
 joj aiip 'Xsd 
 
 BJ1X3 21$ 
 
 •» 
 
 
 "8 . 
 
 % 
 
 
 v> 
 
 
 i! 
 
 < o 
 
 i 
 
 
 <» 
 
 
 •iliuoni 
 
 <& 
 
 
 '3 
 
 a. 
 
 a 
 
 
 ■5 
 1 
 
 
 < 
 
 is 
 
 
 i 
 
 — 
 
 300 
 
[ 89 ] 
 
 oq 
 M 
 
 pa 
 
 S 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! •«? 
 
 
 
 •Diy 
 
 
 
 •02? 
 
 
 
 ■saxoq-sSpujjBO 
 
 | t| 
 
 
 •3ja[duro3 sjaiiSTij\T 
 
 -3 1/5 O 
 10 l~=: 
 
 
 •sjas 'saSBS-joqg 
 
 1 1" 
 
 
 •spunod 'qojBin amj(S 
 
 "» 855 
 
 
 •spd 'wpAiod uouubo 
 
 = 
 ci via 
 
 
 •saSsmBO-uiiS j 4 pd 9 
 
 « HB 
 
 
 
 : c 
 ..2 
 
 si 
 
 r " 3 
 °" 
 
 S|s 
 
 OB 
 
 1 
 
 '5 
 
 S 
 
 K 
 
 
 °5 ti> 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 1 
 
 IS 
 
 2A 
 
 301 
 
[ 90 ] 
 
 « '20 
 
 * 
 
 «> 
 
 ubSiis jo suoiiua 
 
 
 
 •aajjoojosuopBa 
 
 
 
 •jbSsuia jo suoijbji 
 
 
 
 •S3IPUB0 JO SUOIJBJI 
 
 
 
 ■dnog jo suoiibh 
 
 
 
 ■JIBS JO suoiibh 
 
 
 
 •SB9JJ0 SUOIJBJf 
 
 
 
 - -SUBOfl jo suopEH 
 
 
 
 •aDig JO SUOIJBH 
 
 
 
 •jfjoj jo suoiich 
 
 
 
 •jaaa qsajj jo suoijbh 
 
 
 
 •aoDsa jo suoiiBg 
 
 
 
 •|B9J\[ JO SUOIJEJI 
 
 
 
 •jnou jo suoijbji 
 
 
 
 MOJ 1 
 
 uaybjp stop jo jaqtunM 
 
 
 TOTAL. 
 
 
 * - U3UioAV jo 43qmnjv[ 
 
 
 
 •UOftt JO iBflUIIliV 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 303 
 
[ 91 ] 
 
 
 5 s 
 
 n ft » 
 
 02 Q* 
 
 3 3 
 
 w 
 
 < 
 ft 
 
 w 
 13 
 0> 
 H 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ■m»ipiiiHr 
 
 
 •squioj-Ciin;)! 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 •S13>|UEn-.lSJ0Hl 
 
 
 •saqsruq 3Sio[j| 
 
 
 •sitq-ssoMl 
 
 
 •«,adiuiULl 
 
 
 ■eaind-juaxl 
 
 
 ■Eiaojuommool 
 
 
 •«u h«mI 
 
 
 •S|D3) ||C M | 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 •rajijl 
 
 
 •ouidiaoj siorual 
 
 
 •siJipicii-diucol 
 
 
 •s .id-ss»iv 1 
 
 
 •m[i|3)|diuv3| 
 
 -{— 
 
 -npisdsi 
 
 •»xy| 
 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 8 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ■sqoCila.MJ^I 
 
 
 ■ajpEKHnrgl 
 
 
 •si3<|in:|g| 
 
 
 •S|TO3 iraifll 
 
 
 •s^dois JaqjraT| 
 
 
 •sired •sSaijpoisI 
 
 
 •sired 'sjoo(£ | 
 
 
 ■sums laaoei J | 
 
 
 11 
 
 •S3lEau<f 
 
 
 
 •sjaragjss 
 
 
 
 IN 
 
 •S3IBAUJ] 
 
 1 
 
 •sjawsaas 
 
 
 1 
 
 Hi 
 
 •ssieiujI 
 
 •snicaSissJ 
 
 Hi 
 
 •SSiEiUJ 
 
 
 
 •siaiaSjasl 
 
 
 •SIMJDBf |oo,wl 1 
 
 i! 
 
 •sreaodjool 
 
 
 jiaraang 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 •raiBAud p're siui i U^3| 
 
 «.c.»» nH | | 
 
 •slUE.SaasI | 
 
 
 •sdE") a^Ei'iJ 
 
 
 -a|3|d iiuo dco 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 5 . 
 1*1 
 
 1 
 
 qiStmis pnpv 
 
 
 — 
 
 •aoii^ziieSjo 
 
 
 •05 'sauredaroo jo noiiraSisag 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 °? 
 |§s-g 
 
 >5 ^ to 
 
 303 
 
RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 The following note from General Cadwalader, clearly 
 indicates the merits of the work. 
 
 Philadelphia, May 9, 1836. 
 
 Sir — Permit me to thank you for your kindness in sending me a 
 copy of the work just published by you, entitled " Tactics and Regula- 
 tions for the Militia," and in compliance with your desire I have given 
 it an examination, which, although a cursory one, has satisfied me that 
 the book is well adapted to its purposes : the course of instruction ia 
 concise, simple, and judiciously arranged, comprising all that is essen- 
 tial in the systems of Tactics for Infantry, Light Infantry and Ride, 
 Cavalry and Artillery. The fourth part consists of abstracts from the 
 Regulations, as to the precedence of Regiments and Corps, routine of 
 duties in Garrison and Camps, signals, orders of encampment for each 
 arm, Honours to be paid by Troops, Forms of Review and Inspection, 
 calling out the Militia for the service of the United States, and the 
 manner of issuing and distributing orders. The whole work is bound 
 in one volume of duodecimo size, and will be found a valuable assistant 
 to officers of volunteers and militia, to whom such a Treatise has long 
 been a desideratum. The names of the authors must at once stamp 
 the character of the work — when known to be prepared and arranged 
 by Captain Cooper, Aid-de-Camp, under the supervision of Major Gen- 
 eral Macomb, Commander-in-chief of the Army. It has been publish- 
 ed under the inspection of an accomplished Officer of the Army, sta- 
 tioned in this city. 
 
 Respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 (Signed) T. CADWALADER, 
 
 To Mr. R. P. Desilver, 
 
 No. 255 Market Street, Philadelphia. 
 
 From Major-General Patterson. 
 
 Philadelphia, lith May, 1836. 
 R. P. Desilver, Esq. 
 
 Dear Sir — I have examined the concise system of Instruction! 
 and Regulations for the Militia and Volunteers of the United States, 
 prepared by General Macomb and Captain Cooper. 
 
 The system is correctly laid down and clearly explained ; and ever£ 
 officer of volunteers or militia in the Union ought to have a copy, 
 cordially recommend it to the officers of the First Division. 
 With much respect, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 (Signed) R. PATTERSON. 
 
RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 Extract of a letter from Col. A. J. Pleasanton. 
 
 I have examined with attention this work, and with great pleasure 
 I bear testimony to its happy adaptation to the purpose for which it 
 has been designed. One of the great defects of our militia system has 
 been, heretofore, the want of proper books for e'ementary instruction. 
 This treatise, by supplying to the several corps of Cavalry, Artillery, 
 Infantry, and Riflemen, the necessaTy knowledge for their respective 
 services, will conduce, in a great degree, to the efficiency of volunteer 
 and militia troops. I recommend it heartily to all officers of -the volun- 
 teers or militia, believing that Captain Cooper has furnished a great 
 desideratum to his fellow-citizens in this work. 
 I am respectfully, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 (Signed) A. J. PLEASANTON. 
 
 R. P. Desilvkr. 
 
 Extract of a note from an Officer of the U. S. Army to Col. Hickman, 
 of Baltimore. 
 
 I, with much pleasure, state to you, that I consider the work com- 
 piled by Captain Cooper, of the U. S. Army, as one of the most valua- 
 ble works for volunteers and militia that has ever been published — it 
 is plain, concise, and contains all that can be desired for an officer of 
 volunteers or militia. The addition which Capt. C. has made to the 
 Tactics, giving our regulations for proper police in camp and garrison, 
 and the mode of forming parades and guard mounting, is indeed ex- 
 cellent, and will be of great service to our citizen soldiers. The work 
 is compiled for Infantry, Cavalry and Artillery, each treated of sepa- 
 rately. The work is cheap, indeed, and I have no doubt that it will 
 be eagerly sought after by officers, non-commissioned officers, and 
 privates of the different corps, for whose particular benefit it was 
 . got up. 
 
 Extract of a letter from Gen. B.J. Tappan, addressed to C. A.Harris, 
 Esq. acting Secretary of War, under date of lGth July. 
 
 Franklin, Tenn. 
 
 Dear Sir — Your favour of the 3d ultimo, together with a copy of a 
 System of Instructions and Regulations for the Militia and Vcluntecrs 
 of the United States, was duly received. I have examined the work, 
 and am very much pleased with it. I have no doubt but a ready sale 
 could be had in this state for a number of copies. A general system 
 of Tactics, in a concise form, has been wanted, and I think the work 
 now published will give general satisfaction. 
 
feKOOMMEKDATIONS. 
 
 FrOm Lt. Col. Worth, U. S. Army, formerly Comdt. of the corps of 
 Cadets, and Instructor of Tactics, at the Military Academy, Wist 
 Point. 
 
 Watervuet, Oct. 26, 1837. 
 
 I have examined, with great pleasure, your excellent compilation, 
 and although late, return my thanks for the copy you were good 
 enough to send me. 
 
 Containing, as it does, all the essential manoeuvres for marching 
 and fighting — the essence of fixed regulations and forms — the whole 
 admirably arranged, it presents, even to the finished tactician and 
 thoroughly read officer, a work of convenient and acceptable reference, 
 always, from it3 compendious form, accessible. 
 
 To the militia, the grand national and constitutional arm of defence, 
 I venture the opinion, that the work will be invaluable. A wise policy, 
 cither of the national or state authorities, would seem to suggest the 
 expediency of placing the work, at the state's expense, in the hand* 
 of every individual in commission. Few of those gentlemen have the 
 leisure, and perhaps a less number the taste or inducement, to go 
 through the same course of study, deemed by the masters indispensable 
 to aid in directing to accurate results the efforts of the experienced 
 and veteran officer. An attentive and spirited examination, however, 
 of the matter thus accurately and briefly presented, will enable the 
 militia officer, whom the common necessity shall call to the common 
 defence, to bring his corps into line with instructed regulars, without 
 any marked-distinction, other than such as the want of time and op- 
 portunity will readily account for. 
 
 For one, I return my sincere thanks for the industry which, guided 
 by experience and study, has thus placed within the reach of ull the 
 Clain path of duty. 
 
 W. J. WORTH, Lieut. ColoneL 
 
 Capt. Saml. Cooper, &c. &c. &c. 
 
 From Maj. Gen. Ryan, of Arkansas Militia, and formerly an officer 
 of U. S. Army. 
 
 Washington, Nov. 10, 1837. 
 
 I have experienced much satisfaction in the examination of your 
 work, entitled "Tactics and Regulations for the Militia." It is a 
 work which, in my opinion, will be invaluable to that arm of our na- 
 tional defence, and should be in the hands of every military man. 
 
 It contains all the necessary manoeuvres for the different corps of 
 the service, with regulations for duties in camp and garrison, and the 
 forms of parades, reviews, and inspections ; the whole so admirably 
 arranged, and in so compendious a form, as to be perfectly easy and 
 camprehensible to all. A work of this description has long been 
 wanted, and, as a uniform system of discipline is highly essential to 
 
4 RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 the efficiency of all military bodies. I sincerely hope that the work 
 in question will be adopted for the militia and volunteers of every 
 state in the Union, and each officer furnished with a copy. 
 
 S. V. R. RYAN, 
 Maj. Gen. Arkansas Militia. 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 From Capt. Hitchcock, U. S. Army, formerly Comdt. of the corps of 
 Cadets, and Instructor of Tactics, at the Military Academy, West 
 Point. 
 
 St. Louis, Mo. Nov. 20, 1837. 
 
 Very many militia officers have, at different times, desired me to 
 refer them to some book on the subject of tactics ; and, since the pub- 
 lication of your work, I have invariably referred them to " A Concise 
 System of Instructions and Regulations for the Militia and Volun- 
 teers of the United States," as being admirably adapted to give every 
 necessary information without being overloaded with details, scarcely 
 useful to the theorist, and embarrassing to the practical man. It 13 
 unquestionably the most valuable book for general use in this country, 
 if not in any country, embracing every principle — except in the evo- 
 lutions of the line not treated of, and every explanation necessary for 
 the comprehension of every man of ordinary capacity; giving, in 
 one small volume, all the useful matter of several volumes inaccessi- 
 ble to general readers, and at the same time, strictly in accordance 
 with the authorities. 
 
 E. A. HITCHCOCK, Capt 
 
 Capt. Cooper, 
 Washington. 
 
 From Maj. BaJccr, U. S. Army. 
 
 Allegheny Arsenal, Nov. 20, 1837. 
 
 Having devoted some time to the perusal and examination of your 
 "Tactics and Regulations for the Militia," I take the liberty to ex- 
 press my humble opinion of its merits, as a system of instruction, for 
 troops of every arm of our national fence. 
 
 The arrangement you have adopted, and the pcrspicuoupness of 
 explanation to which you have adhered throughout the work, renders 
 it perfectly clear and comprehensible to those even, whose previous 
 studies have not familiarized them with the subject of military ma- 
 noeuvres. 
 
 I have shown the book to volunteers, officers of rank and intelli- 
 gence: and they all commend it, and anticipate great improvement 
 in their commands UDon the introduction of this system. 
 
 R.I,. BAKER?* 
 
 Maj. U. S. Armv. 
 
 Capt. S. Coopfr. 
 
RECOMMENDATIONS. & 
 
 From Brigadier Gen. Brady, U. S. Army. 
 
 Head Quarters, 7th Military Dept 
 
 Detroit, Nov. 23, 1837. 
 
 I cheerfully comply with your request., and give you my opinion of 
 the system of Instructions and Regulations prepared by yourself for 
 the use of the militia and volunteers. In comparing it with other 
 systems that have been in force in the army, and among the volun- 
 teers and militia, I hesitate not in saying the preference ought to be 
 given to your book. Here the words of command and explanations 
 arc perfectly intelligible to the most common understanding ; and, 
 what is of not less importance, the work is very much condensed, 
 compared to other works of the kind. The less a citizen soldier 
 has to learn, to make him a good soldier, the better he will like it. 
 
 H. BRADY. 
 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 From Col. Smith, of Micliigan Militia, and late a Captain of 
 
 U.S. Army. 
 
 Monroe, (Mich). Nov. 24, 1837. 
 
 I, last winter, obtained at Washington a copy of the " Concise Sys- 
 tem of Instructions and Regulations for the Militia and Volunteers of 
 the United States," &c, prepared and arranged by you. My object 
 in procuring it was, to put its merits to the test in the regiment of 
 militia commanded by me, (the 2d regiment Michigan militia,) so 
 far as it might be found applicable to the Infantry arm of service. 
 
 I have diligently perused it in all its parts ; and it is but justice to 
 the work to say that I never have seen a better compound of our army 
 tactics, in every arm of service, as well as regulations, embracing all 
 that -can possibly apply to the militia. Indeed, it is difficult to 
 imagine a compilation, combining in a greater degree, all requisite 
 information, with compactness, clearness, and economy. All who 
 know any thing of the militia of the United States, are aware that 
 some work of this kind, embracing, as yours does, all recent revisions 
 and improvements, is absolutely necessary. Without the action of 
 Congress, each state will adopt some system, good or bad, and the 
 consequence will be what it always has been, an entire absence of 
 general system, with w r hich the militia of different states may ac- 
 quaint themselves; and thus be fitted, in case of necessity, f<»r 
 serving with the troops of any other state or of the United States. 
 
 I most sincerely hope that the matter will be brought before Con- 
 gress, who alone can remedy the evil under which the militia is now 
 labouring^ and trust your -excellent work may be pressed on their 
 attention, with a view to the purchase of a large number of copies, 
 not only for the volunteers who may be invited into the -service of the 
 general government, but for the militia of the different states. Much 
 would thus be done towards securing uniformity and sufficiency in the 
 
O RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 militia : toward which, however excellent may be our little army, the 
 country must ultimately look for defence against foreign invasion or 
 domestic difficulties. 
 
 HENRY SMITH. 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 - From Maj. E. Kirby, U. S. Army. 
 
 Brownsville, Nov. 26, 1837. 
 
 Having, during the last year, and on previous occasions, witnessed 
 the want of preparation and instruction with which militia entera 
 upon active service, I cannot refrain from urging you to take mea- 
 sures to make the merits of your compend of tactics and regulations 
 more generally known. 
 
 The frequency with which volunteers and militia are called upon 
 to act in conjunction with the regular forces of the United States, ren- 
 ders it all important that a system of instruction, brief, clear, and con- 
 formable to the regulations governing the regular troops, should be 
 readily accessible to them. Your work possesses these requisites in 
 an eminent degree, and with the addition of an appendix, containing 
 the Articles of War, and a short treatise on Courts Martial, explana- 
 tory of the ordinary forms of proceeding, would be all that is re- 
 quired, and should be in the hands of every militia officer in the 
 United States. 
 
 E. KIRBY. 
 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 From Gen. Atkinson, V. S. Army. 
 
 Jefferson Barracks, Dee. 8. 1837. 
 
 I have received your letter of the 9th ultimo, in reference to your 
 book of Tactics and Regulations for the use of the volunteers and 
 militia of the U. States. 
 
 I have examined it with some care, and consider it a work of great 
 merit, and well adapted to the instruction of the troops for which it 
 was compiled. I think it should be adopted by the Government for the 
 use of the militia, being concise, and yet comprehending all the ne- 
 cessary principles of instruction and a well digested code of regu- 
 lations. 
 
 That the work may meet with the encouragement it merits, is th6 
 wish of, &c. 
 
 H. ATKINSON. 
 
 Brig. Gen. U. S. Army 
 
 Catt. S. Coopfr. 
 
RECOMMENDATIONS. 7 
 
 v From Gen. Clinch, late of the Army. 
 
 St. Mary. Ga. Dec. 16, 1837. 
 Your system of Instructions and Regulations for the Militia and 
 Volunteers of the U. S. has been received, and read with deep atten- 
 tion and interest. I consider it admirably adapted to the purposes for 
 which it was intended. Such a system has long- been wanted, and ) 
 consider it highly creditable to your industy and talents, and every way 
 worthy the attention and patronage of Congress. 
 
 D. L. CLINCH. 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 From Maj. L. Whiting, U. S. Army. 
 
 Washington, Dec. 22, 1837. 
 
 I have examined, with much satisfaction, your " Tactics and Regu- 
 lations for the Militia and Volunteers," and most sincerely congratu- 
 late you on the success of your labours. 
 
 You have embraced, in a compendious and convenient form, all ot 
 tactics and of the regulations necessary to enable the militia and 
 volunteers to unite with regular troops, in the duties of the field, 
 camp, and garrison, without any perceptible difference, except in that 
 precision of movement and motion which can only be obtained by 
 time and practice. 
 
 A work of this kind has long been wanted : and it appears to me, 
 that wisdom and sound policy call for legislative enactment, to place 
 it in the hands of every militia officer in our country. 
 
 I think, also, that it might be advantageously substituted for the 
 first volume of Military Tactics, by Major General Scott, in the hands 
 of the serjeants of the army ; containing, as it does, in addition to the 
 school of the soldier and of the company, the regulations relative to 
 camp and garrison duties, parades, reviews, and inspections, with 
 which it is important they should be familiar. 
 
 Hoping the work may meet with the patronage it so richly merits, 
 I am, &c, 
 
 L. WHITING, 
 Maj. U. S. Army, 
 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
 From Col. Cutler, U. S. Army. 
 
 New York, Dec. 28, 1837. 
 I have examined your " Concise System of Instructions and Regt*» 
 lations for the Militia of the United States," with such attention as i 
 bave been able to bestow upon it. It appears to me sufficiently com- 
 prehensive, judiciously arranged, and well adapted to the purpose for 
 which it is intended. 
 
 E. CUTLER. 
 
 Col. 4th Infantry 
 Capt. Cooper. 
 
S RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 Philadelphia, Jan. 1, 1838. 
 My dear Sir — I would not think it necessary for me to add to the 
 many testimonials you have received from officers of high information 
 and experience in favour of your work upon Tactics and Regulations 
 for the militia of the United States, did I not seem to be called upon 
 to do so, from the fact of my having become especially familiar with 
 it, by the aid I rendered in its publication in this city. Having 
 watched, during that period, with much attention, every line of the 
 work, I came to the conclusion that it would be difficult, perhaps im- 
 possible, to render one for the purposes designed, based in all respects 
 upon the established rules and regulations of the service, more perfect 
 and useful ; and, while I think every military man in the country 
 owes you his obligations for having turned your talent and industry 
 to so good an account, I trust that the work will meet with the patron- 
 age it so richly deserves. 
 
 I remain most respectfully, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 
 iENEAS mackay, 
 
 • Major U. S. Army 
 
 Capt. Saml. Cooper, 
 Washington, D. C. 
 
 Extract of a letter from Gen. Keim, of Reading, Pa., to Col. Wm. 
 Amies, of Philadelphia. 
 
 January 29, 1838. 
 My dear Sir — It gives me pleasure to join with my friends in the 
 encomiums they bestow upon Capt. Cooper's Tactics. 
 
 The work has been perused by me with care ; and I find it embraces 
 all the evolutions that are classed among the elite movements of a 
 well-disciplined army, and also embraces the most choice and select 
 mode of performing the manual, as well as the school of the soldier. 
 
 We are greatly in want of such a system in our state ; and most 
 certainly this work is the best that, as an elementary one, could pos- 
 sibly be procured. 
 
 Let my_name be used in its approval wherever you may know that 
 this opinion will be of any advantage in its distribution. 
 Respectfully, 
 
 Your friend, 
 
 GEORGE M. KEIM. 
 To Wm. Amies, Esq.. 
 
 Gen. M'Duffee, of South Carolina, was so much pleased 
 with this work, that immediately on its publication, he pur- 
 chased five hundred copies, and distributed them through- 
 out the State : in addition, he so warmly spoke of its merits 
 that the Legislature of the State have authorised the pur 
 chase of five thousand copies. 
 
RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 From Gen. Wm. T. Rogers. 
 
 Senate Chamber, 
 
 IIarrisburg, Pa., March 19, 1838. 
 
 Sir — I acknowledge the receipt of your letter, accompanied with a 
 copy of Capt. Cooper's Tactics and Regulations for the Militia ; coin- 
 prehending the exercises and movements of Cavalry, Artillery, In- 
 fantry, and Riflemen — detailing Camp duty, and the forms of review 
 and inspections as established in the United States Army, under the 
 supervision of Major General Macomb. 
 
 Upon a hasty examination of the work, I was so well satisfied that 
 it ought to be placed without delay into the hands of the Military 
 Officers of this State, that I introduced the 10th section into the 
 Militia Bill, reported at the present Session. 
 
 I am pleased to say, that it has passed the Senate, been concurred 
 in by the House of Representatives, received* the Signature of the 
 Executive, and become a Law. From an estimate I have made, I 
 think it will require rising 10,000 copies of the work to furnish the 
 requisite supply. 
 
 Confident that this concise system will be the means of inculcating 
 and imparting valuable information to many of those who are asso- 
 ciated with the Military, I hope you will be able to supply the order 
 of the Adjutant General with as little delay as possible, in anticipa- 
 tion of our annual spring parades in May. 
 
 From a practical knowledge of Printing, I cannot withhold my 
 commendation of the handsome edition you have published, printed 
 with a fair type upon paper of good quality ; and from the number 
 of plates representing the Soldier's various evolutions, together with 
 the review inspection and music plates, it is certainly among the 
 cheapest works printed. 
 
 Very respectfully, 
 
 Your obd't servant, 
 [signed] W. T. ROGERS, 
 
 Chairman Senate Military Committee. 
 
 PENNSYLVANIA MILITIA AND VOLUNTEERS. 
 
 Extract from the Militia Law passed 1838. 
 
 Sec. 10. The Adjutant General of this Commonwealth is hereby 
 authorized and required to contract for a sufficient number of Cooper's 
 Tactics and Regulations of the Militia, and to supply each field, 
 staff and company officer of militia or volunteers of this Common- 
 wealth with one copy, and the expense thereof to be paid upon his 
 order, out of any unappropriated money in the State Treasury. And 
 it shall be the duty of the several Brigade Inspectors to take receipts 
 
10 RECOMMENDATIONS. 
 
 from the said officers with a condition that they shall he delivered 
 over to their successors in office, or returned to the Inspectors of 
 their respective brigades at the expiration of their commissions. 
 
 Sec. 13. That the State Treasurer is authorized and hereby re- 
 quired to pay, upon the certificate of the Adjutant General, to the 
 commanding officer of any regiment or battalion of Volunteers, any 
 sum of money not exceeding one hundred dollars for a regiment or 
 battalion : Provided said regiment or battalion shall at any time en- 
 camp for any number of days not less than three in one year, and the 
 sum so appropriated, to be paid for the transportation of tents and 
 other actual expenses of said encampment. 
 
 In pursuance of the 10th section, the Adjutant General of Penn- 
 6ylvania has subscribed for 10,000 copies of Cooper's Tactics, for 
 distribution, in obedience to the requirements of said section. 
 
5«;tw»V 
 
 WJ$\W\ 
 
 . vvyv 
 
 >w,v*v 
 
 vrfefik 
 
 ^/>^':>rVvvv^ >& 
 
 «.,»«, - -v.** V* ... .w, 
 
 "Wfy =« 
 
 Hop 
 
 /•V\ 
 
 
 Vk 
 
 
 ;^*vfe 
 
 
 - 
 
 v v\ -* Vi' 
 
 *s#\ 
 
mmmm^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 W^u 
 
 v*^l 
 
 tt^w 
 
 $•«: *VV V, 
 
 v ^- 
 
 
 'y^mwm 
 
 VWV^v.u« 
 
 ^MjuMVv,'*.' 
 
 WY_^ , 
 
 WV V '-.:W\w! 
 
 wwfc 
 
 
 £*k*